NDTPart 9
NDTPart 9
NDTPart 9
Chapter Chapter
Section Page Date Section Page Date
Subject Subject
Chapter Chapter
Section Page Date Section Page Date
Subject Subject
Chapter Chapter
Section Page Date Section Page Date
Subject Subject
Chapter Chapter
Section Page Date Section Page Date
Subject Subject
4 Oct 10/20
53-11-112 1 Oct 10/20 5 Oct 10/20
2 Oct 10/20
3 Oct 10/20 53-11-130 1 Oct 10/20
2 Oct 10/20
53-11-122 1 Oct 10/20 3 Oct 10/20
2 Oct 10/20 4 Oct 10/20
3 Oct 10/20 5 Oct 10/20
4 Oct 10/20
5 Oct 10/20 53-21-101 1 Oct 10/20
2 Oct 10/20
53-11-123 1 Oct 10/20 3 Oct 10/20
2 Oct 10/20 4 Oct 10/20
3 Oct 10/20 5 Oct 10/20
4 Oct 10/20 6 Oct 10/20
5 Oct 10/20
6 Oct 10/20 53-21-102 1 Oct 10/20
2 Oct 10/20
53-11-124 1 Oct 10/20 3 Oct 10/20
2 Oct 10/20 4 Oct 10/20
3 Oct 10/20 5 Oct 10/20
Chapter Chapter
Section Page Date Section Page Date
Subject Subject
Chapter Chapter
Section Page Date Section Page Date
Subject Subject
Chapter Chapter
Section Page Date Section Page Date
Subject Subject
2 Oct 10/20
3 Oct 10/20 53-41-177 1 Oct 10/20
4 Oct 10/20 2 Oct 10/20
5 Oct 10/20 3 Oct 10/20
4 Oct 10/20
53-41-157 1 Oct 10/20 5 Oct 10/20
2 Oct 10/20 6 Oct 10/20
3 Oct 10/20 7 Oct 10/20
4 Oct 10/20 8 Oct 10/20
Chapter Chapter
Section Page Date Section Page Date
Subject Subject
3 Oct 10/20
53-41-188 1 Oct 10/20 4 Oct 10/20
2 Oct 10/20
3 Oct 10/20 53-61-104 1 Oct 10/20
4 Oct 10/20 2 Oct 10/20
5 Oct 10/20 3 Oct 10/20
6 Oct 10/20 4 Oct 10/20
7 Oct 10/20 5 Oct 10/20
8 Oct 10/20
53-61-105 1 Oct 10/20
53-41-190 1 Oct 10/20 2 Oct 10/20
2 Oct 10/20 3 Oct 10/20
3 Oct 10/20 4 Oct 10/20
Chapter Chapter
Section Page Date Section Page Date
Subject Subject
Chapter Chapter
Section Page Date Section Page Date
Subject Subject
Chapter Chapter
Section Page Date Section Page Date
Subject Subject
Chapter Chapter
Section Page Date Section Page Date
Subject Subject
Chapter Chapter
Section Page Date Section Page Date
Subject Subject
Location
Access
Parts Examined in This Procedure
Effectivity
Tools and Equipment
Preparation and Cleaning
Procedure
Inspection of the Wing Lower Plank at STGR22
Between BL0.00 and LBL22.50 2
Inspection Procedure
Acceptance or Rejection Criteria
Close Out
Effectivity 2
Tools and Equipment
Preparation and Cleaning
Procedure
Inspection for Damage to the Brackets, the
Door Frame, Fittings and the Support
Structure of the Passenger Door 3
Inspection Procedure
Acceptance or Rejection Criteria 5
Close Out
Reference Information
Location
Access
Parts Examined in This Procedure
Effectivity 2
Tools and Equipment
Preparation and Cleaning
Procedure
Inspection for Damage to the Brackets, Fittings
and Support Structure of the Passenger Door 3
Inspection Procedure
Acceptance or Rejection Criteria 6
Close Out
General 1
Function
Reference Information
Location
Access
Parts Examined in This Procedure
Effectivity 2
Tools and Equipment
Preparation and Cleaning
Procedure
Inspection for Damage to the Frame, Fittings and
Back-Up Structure of the Overwing Emergency-
Exit-Door 3
Inspection Procedure
Acceptance or Rejection Criteria
Close Out
Close Out
Procedure 3
Close Out
Inspection for Damage to the Aft Center Post, and the Splice
Fittings of the Windshield Center
Post at FS202.75 Pressure Bulkhead
Acceptance and Rejection Criteria 3
Close Out
Close Out 4
Inspection Procedure
Acceptance or Rejection Criteria
Close Out
Inspection Procedure
Acceptance or Rejection Criteria
Close Out
Close Out 4
53-41-112
INSPECTION OF THE EMERGENCY LIGHT CUT – OUTS
AT FS416.50 AND FS491.50 53-41-112
General 1
Function
Reference Information
Location
Access
Effectivity 2
Tools and Equipment 3
Preparation and Cleaning
Inspection for Damage to the Bulkhead Web
and the Related Structure at FS409.00+128 4
Inspection Procedure
Inspection for Damage to the Bulkhead Web
and the Related Structure at FS559.00
Inspection Procedure
Acceptance or Rejection Criteria
Close Out 5
Access
Parts Examined in this Procedure
Effectivity
Tools and Equipment
Preparation and Cleaning 2
Inspection for Damage to the Wing Attachment Lug
Inspection Procedure
Acceptance or Rejection Criteria
Close Out
Effectivity 2
Tools and Equipment
Preparation and Cleaning
Procedure
Inspection for Damage to the Wing to Fuselage Attachment
Fittings (Lug Fittings) at FS513.00 and BL13.10
Inspection Procedure
Acceptance or Rejection Criteria 3
Close Out
Reference Information
Location
Access
Parts Examined in This Procedure
Effectivity
Tools and Equipment
Preparation and Cleaning 2
Inspection for Damage to the Intercostals, Channels, and
Adjacent Structure between FS409.00+128 and FS559.00,
and from BL36.00 to BL45.00
Inspection Procedure
Acceptance or Rejection Criteria
Close Out 3
Function
Reference Information
Location
Access
Parts Examined in This Procedure
Effectivity 2
Tools and Equipment
Preparation and Cleaning
Procedure
Inspection for Damage to the Underfloor Longeron
Assembly at FS409.00+128 and FS559.00
Inspection Procedure
Acceptance or Rejection Criteria 4
Close Out
Reference Information
Location
Access
Parts Examined in This Procedure
Effectivity 2
Tools and Equipment
Preparation and Cleaning
Procedure
Inspection for Damage to the Underfloor
Longeron
Inspection Procedure
Acceptance or Rejection Criteria 6
Close Out
Reference Information
Location
Access
Parts Examined in this Procedure
Effectivity
Tools and Equipment
Preparation and Cleaning 2
Inspection for Damage to the Fuselage Skin Panel from
FS559.00 to FS559.00+112, between
STGR6 and STGR20
Inspection Procedure
Acceptance or Rejection Criteria
Close Out
General 1
Function
Reference Information
Location
Access
Parts Examined in This Procedure
Effectivity
Tools and Equipment
Preparation and Cleaning 2
Inspection for Damage to the Fuselage Skin
around the GPS Antenna(s)
Inspection Procedure
Acceptance or Rejection Criteria
Close Out
Inspection Procedure
Acceptance or Rejection Criteria
Close Out
Effectivity 3
Tools and Equipment 4
Preparation and Cleaning
Procedure
Inspection of the Engine Support Beam
Inspection Procedure
Acceptance or Rejection Criteria 6
Close Out
Reference Information
Standard Practices Information
Job Set-Up 2
Procedure
Close Out
Access
Parts Examined in This Procedure
Effectivity
Tools and Equipment 2
Preparation and Cleaning
Inspection for Damage to the Pylon Canted Ribs,
Pylon Canted-Rib Splices, and Front Spar Braces
Inspection Procedure
Acceptance or Rejection Criteria 3
Close Out
Function
Reference Information
Location
Access
Parts Examined in This Procedure
Effectivity 2
Tools and Equipment
Preparation and Cleaning
Inspection for Damage to the Front Spar
Splice at BL6.00 and the Front Spar from
BL6.00 to the Tip 3
Inspection Procedure
Acceptance or Rejection Criteria
Close Out
Close Out
Close Out
General 1
Function
Reference Information
Location
Access
Parts Examined in This Procedure
Effectivity 2
Tools and Equipment
Preparation and Cleaning
Procedure
Inspection of the Rudder Interface 3
Inspection Procedure
Acceptance or Rejection Criteria
Close Out 8
INSPECTION OF THE RUDDER FRONT SPAR
AND SKIN 55-41-102
General 1
Function
Reference Information
Location
Access
Parts Examined in This Procedure
Effectivity 3
Tools and Equipment
Preparation and Cleaning
Procedure
Inspection of the Rudder Front Spar and Skin 4
Inspection Procedure
Acceptance or Rejection Criteria
Close Out
General 1
Function
Reference Information
Location
Access
Parts Examined in This Procedure
Effectivity
Tools and Equipment 2
Preparation and Cleaning
Inspection for Damage to the Lower Forward
Wing-Plank and the Front-Spar Lower Flange
at WS242.00
Inspection Procedure
Acceptance or Rejection Criteria
Close Out 3
Close Out
Inspection Procedure
Acceptance or Rejection Criteria
Close Out 4
Reference Information
Location
Access
Parts Examined in This Procedure
Effectivity
Tools and Equipment 2
Preparation and Cleaning
Inspection for Damage to the Aileron PCU
Access Hole from WS314.50 to WS330.25
Inspection Procedure
Acceptance or Rejection Criteria
Close Out 3
INSPECTION OF THE LOWER BUTT-STRAP
AND REAR-SPAR LOWER CAP AT AILERON
PCU CUT-OUTS, WS318.30 AND WS 324.40 57-21-135
General 1
Function
Reference Information
Location
Access
Parts Examined in this Procedure
Effectivity
Tools and Equipment 2
Preparation and Cleaning
Inspection for Damage to the Aft Lower Butt-Strap
and the Wing Outboard Rear-Spar below the
Aileron PCU between WS315.30 and WS327.40
Inspection Procedure
Acceptance or Rejection Criteria 3
Close Out
Function
Reference Information
Location
Access
Parts Examined in this Procedure
Effectivity 2
Tools and Equipment
Preparation and Cleaning
Inspection of the Wing Plug Rear-Spar, the Lower Skin and
the Doubler at WS353.0 Splice Joint 3
Inspection Procedure 3
Acceptance or Rejection Criteria
Close Out
Inspection Procedure
Acceptance or Rejection Criteria 4
Close Out
Close Out
| Reference Information
Standard Practices Information
Job Set-Up
Procedure 2
Close Out
General 1
Effectivity
Job Set-Up Information
Tools and Equipment
Parts
Reference Information
Standard Practices Information 2
Job Set-Up
Procedure 3
Close Out
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the repaired fastener holes in the
access−panels surround structures of the forward fuselage from FS220.00 to
FS235.00, and from STGR19 to STGR22 for cracks, corrosion and other damage.
NOTE: This data applies to the left and right side access−panels surround
structures. The inspection of the left side access−panel surround structure
only is given.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1 General
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 131/132 (refer to Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the inspection area is by the external− forward−fuselage skin surface.
E. Parts Examined in This Procedure
Refer to Table 1.
Table 1 − Part Identification Data for WS178.00
DRAWING OR PART
DESCRIPTION MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
NUMBER [1]
Skin panel 601R33010
2024−T42 clad sheet QQ−A−250/5
Surround doubler 600−33288
Note [1]: Numbers that do not include a dashed suffix are drawing numbers.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft post REO 601R−53−11−097 AND/OR 601R−53−11−112 AND/OR
601R−53−11−126 AND/OR 601R−53−11−128 AND/OR 601R−53−11−155 AND/OR
601R−53−11−158 AND/OR 601R−53−11−160 AND/OR 601R−53−11−162 AND/OR
601R−53−11−164.
A. Procedure
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(1) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless it shows
deterioration or local damage.
(2) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, chapter 51).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Access−Panel Surround Structure of the Forward Fuselage from
FS222.00 to FS235.00, and from STGR19 to STGR22
Refer to the areas shaded in Figure 2.
A. Inspection Procedure
NOTE: If the surface of any components are painted, look at the paint condition (for
signs of cracks and corrosion) in the component material.
(1) Examine the access−panel surround structure from FS222.00 to FS235.00, and from
STGR19 to STGR22 for cracks and corrosion. Carefully examine all of the repaired
fasteners holes around the access panel 131AL for signs of cracks and corrosion.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
NOTES
Left hand shown.
Right hand opposite.
1 Do not remove access panel
for inspection.
A
EXAMINE THE
FS 220.00 FS 235.00 SHADED AREA
STR 18L
SURROUND
DOUBLER
STR 19L
1 ACCESS PANEL
131 AL
(REF)
SKIN PANEL
STR 23L
REPAIRED FASTENER
HOLES A
VIEW LOOKING INBOARD
Inspection of the Forward−Fuselage Access−Panel Surround−Structure Between FS220.00 and
FS235.00
Figure 2
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 3
51−53−11−097 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
DETAILED INSPECTION OF THE REPAIR TO THE ENGINE SUPPORT BEAM UPPER AND LOWER
WEBS
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the locations on the engine
support beam that follow:
− Cap angles at FS640.00 outboard of LBL18.00 and RBL18.00
− Outboard edge of the doubler for the upper cap angle
− Doubler for the lower cap angle outboard of LBL9.50 and RBL9.50
− Upper web covered by the doubler and the doubler outboard of LBL18.00 and
RBL18.00
− Lower web and doubler outboard of LBL9.50 and RBL9.50.
B. Reference Information
(1) For additional data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The engine support beam is located in Zone 310 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the inspection area is through the aft−equipment compartment door
311BB (Refer to NDTM, Part 1, 51−01−04).
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft POST REO 601R−53−61−345.
A. Procedure
(1) Open the aft−equipment compartment door 311BB to get access to the engine
support beam (Refer to the AMM, Chapter 6).
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(2) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless it shows
deterioration or local damage.
(3) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, chapter 51).
5. Inspection of the Engine Support Beam Cap Angles and Upper Doubler Outboard of LBL18.00
and RBL18.00, and the Lower Web Outboard of LBL9.50 and RBL9.50 at FS640.00
Refer to to the areas shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
NOTE: If the surfaces of any component are painted, look at the paint condition (for
signs of cracks and corrosion) in the component material.
(1) Examine the areas that follow:
− Cap angles at FS640.00 outboard of LBL18.00 and RBL18.00
− Outboard edge of the doubler for the upper cap angle
− Doubler for the lower cap angle outboard of LBL9.50 and RBL9.50
− Upper web covered by the doubler and the doubler outboard of LBL18.00 and
RBL18.00
− Lower web and doubler outboard of LBL9.50 and RBL9.50.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (SRM 51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
A NOTE
Examine the shaded area.
C FS625.30
FS640.00
WL119.12
WL111.09
FS640.00
rnd5361345_009.dg, lr, 12/01/05
FS625.30
VIEW LOOKING UP ON
C
LOWER SURFACE OF ENGINE SUPPORT BEAM
Inspection of the Engine Support Beam Cap Angles and Upper Doubler Outboard of LBL18.00
and RBL18.00, and the Lower Web Outboard of LBL9.50 and RBL9.50 at FS640.00
Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 4
51−53−61−345 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the forward and the aft faces of the
pressure bulkhead, frame FS409.00+128, at the keel beam box (pressure box)
between RBL12.00 and LBL12.00 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1 General
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zone 150 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the main avionic compartment and the forward fairings area.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft repaired in accordance with Air Canada Drawing 53−10002.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801 and/or AMM TASK
25−81−02−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
E. Close the main avionic−compartment door 811 (Refer to Part 1, 51−01−03).
F. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
G. Install the left forward wing−to−fuselage fairing 191BB (Refer to AMM Task
53−82−01−400−803).
H. Install the right forward wing−to−fuselage fairing 192BB (Refer to AMM Task
53−82−01−400−802).
I. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
WL
73.00 WL
(REF) 69.00
(REF)
A
VIEW LOOKING AFT
rnd5341186_001.dg, jp, 16/09/99
AT FS 409.00 + 128
NOTES
LBL 12.00 WL 73.00
1 Optional trim. REPAIR WEB
(REF)
2. This inspection applies to all DOUBLER
LBL 9.00
aircraft repaired to Air Canada 53−10002−1
PRESSURE
drawing 53−10002. BULKHEAD WEB
601R32208−123
BL 0.00
C
RBL 9.00
PRESSURE RBL 12.00
BULKHEAD WEB
601R32208−123
FILLER
53−10002−27
FILLER
53−10002−9
FRAME ANGLE
601R32208−15
(REF)
1
FRAME ANGLE
53−10002−11
EXAMINE THE
PRESSURE BOX
SHADED AREA
(REF)
PRESSURE BOX
ANGLE 53−10002−17
1
ANGLE
601R−53−31−019−19
FRAME ANGLE
ANGLE
601R32208−16
(REF) 601R−53−31−012−22
rnd5153103_002.dg, jp/rm, 04/11/99
FRAME ANGLE
53−10002−12
B
VIEW LOOKING AFT AT
FS 409.00 + 128 BETWEEN
RBL 12.00 AND LBL 12.00
Inspection of the Pressure Bulkhead at FS409.00+128
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
LBL 9.00
PRESSURE
BULKHEAD WEB
601R32208−123
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
RBL 12.00
D
TRANSVERSE ANGLE
601R−53−31−012−13
(REF)
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
FILLER
601R−53−31−012−15 LBL 12.00
ANGLE
601R32308−79
rnd5153103_003.dg, jp, 25/10/99
(REF)
C
VIEW LOOKING FORWARD AT
FS 409.00 + 128 BETWEEN
RBL 12.00 + LBL 12.00
PRESSURE
RBL 9.00 BULKHEAD WEB
FILLER 601R32208−123
53−10002−3
BL 0.00
ANGLE
601R32208−81
(REF)
FILLER
LBL 9.00 601R−53−31−012−15
REPAIR WEB
DOUBLER
53−10002−1
2.00 in.
(50.80 mm)
RBL 12.00
TRANSVERSE
ANGLE
601R−53−31−012−13
EXAMINE THE
LBL 12.00
SHADED AREA
rnd5153103_004.dg, jp, 15/11/99
INSPECTION OF THE WING LOWER PLANK AT STGR22 BETWEEN BL0.00 AND LBL22.50
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the repaired wing lower plank along
STGR22 between BL0.00 and LBL22.50 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1, General
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 510 (refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the inspection area is by the external lower−wing surface.
E. Parts Examined in This Procedure
Refer to Table 1.
Table 1 − Part Identification Data
ITEM
DRAWING OR PART
NO. DESCRIPTION MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
NUMBER [2]
[1]
7475−T7351 AL ALY
1 Lower forward panel 601R10044 −−−−
plate
NOTE [1]: Item numbers correspond to item numbers in Figure 1.
NOTE [2]: Numbers that do not include a dashed suffix are drawing numbers.
2. Effectivity
A. Aircraft 7046 and all other aircraft repaired in accordance with REO 601R−57−21−008.
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless it shows
deterioration or local damage.
(2) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, chapter 51).
5. Inspection of the Wing Lower Plank at STGR22 Between BL0.00 and LBL22.50
Refer to the area shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Do the inspection that follows at FS 409.00+128 and FS 559.00:
(a) Inspect the repair area on the wing plank along STGR22 between BL0.00 and
LBL22.50 and 3.75 in (95.25 mm) forward and aft of STGR22 for cracks and
corrosion. Pay particular attention to the areas that follow:
− The edge of the 2.0−in (80.8−mm) hole in the center of the repair
− The repair fasteners holes.
(b) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
NOTE
1 Examine the
shaded area.
rnd5721008_001.dg, lr, 08/03/04
AWL 52−11−101
1. General
A. This inspection is used to visually examine the internal and external structure of the
passenger door for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
2. Effectivity
REFERENCE DESIGNATION
Commercially Available Explosion Proof−Flashlight
Commercially Available Mirror−Telescopic
Commercially Available Magnifying Glass − 10 Power
B. Parts
DRAWING MATERIAL
ITEM DESCRIPTION
NUMBER SPECIFICATION
1 Side panel 601R31907 2024−T42
2 Outer skin 2024−T3
3 Inner skin 7075−T6
4 Door frame 601R31902
2024−T42
5 Intercostals
6 Doubler 2024−T4
C. Reference Information
4. Job Set−Up
ACCESS DESIGNATION
832AL/832AR Access panel
832BL/832BR Access panel
832CL/832CR Access panel
832DL/832DR Access panel
832EL/832ER Access panel
832FL/832FR Access panel
832GL Access panel
832HL Inner vent panel
832JL Access panel
832KL Access panel
H. If the finish in the inspection area is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish.
I. Remove the CMS 532−02 resin (drainage ramp) in the lower portion of the passenger
door (Refer to the In−Service Modsum IS601R52110030).
5. Procedure
Refer to Figure 1.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
52−11−101 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
A. Do the detailed inspection of the passenger door internal and external structure as
follows:
(1) Externally examine the door external skin. Pay particular attention to the vent holes,
also the cut−outs for the vent flap and door handle.
(2) Internally examine the inner door skin, surrounding door frames, and intercostals
structure. Pay particular attention to the frame attachments, skin cut−outs and
fastener holes.
(3) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
(4) Make sure that there are no cracks, scratches, dents, gouges, corrosion or
damaged, loose or missing fasteners.
B. If necessary, send a defect and damage report to MHI RJ Group (SRM 51−13−01).
6. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish.
B. If necessary, apply water−displacing corrosion−inhibiting compound (CIC) to the
applicable surfaces (AMM 51−25−56−390−802).
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
D. Close the inner skin (Refer to In−Service Modsum IS601R52110030).
ACCESS DESIGNATION
832AL/832AR Access panel
832BL/832BR Access panel
832CL/832CR Access panel
832DL/832DR Access panel
832EL/832ER Access panel
832FL/832FR Access panel
832GL Access panel
832HL Inner vent panel
832JL Access panel
832KL Access panel
A
C
D C
C
C
SIDE PANEL
1
INNER SKIN
3 C
C
A
VENT HOLE
LOWER SEAL
RETAINER DRAIN TUBE
rnd5211101_001.dg, rm/pw, 01/11/01
(REF) (REF)
OUTER SKIN
2
B
DOUBLER
NOTE 6
Examine the shaded
C
area.
Inspection of the Passenger−Door Internal and External Structure
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
FS 338.90 NOTES
(REF)
Examine the shaded area.
FS 320.10 Examine the inner and outer
(REF) skin.
INTERCOSTALS
5
DOOR FRAME
4
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the passenger door brackets, the door
frame, the fittings and the support structure.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1 General
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The passenger door is in Zone 832 (refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Remove these components in the inspection area as follows:
− The bottom folding−step assembly 832FT (remove this step assembly to get
access to the latch cams and latch brackets)
− The bottom step (832AT) (remove this step to get access to the latch cam backup
fittings).
− Access panels 832AL, 832AR, 832CL, 832CR, 832DL, 832DR, 832ER and 832FL
(remove these panels to get access to the lockpin fittings, tension fittings and
related structure of the passenger door).
E. Parts Examined in This Procedure
Refer to Table 1.
(e) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the
finish (Refer to the SRM, chapter 51).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Brackets, the Door Frame, Fittings and the Support Structure of
the Passenger Door
Refer to the area shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
NOTE: If the surfaces of any component are painted, look at the paint condition (for
signs of cracks and corrosion) in the component material.
(1) Examine the passenger door components that follow for cracks and corrosion:
− Latch cams (1), latch cam brackets (2), and the latch cam backup fittings (3) and
(4)
− Tension ties (5)
− Latchpins (6) and latchpin fittings (7)
− Related structure (this includes the local door skin, frames and intercostal
components).
NOTE: Use the applicable borescope probe to examine the internal components.
(2) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
NOTES
1
1 Examine the shaded area.
C 4 1 1
A
E
A
E
1 3
2
2
B
C 1
D
7
rnd5211102_003.dg, jp/lr, may29/2007
6 1
E F
Inspection of the Passenger Door Brackets, Fittings and Support Structures
Figure 1
E. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the internal and external structure of the
passenger door for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− In−Service Modsum IS601R52110030.
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 832 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the components in the inspection area is by the passenger−door outer
skin, top step, bottom step, folding bottom step, and internal panels.
E. Parts Examined in This Procedure
Refer to Table 1.
A. Procedure
(1) Prepare the inspection area as follows:
(a) Remove the passenger door (Refer to AMM 52−11−00−000−803).
(b) Remove the access panels and fairings that follow (Refer to NDTM Part 1,
51−01−04):
(c) Remove the bottom folding step 832FT (Refer to AMM Task
52−11−04−000−802).
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY
PROTECTION WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE
POISONOUS AND SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(d) Remove the CMS 532−02 resin (drainage ramp) in the lower portion of the
passenger door (Refer to the In−Service Modsum IS601R52110030).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
52−11−104 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
A. Inspection Procedure
NOTE: If the surfaces of any component are painted, look at the paint condition (for
signs of cracks and corrosion) in the component material.
(1) Externally examine the door external skin. Pay particular attention to the vent holes,
also the cut−outs for the vent flap and door handle.
(2) Internally examine the inner door skin, surrounding door frames, and intercostals
structure. Pay particular attention to the frame attachments, skin cut−outs and
fastener holes.
(3) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
6. Acceptance or Rejection Criteria
A. All signs of corrosion or cracks are cause for rejection.
B. All signs of damaged fasteners are cause for rejection.
C. Record and report results in accordance with company guidelines and policies.
D. For indications that exceed the allowable limits, it is recommended that you contact
MHIRJ Customer Support (refer to SRM 51−13−01).
SIDE PANEL
1
NOTE
Examine the shaded
area. B
INNER SKIN
VENT HOLE 3
SEAL
RETAINER
rnd5211104_001.dg, jc/kms, 29/10/01
4 A
OUTER SKIN
2
B DOUBLER
TYPICAL 5
Inspection of the Phase IV Passenger−Door Internal and External Structure
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
FS 338.90
(REF)
FS 320.10
(REF)
INTERCOSTALS
7
NOTES
Examine the shaded area.
Examine the inner and outer
skin.
DOOR FRAME
6
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Apply CMS 565−06 Type II Corrosion Inhibiting Compound (Refer to SRM 51−21−11).
C. Close−out inner skin (Refer to In−Service Modsum IS601R52110030).
D. Install the bottom folding step 832FT (Refer to AMM Task 52−11−04−400−802).
E. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
F. Install the access panels and fairings that follow (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−04):
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the passenger door brackets, fittings, and
support structure for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1 General
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The passenger door is in Zone 832 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the components in the inspection area is by the passenger−door bottom
step, folding bottom step, and internal panels.
2. Effectivity
A. Procedure
(1) Prepare the inspection area as follows:
(a) Remove the access panels that follow (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−04):
(b) Remove the bottom step 832AT (Refer to AMM task 52−11−04−000−803).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
52−11−105 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
(c) Remove the bottom folding step 832FT (Refer to AMM Task
52−11−04−000−802).
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY
PROTECTION WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE
POISONOUS AND SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(d) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless it shows
deterioration or local damage.
(e) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the
finish (Refer to the SRM, chapter 51).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Brackets, Fittings and Support Structure of the Passenger Door
Refer to the areas shaded in Figure1.
A. Inspection Procedure
NOTE: If the surfaces of any component are painted, look at the paint condition (for
signs of cracks and corrosion) in the component material.
(1) Examine the passenger door components that follow for cracks and corrosion:
− Latch cams (1), upper forward and aft latch fittings (2) and (3)
− Upper outer and inner fittings (4) and (5)
− Tension fittings (6) and tension fitting guide plates (7)
− Latch pins (8) and latch pin fittings (9)
− Lever mechanism (10) and bearing assembly (11)
− Related structure (this includes the local door skin, frames and intercostal
components).
NOTE: Use the applicable borescope probe to examine the internal components.
(2) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
B 2
3
C
E A
1
A
4
5
1
NOTES
1 Examine the shaded area. B
Inspection of the Phase IV Passenger Door Brackets, Fittings and Support Structures
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
1 1
D 2
NOTES
1 Examine the shaded
area.
2 Examine the local 7
6 C support structure. D
1
9
F
1
2
F
8
E
H
rnd5211105_002.dg, gb, 06/04/08
1
11
2
H
10 G
Inspection of the Phase IV Passenger Door Brackets, Fittings and Support Structures
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
E. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the passenger door piano−hinge half on
the door side.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1 General
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The passenger door hinge is in Zone 832 (refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Remove these components in the inspection area as follows:
− The passenger door hinge fairings
− The top step panel (lift this panel to get access to the hinge).
E. Parts Examined in This Procedure
Refer to Table 1.
2. Effectivity
A. All Aircraft.
A. Procedure
(1) Prepare the inspection area as follows:
(a) Remove the access panels that follow (Refer to Part 1, 51−01−04):
(b) Remove the top step panel 832ET (lift this panel to get access to the door
hinge and door structure) (Refer to AMM Task 52−11−04−000−801)
(c) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the part unless it shows
deterioration or local damage.
(d) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the
finish (Refer to the SRM, chapter 51).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Passenger Door Piano−Hinge Half of the Passenger Door
Refer to the area shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the passenger door hinge half (1) for cracks or damage to the lugs.
(2) Examine the passenger door hinge with the door in the open position and in the
closed position.
NOTE
Shaded area is
to be inspected.
HINGE HALF
1
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the overwing−emergency−exit−door
stop fittings, hook fittings, latch fittings, door frame and the support fittings,
diaphragms and attachment brackets for cracks, corrosion and other damage.
NOTE: This data applies to the two overwing emergency−exit doors. The
inspection of the left side door only is given. The right side is similar.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The areas are in Zones 833, 843, 261 and 262 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is from the passenger compartment.
NOTE: It is necessary to remove the overwing emergency−exit door to do the
inspection.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft pre−Modsum TC601R25121 (redesigned door stop fitting and additional webs
around bolt holes).
A. Procedure
(1) Remove the overwing emergency−exit door (Refer to the AMM, Chapter 52).
(2) Remove the access panels 833BZ/843BZ and lining panels 833AZ/843AZ (Refer to
Part 1, 51−01−04, and the AMM, Chapter 6).
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(3) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the paint or primer from the parts unless it
shows deterioration or local damage.
(4) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, chapter 51).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Frame, Fittings and Back−Up Structure of the Overwing
Emergency−Exit−Door
Refer to the areas shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
NOTE: If the surfaces of any component are painted, look at the paint condition (for
signs of cracks and corrosion) in the component material.
(1) Use the inspector’s mirror and a light source to examine the following structure for
cracks and corrosion:
(a) Six door stop fittings, door frame inner, support fittings and diaphragms.
Carefully examine the fillet radius of the fittings.
(b) Two hook fittings, door frame lower, attachment brackets, inner and outer skin.
(c) Two latch fittings, door frame upper, attachment brackets, inner and outer skin.
(d) Carefully examine the backup structure at all locations.
(2) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
7. Close−Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Install the access panels 833BZ/843BZ and lining panels 833AZ/843AZ (Refer to Part 1,
51−01−03, and the AMM, Chapter 6).
C. Install the overwing emergency−exit door (Refer to the AMM, Chapter 52).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
F
A
STR 9
STR 12
B
NOTES
Left side of aircraft is shown.
Right side of aircraft is similar.
1 Examine the inner and outer skin. STR 14
Examine the shaded area.
DIAPHRAGM
DOOR 5
STOP SUPPORT
FITTING FITTING
8 1
rnd5221102_001.dg, pm/rm, 03/10/01
STOP 1
SCREW
11
DIAPHRAGM
DOOR FRAME 5
LOWER
3 B C
TYPICAL 6 PLACES BACKUP STRUCTURE
TYPICAL 6 PLACES
Overwing Emergency−Exit−Door Fittings and Back−Up Structures
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
INNER
SKIN E
12
OUTER
SKIN
1 13
DOOR FRAME
LOWER
3 SEAL
(REF)
HOOK
NOTES FITTING
10
Examine the inner and outer skin.
D
Examine the shaded area. TYPICAL 2 PLACES
DOOR FRAME
ATTACHMENT LOWER
3
BRACKET
7
1
INNER
SKIN
12
SEAL E
(REF) BACKUP STRUCTURE
TYPICAL 2 PLACES
Overwing Emergency−Exit−Door Fittings and Back−Up Structures
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
LATCH
FITTING
9
SEAL
(REF)
DOOR FRAME
UPPER
4
NOTES G
Examine the inner and outer skin.
F
Examine the shaded area. TYPICAL 2 PLACES
DOOR FRAME
UPPER
4
INNER
SKIN
12
1
rnd5221102_003.dg, pm/rm, 18/07/01
ATTACHMENT
BRACKET
7 G
BACKUP STRUCTURE
TYPICAL 2 PLACES
Overwing Emergency−Exit−Door Fittings and Back−Up Structures
Figure 1 (Sheet 3)
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the overwing−emergency−exit−door
stop fittings, hook fittings, latch fittings, door frame and the support fittings,
diaphragms and attachment brackets for cracks, corrosion and other damage.
NOTE: This data applies to the two overwing emergency−exit doors. The
inspection of the left side door only is given. The inspection of the right
side door is similar.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The areas are in Zones 833, 843, 261 and 262 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03.
D. Access
(1) Access is from the passenger compartment.
NOTE: It is necessary to remove the overwing emergency−exit door to do the
inspection.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft ore−Modsum TC601R25121 (redesigned door stop fitting and additional webs
around bolt holes).
A. Procedure
(1) Remove the overwing emergency−exit door (Refer to the AMM, Chapter 52).
(2) Remove the access panels 833BZ/843BZ and lining panels 833AZ/843AZ (Refer to
Part 1, 51−01−04, and the AMM, Chapter 6).
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(3) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the paint or primer from the parts unless it
shows deterioration or local damage.
(4) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, Chapter 51).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Frame, Fittings and Back−Up Structure of the Overwing
Emergency−Exit−Door
Refer to the areas shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
NOTE: If the surfaces of any component are painted, look at the paint condition (for
signs of cracks and corrosion) in the component material.
(1) Use the inspection mirror and a light source to examine the following structure for
cracks and corrosion:
(a) Six door stop fittings, door frame inner, support fittings and diaphragms.
Carefully examine the fillet radius of the fittings.
(b) Two hook fittings, door frame lower, attachment brackets, inner and outer skin.
(c) Two latch fittings, door frame upper, attachment brackets, inner and outer skin.
(d) Carefully examine the backup structure at all locations.
(2) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
7. Close−Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Install the access panels 833BZ/843BZ and lining panels 833AZ/843AZ (Refer to Part 1,
51−01−03, and the AMM, Chapter 6).
C. Install the overwing emergency−exit door (Refer to the AMM, Chapter 52).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
F
A
STR 9
STR 12
B
NOTES
Left side of aircraft is shown.
Right side of aircraft is similar.
1 Examine the inner and outer skin. STR 14
Examine the shaded area.
DIAPHRAGM
DOOR 5
STOP SUPPORT
FITTING FITTING
8 1
rnd5221102_001.dg, pm/rm, 03/10/01
STOP 1
SCREW
11
DIAPHRAGM
DOOR FRAME 5
LOWER
3 B C
TYPICAL 6 PLACES BACKUP STRUCTURE
TYPICAL 6 PLACES
Overwing Emergency−Exit−Door Fittings and Back−Up Structures
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
INNER
SKIN E
12
OUTER
SKIN
1 13
DOOR FRAME
LOWER
3 SEAL
(REF)
HOOK
NOTES FITTING
10
Examine the inner and outer skin.
D
Examine the shaded area. TYPICAL 2 PLACES
DOOR FRAME
ATTACHMENT LOWER
3
BRACKET
7
1
INNER
SKIN
12
SEAL E
(REF) BACKUP STRUCTURE
TYPICAL 2 PLACES
Overwing Emergency−Exit−Door Fittings and Back−Up Structures
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
LATCH
FITTING
9
SEAL
(REF)
DOOR FRAME
UPPER
4
NOTES G
Examine the inner and outer skin.
F
Examine the shaded area. TYPICAL 2 PLACES
DOOR FRAME
UPPER
4
INNER
SKIN
12
1
rnd5221102_003.dg, pm/rm, 18/07/01
ATTACHMENT
BRACKET
7 G
BACKUP STRUCTURE
TYPICAL 2 PLACES
Overwing Emergency−Exit−Door Fittings and Back−Up Structures
Figure 1 (Sheet 3)
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the fittings, formers, intercostals, and
outer skin of the overwing emergency exit.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1 General
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The emergency exit is in Zone 833/843 (refer to NDTM Part 1 General, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) It is necessary to remove the emergency exit from the aircraft and to remove the
lining panel (833AZ/843AZ) and the access panel (833BZ/843BZ) to do this
inspection.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft post Modsum TC601R25160.
A. Procedure
(1) Remove the overwing emergency exit (Refer to AMM Task 52−21−00−000−801).
(2) Remove access panels 833BZ/843BZ and lining panels 833AZ/843AZ (Refer to AMM
Task 25−26−04−000−801).
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(3) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless it shows
deterioration or local damage.
(4) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, chapter 51).
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Do the inspection that follows:
NOTE: If the surfaces of any component are painted, look at the paint condition
for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component material.
(a) Examine the overwing emergency exit components that follow for cracks and
corrosion:
− Six door stops
− Two door hooks
− Two door latches
− crossmembers
− Intercostals
− Lipped doubler
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
52−21−105 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
− Cover plate
− Outer skin.
Pay particular attention to the related support structure for the stops, hooks,
and latches. Also make sure to inspect the fillet radius of the stops, hooks, and
latches.
(b) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Install access panels 833BZ/843BZ and lining panels 833AZ/843AZ (Refer to AMM Task
25−26−04−400−801).
C. Install the overwing emergency exit (Refer to AMM Task 52−21−00−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
A 5
C
4
C
INTERCOSTAL C
CROSSMEMBER 1
CROSSMEMBER 2
CROSSMEMBER 3
INTERCOSTAL B
B
NOTE
Examine the shaded
area.
INTERCOSTAL A
B CROSSMEMBER 4
D
0.150 in. 6
(3.81 mm)
RADIUS
D
A
0.156 in.
(3.96 mm) 0.250 in.
3 RADIUS (6.35 mm)
RADIUS
rnd5221105_001.dg, lr, 11/02/04
2
1
0.30 in.
(7.62 mm) 0.250 in. 0.250 in.
RADIUS (6.35 mm) (6.35 mm)
RADIUS RADIUS
B C D
Inspection of the Overwing Emergency Exit Door Casting (Post Modsum TC601R25160)
Figure 1
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the crew−escape hatch door and related
structures for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 831 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is from the flight compartment.
NOTE: It is necessary to remove the crew−escape hatch door and its panel to do
the inspection.
A. Procedure
(1) Remove the crew−escape hatch door 831AZ (Refer to the AMM, Chapter 52).
(2) Remove the crew−escape hatch door panel 831BZ (Refer to the AMM, Chapter 25).
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(3) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless it shows
deterioration or local damage.
(4) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, chapter 51).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Crew−Escape−Hatch Door Fittings, and Back−Up Structures
Refer to the area shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the crew−escape−hatch−door lock pins, alignment fittings, the back−up
fittings, their local support structure, frame members and the skin.
(2) Pay particular attention to the support structure at the edge of the fittings and the
fillet radius of the fittings and to the fastener holes.
(3) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
7. Close−Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
52−22−102 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
B. Install the crew−escape−hatch door panel 831BZ (Refer to the AMM, Chapter 52).
C. Install the crew−escape hatch door 831AZ (Refer to the AMM, Chapter 25).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
A B
CREW ESCAPE
HATCH
1
D F
STOP FITTING
2
(4 PLACES)
2
SKIN PANEL B
8 A
1 VIEW LOOKING DOWN
C STOP FITTING
(BACKUP STRUCTURE)
5
B
ALIGNMENT FITTING
4
(2 PLACES) 1
C
SKIN REMOVED FOR CLARITY
1
rnd5222102_001.dg, rt/rm, 04/10/00
NOTE
1 Examine shaded area.
E
2 Examine the inner and outer
skin.
D
NOTE
1 Examine shaded area. 1
1
HINGE ARM FITTING
3
(2 PLACES) ALIGNMENT FITTING
(BACKUP STRUCTURE)
4
E
SKIN REMOVED FOR CLARITY
1
rnd5222102_002.dg, rt/rm, 05/10/00
G
SKIN REMOVED FOR CLARITY
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the crew−escape hatch door and related
structures for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 831 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is from the flight compartment.
NOTE: It is necessary to remove the crew−escape hatch door and its panel to do
the inspection.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft post−Modsum TC601R15019 (introduction of CRJ 700 crew−escape hatch).
A. Procedure
(1) Remove the crew−escape hatch door 831AZ (Refer to the AMM, Chapter 52).
(2) Remove the crew−escape hatch door panel 831BZ (Refer to the AMM, Chapter 25).
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(3) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless it shows
deterioration or local damage.
(4) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, chapter 51).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Crew−Escape−Hatch Door Fittings, and Back−Up Structures
Refer to the area shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the crew−escape−hatch−door lock pins, alignment fittings, the back−up
fittings, their local support structure, frame members and the skin.
(2) Pay particular attention to the support structure at the edge of the fittings and the
fillet radius of the fittings and to the fastener holes.
(3) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
A B
CREW ESCAPE
HATCH
1
D F
STOP FITTING
2
(4 PLACES)
2
SKIN PANEL B
8 A
1 VIEW LOOKING DOWN
C STOP FITTING
(BACKUP STRUCTURE)
5
B
ALIGNMENT FITTING
4
(2 PLACES) 1
C
SKIN REMOVED FOR CLARITY
1
rnd5222102_001.dg, rt/rm, 04/10/00
NOTE
1 Examine shaded area.
E
2 Examine the inner and outer
skin.
D
NOTE
1 Examine shaded area. 1
1
HINGE ARM FITTING
3
(2 PLACES) ALIGNMENT FITTING
(BACKUP STRUCTURE)
4
E
SKIN REMOVED FOR CLARITY
1
rnd5222102_002.dg, rt/rm, 05/10/00
G
SKIN REMOVED FOR CLARITY
7. Close−Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Install the crew−escape−hatch door panel 831BZ (Refer to the AMM, Chapter 52).
C. Install the crew−escape hatch door 831AZ (Refer to the AMM, Chapter 25).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the cargo door ( written as
baggage−compartment door in this task) fittings and their local support structure for
cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 834 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is from the left side of the fuselage.
2. Effectivity
A. All Aircraft.
A. Procedure
B. As necessary, remove the access door that follows:
(1) Remove or lift the insulation as necessary to get to the inspection area (refer to AMM
TASK 25−81−01−000−801 and/or AMM TASK 25−81−02−000−801).
(2) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(3) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, go directly to the inspection.
(4) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Baggage−Compartment Door Fittings and Their Local Support
Structure
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the baggage−compartment door fittings and support structure that follows
for cracks, corrosion, and other damage:
− Door fittings (1 & 2)
− Roller arms (3 thru 6)
− Roller−arm back−up fitting (7)
− Inner and outer skins (8 & 9)
− Door−stop back−up fitting (12 thru 15)
− Plunger sockets (16 & 17)
− Plungers (18)
− Plunger brackets (19)
− Intercostals (20)
− Tee clips (21).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 3
52−31−102 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
(2) Examine the forward and aft frame surrounds (10 & 11). Make sure you carefully
examine the inner bend radii up to 2.0 in (24.5 mm) above and below of all adjacent
tee clips (21) (refer to Sheet 1, Sheet 2, sheet Sheet 3, Sheet 4 and Sheet 5).
(3) Examine the intercostals (20). Make sure you carefully examine the intercostals
outboard radii and outboard flanges at the fastener locations (refer to Sheet 1,
Sheet 2 and Sheet 6).
(4) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801 and/or AMM TASK
25−81−02−400−801).
D. Install the access door that follows:
E. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
11
13
20 8
10
NOTES 3
LEGEND
1. Fitting, Upper Stop 13
8. Skin, Inner
9. Skin, Outer 20
10. Frame, Forward Surround
11. Frame, Aft Surround
13. Fitting, Door Stop Back−up Fitting Aft Upper 3
20. Intercostals (Vertical Members)
1
12
1
12
3
20
20
3
9 3 8
LIGHTENING−HOLES
(REF.)
21 3 10
10 LEGEND
1. Fitting, Upper Stop
rnd5231102_002.dg. mg, Jan. 21, 2011
4
9 8 3 9
11
LIGHTENING−HOLES
11 (REF.)
3 21
18
NOTES 9 16
Examine the shaded area.
3 Make sure you carefully examine
radii at shaded area, through 19
the inner skin lightening−holes.
LEGEND
9
4. Arm, Upper Aft Roller
rnd5231102_003.dg. mg, Jan. 21, 2011
18
19 18
17
9 21 LIGHTENING−HOLES
3
(REF.)
5 5
LEGEND 3 10 8
5. Arm, Lower Forward Roller
rnd5231102_004.dg. mg, Jan. 21, 2011
9 LIGHTENING−HOLES 21 9
3
(REF.)
6
11
2.00 in. (50.8 mm)
8 11 3
rnd5231102_005.dg, mg, Jan. 21, 2011
LEGEND
NOTES 6. Arm, Lower Aft Roller
Examine the shaded area. 7. Fitting, Roller Arm Back−up
8. Skin, Inner
3 Make sure you carefully examine 9. Skin, Outer
radii at shaded area, through 11. Frame, Aft Surround
the inner skin lightening−holes. 21. Tee Clip
Inspection of the Baggage−Compartment Door Fittings and Back−Up Structure
Figure 1 (Sheet 5)
14
20
14
20 3
9
2 2 3
9 20
15
20
15
9
rnd5231102_006.dg, mg, Jan. 21, 2011
3 2
NOTES LEGEND
Examine the shaded area. 2. Fitting, Lower Stop
9. Skin, Outer
3 Make sure you carefully examine 14. Fitting, Door Stop Back−up Fitting Lower Forward
radii at shaded area, through 15. Fitting, Door Stop Back−up Fitting Lowwer Aft
the inner skin lightening−holes. 20. Intercostals (Vertical Members)
Inspection of the Baggage Door−Compartment Fittings and Back−Up Structure
Figure 1 (Sheet 6)
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the service door fittings and their
back−up structure for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 841 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is from the right side of the fuselage.
2. Effectivity
A. All Aircraft.
A. Procedure
(1) Open the service door (Refer to the AMM, Chapter 52).
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(2) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the paint or primer from the parts unless it
shows deterioration or local damage.
(3) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, chapter 51).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Service Door−Stop Fittings, Roller Fittings, Down−Lock Fittings
and Back−Up Structure
Refer to the area shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
NOTE: If the surfaces of any component are painted, look at the paint condition (for
signs of cracks and corrosion) in the component material.
(1) Examine the following items for cracks and corrosion:
− Four door roller fittings
− Ten door− stop fittings and related stop screws
− Two down lock fittings
− Two bottom stop fittings
− Back−up structure of all the fittings.
(2) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
6. Acceptance or Rejection Criteria
A. All signs of corrosion or cracks are cause for rejection.
B. All signs of damaged fasteners are cause for rejection.
C. Record and report results in accordance with company guidelines and policies.
D. For indications that exceed the allowable limits, it is recommended that you contact
MHIRJ Customer Support (refer to SRM 51−13−01).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
52−41−102 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
STR 12
STR13
STR14 STR 10
NOTE
Examine the shaded area. STR 11
STR15
STR 16
1
ROLLER
FITTING STR 17
TYPICAL 4 PLACES
INNER COVER REMOVED
FOR CLARITY
1
ROLLER
FITTING rnd5241102_001.dg, rm, 06/08/02
TYPICAL 4 PLACES
Inspection of the Service Door Fittings and Back−Up Structure
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
2
DOOR
STOP
2
DOOR
STOP
TYPICAL 10 PLACES TYPICAL 10 PLACES
NOTE
Examine the shaded area. 3
DOWN LOCK
FITTING
3
DOWN LOCK
FITTING
4
BOTTOM STOP
FITTING
NOTE
Examine the shaded area.
TYPICAL 2 PLACES
4
BOTTOM STOP
FITTING
TYPICAL 2 PLACES
7. Close−Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
C. Close the service door (Refer to the AMM Chapter 52).
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the main avionics−compartment door
fittings and backup structure for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The main avionics−compartment door is in Zone 810 (Refer to NDTM Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is from the bottom of the forward fuselage between FS364.00 and FS394.00.
NOTE: It is necessary to remove the insulation and the cover plate from the main
avionics−compartment door to do the inspection.
2. Effectivity
A. All Aircraft.
5. Inspection for Damage to the Main Avionics−Compartment Door Fittings and Backup
Structure
Refer to the areas shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the areas that follow for cracks, corrosion, and other damage:
− Inner and outer skins
− Latch pin assembly
− Fitting assembly
− Five doublers
− Four angles
− Eight intercostals
− Seven brackets
− Two latch pin fittings
− Two stop fittings
− Two guide fittings
− Three backup fittings.
NOTE: Pay particular attention to the fastener holes of the backup fittings for
cracks.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close−Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801 and/or AMM TASK
25−81−02−400−801).
D. Install the lining on the main avionic−compartment door (811).
E. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
F. Close the main avionic−compartment door (811).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 5
52−42−103 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
2
3
1
4
6
3
3
12 6
11
10
9
7
8
rnd5242103_002.dg, ds, 15/04/04
NOTE A
Shaded area is to
be inspected.
17
C 16
15
18
14
13 19
22
11
4
9
8
21
B 20
24 25
26 B
23
39 40 27
16
28
26
15 38
37
29
rnd5242103_003.dg, ds, 10/05/04
36
30
35
28 31
NOTE
32
Shaded area is to
34 33 C be inspected.
INSPECTION OF THE NOSE LANDING GEAR TRUNNION FITTINGS, DIAGONAL MEMBERS AND
THE LOCAL STRUCTURE
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the nose landing−gear (NLG)
trunnion−fittings, the diagonal members and the local structure between FS 202.75
and FS 235.00, for cracks, corrosion and other damage.
NOTE: This data applies to both sides of the aircraft. This inspection procedure
for the components on the left side is given. The procedure for the
components on the right side is similar.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 131/132 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the outboard side (inside) of the NLG structure is by the fuselage access
panel 131AL/132AL. Access to the inboard side (external web) of the structure is
through the NLG wheel well.
NOTE: It is necessary to remove the insulation blankets to get access to the
inspection area.
E. Parts Examined in This Procedure
Refer to Table 1.
Table 1 − Part Identification Data
ITEM NO. DRAWING OR PART
DESCRIPTION MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
[1] NUMBER [2]
2024−T81 Al alloy
1 Web 601R33041 QQ−A−250/5
alcd sheet
7075−T62 Al alloy
2 Angle 601R33041−45/−46
alcd sheet
QQ−A−250/13
7075−T6 Al alloy alcd
3 Vertical stiffener 600−33041
sheet
Note [1]: Item numbers correspond to item numbers in Figure 1.
Note [2]: Numbers that do not include a dashed suffix are drawing numbers.
Note: * Indicates pre modsum TC601R15119.
Note: ** Indicates post modsum TC601R15119.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 1
53−11−101 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
2. Effectivity
A. All Aircraft.
A. Procedure
(1) Make sure the NLG lockpin is installed (refer to AMM TASK 10−11−00−400−801).
(2) Open and isolate the NLG forward doors (refer to AMM TASK
32−22−01−980−801).
(3) Make sure that the external AC power is disconnected (refer to AMM TASK
12−00−07−861−802).
(4) Remove the forward−fuselage access panels 131AL/132AL (refer to AMM TASK
53−10−34−000−801).
(5) On the left side of the aircraft remove the components that follow:
(a) Remove the bolts and the washers that attach each windshield−temperature
controller−box to the mounting plate.
NOTE: The left side of the aircraft has two windshield−temperature
controller−boxes installed on the outboard side of the nose
wheel−well structure.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−11−101 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
(b) Lay the control boxes face−down while you do the inspection.
(c) Remove the bolts and washers that attach the mounting plate to the aircraft
structure and remove the mounting plate.
(6) On the right side of the aircraft, remove the components that follow:
(a) Remove the windshield−temperature controller−boxes as given above.
NOTE: The right side of the aircraft has two windshield−temperature
controller−boxes and junction boxJB14 installed on the outboard
side of the nose wheel−well structure.
Loosen the captive screws and remove the cover of JB14.
(b) Hold the cover up and tie it out of the way while you do the inspection.
(c) Remove the bolts and washers that attach the housing of JB14 to the aircraft
structure and remove the housing.
(7) Remove or lift the insulation as necessary to get to the inspection area (refer to AMM
TASK 25−81−01−000−801 and/or AMM TASK 25−81−02−000−801).
(8) Identify the locations to be examined (refer to Figure 1).
(9) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
(10) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(11) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection for Damage to the NLG Trunnion Fittings, the Diagonal Member and the Local
Structure
Refer to the area shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
NOTE: If the surfaces of any component are painted, look at the paint condition (for
signs of cracks and corrosion) in the component material.
(1) Examine the trunnion fittings, the diagonal member, the angles, vertical stiffeners and
web structure over an area up to 2.00 inches (50.80 mm) all around.
(2) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
FS 202.75
ANGLE
2
ANGLE WEB
6 1 VERTICAL
VERTICAL STIFFENER
STIFFENER 7
3
DIAGONAL
MEMBER
5
ANGLE
6
TRUNNION
FITTING FS 235.00
4
TRUNNION
FITTING
4
2.00 in.
(50.80 mm)
ALL AROUND
NOTES
Insulation and controller boxes
rnd5311101_001.dg, rm/ik, 05/06/01
NOTES
Examine the shaded area.
NLG removed for clarity.
TRUNNION
FITTING
4
2.00 in.
(50.80 mm)
ALL AROUND
rnd5311101_002.dg, jc/rm, 11/06/01
TRUNNION
FITTING WEB
4 1
Inspection of the NLG Trunnion Fittings, the Diagonal Member and the Local Structure
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801 and/or AMM TASK
25−81−02−400−801).
D. Put the electronic boxes into position on the left side of the aircraft as follows:
(1) Install the mounting plate with the bolts and washers.
(2) Install each windshield−temperature controller box to the mounting plate with the
bolts and the washers.
E. Put the electronic boxes into position on the right side of the aircraft as follows:
(1) Install the windshield−temperature controller boxes as given above.
(2) Install the housing of JB14 with the bolts and washers.
(3) Lower the cover of JB14 into position and install it onto the housing.
(4) Tighten the captive screws.
F. Remove all tools, equipment and unwanted materials from the close out area.
G. Install the forward−fuselage access panels 131AL/132AL (refer to AMM TASK
53−10−34−400−801).
H. If required, close the NLG forward doors (refer to AMM TASK 32−22−01−980−802).
I. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the lower attachments of the nose
landing gear (NLG) wheel well vertical stiffeners at FS206.7, FS210.0, FS215.25,
FS224.25, and FS227.75 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: This data applies to both sides of the NLG wheel well. This inspection
procedure for the components on the left side is given. The procedure for
the components on the right side is similar.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 131/132 (Refer to the NDTM, Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the outboard side of the NLG structure is by the fuselage access panel
131AL/132AL.
NOTE: It is necessary to remove the insulation blankets to get access to the
inspection area.
2. Effectivity
A. All Aircraft.
A. Procedure
(1) Make sure the NLG lockpin is installed (refer to AMM TASK 10−11−00−400−801).
(2) Make sure that the external AC power is disconnected (Refer to AMM Task
12−00−07−861−801).
(3) Remove the forward−fuselage access panels 131AL/132AL (Refer to TASK
53−10−34−000−801).
(4) Remove or lift the insulation as necessary to get to the inspection area (refer to AMM
TASK 25−81−01−000−801 and/or AMM TASK 25−81−02−000−801).
(5) Identify the locations to be examined (refer to Figure 1).
(6) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(7) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
5. Inspection for Damage to the NLG Lower Attachments of the Vertical Stiffeners
Refer to the areas shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801 and/or AMM TASK
25−81−02−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
E. Install the forward−fuselage access panels 131AL/132AL (Refer to AMM TASK
53−10−34−400−801).
FS 202.75
WEB
(REF)
FS 235.00
NOTES
Insulation and controller boxes
rnd5311102_001.dg, rm/yf, 13/05/04
1
1
C
1
1
2 4
3
3 5
B C
D E
2
rnd5311102_002.dg, rm/yf, 13/05/04
F G
Inspection of the Lower Attachments of the Vertical Stiffeners of the Nose Landing Gear (NLG)
Wheel Well
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 5
53−11−102 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
1
1
3 2
6 6
H J
1
1
2
3
6
6 K L
rnd5311101_003.dg, rm/yf, 13/05/04
Inspection of the Lower Attachments of the Vertical Stiffeners of the Nose Landing Gear (NLG)
Wheel Well
Figure 1 (Sheet 3)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 6
53−11−102 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
INSPECTION OF THE UPPER CAP ANGLES OF THE NOSE LANDING GEAR (NLG) WHEEL WELL
BETWEEN FS202.75 AND FS235.0
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the upper cap angles of the nose landing
gear (NLG) wheel well between FS202.75 and FS235.0 for cracks, corrosion, and
other damage.
NOTE: This data applies to both sides of the NLG wheel well. This inspection
procedure for the components on the left side is given. The procedure for
the components on the right side is similar.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 131/132 (Refer to the NDTM, Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the outboard side of the NLG structure is by the fuselage access panel
131AL/132AL.
NOTE: It is necessary to remove the insulation blankets to get access to the
inspection area.
2. Effectivity
A. All Aircraft.
A. Procedure
(1) Make sure the NLG lockpin is installed (Refer to AMM task 10−11−00−400−801).
(2) Open and isolate the NLG forward doors (refer to AMM TASK
32−22−01−980−801).
(3) Remove the forward−fuselage access panels 131AL/132AL (Refer to AMM TASK
53−10−34−000−801).
(4) Remove or lift the insulation as necessary to get to the inspection area (refer to AMM
TASK 25−81−01−000−801 and/or AMM TASK 25−81−02−000−801).
(5) Identify the locations to be examined (refer to Figure 1).
(6) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
(7) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(8) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection for Damage to the NLG Lower Attachments of the Vertical Stiffeners
Refer to the areas shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801 and/or AMM TASK
25−81−02−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the close out area.
E. Install the access panel 131AL/132AL (Refer to AMM TASK 53−10−34−400−801).
F. If required,close the NLG forward doors (refer to AMM TASK 32−22−01−980−802).
G. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
2
1
PLATE
(REF)
FS202.75
LEGEND
A 1. Web.
2. Web.
3. Cap angle. B
CHANNEL 1
(REF)
1
A
NOTES
rnd5311103_001.dg, lr, 16/05/04
Inspection of the Upper Cap Angles of the NLG Wheel Well Between FS202.75 and FS235.0
Figure 1
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the flight compartment floor connection
to the forward pressure bulkhead at FS202.75 for cracks, corrosion, and other
damage.
NOTE: This data applies to both sides of the NLG wheel well. This inspection
procedure for the components on the left side is given. The procedure for
the components on the right side is similar.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 131/132 (Refer to the NDTM, Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the outboard part of the forward edge of the flight compartment floor is by
the fuselage access panel 131AL/132AL. Access to the center part of the forward
edge of the flight compartment floor is through the rudder pedal cover
221GZ/222GZ.
NOTE: It is necessary to remove the insulation blankets to get access to the
inspection area.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
A. Procedure
(1) Remove the forward−fuselage access panels 131AL/132AL (Refer to AMM TASK
53−10−34−000−801).
(2) Remove the rudder pedal covers 221GZ/222GZ (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−04).
(3) Remove or lift the insulation as necessary to get to the inspection area (refer to AMM
TASK 25−81−01−000−801 and/or AMM TASK 25−81−02−000−801).
(4) Identify the locations to be examined (refer to Figure 1).
(5) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
(6) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(7) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−11−104 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Flight Compartment Floor Connection to the Forward Pressure
Bulkhead at FS202.75
Refer to the areas shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the tension clips at LBL6.0, LBL13.7, LBL22.0, LBL30.0, RBL6.0, RBL13.7,
RBL22.0, and RBL30.0.
NOTE: Pay particular attention to the fillet radius at the foot of each tension clip.
Also inspect the attachment points to the underfloor backing angles.
(2) Be sure to also examine the areas that follow:
− The surrounding forward pressure bulkhead
− The adjoining area of the floor panels
− The floor beam structure.
(3) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801 and/or AMM TASK
25−81−02−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the close out area.
E. Install the rudder pedal cover 221GZ/222GZ (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−04).
F. Install the forward−fuselage access panels 131AL/132AL (Refer to AMM TASK
32−22−01−980−802).
G. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
BL30.0
FS202.75 BL22.0
BL13.7
LEGEND BL6.0
1. Pilots floor.
2. Angle.
3. Tension clip.
4. Forward pressure bulkhead.
5. Angle.
6. Angle or Cleat.
NOTES
1 Examine shaded area.
2. Left side is shown,
right side is opposite.
1
4
Inspection of the Lower Attachments of the Vertical Stiffeners of the Nose Landing Gear (NLG)
Wheel Well
Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 4
53−11−104 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the web built−up structure of the forward
pressure bulkhead at FS202.75.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM), Part 1, General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection areas are in Zones 120, 130, 210, and 220 (Refer to NDTM, Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the lower part of the forward pressure bulkhead is gained through access
panels 121AL and 122AR. Access to the upper part of the forward pressure
bulkhead is gained through access panels 211AL and 212AL and from the flight
compartment.
(2) The following items must be removed to gain access to the upper part of the forward
pressure bulkhead:
− Bird strike shield
− Electronic flight displays (EFD)
− Cockpit voice recorder (CVR) control unit
− Insulation.
NOTE: In order to remove the bird strike shields, it may be necessary to release
the electrical harnesses from the clamps that are located on the bird strike
shields.
It may also be necessary to release the electrical harnesses from their
respective clamps behind the instrument panels to access the forward
pressure bulkhead.
E. Parts Examined in This Procedure
Refer to Table 1.
Table 1 − Part Identification Data
DRAWING OR PART
DESCRIPTION MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
NUMBER [1]
2024−T3 AL ALY
Bulkhead Web QQ−A−250/5
ALCD SH
601R34012
Stiffener Channel 7075−T62 AL ALY
QQ−A−250/13
Strip Doubler ALCD SH
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft pre MODSUM TC601R18027 (pressure bulkhead FS202.75 reinforcement) or
pre SB 601R−53−073.
A. Procedure
(1) Remove access panel 121AL (refer to NDTM Part 1 section 51−01−04).
(2) Open the forward equipment−compartment doors 211AL, and 212AL (refer to NDTM
Part 1 section 51−01−04).
(3) Deploy the ADG (refer to AMM TASK 24−23−01−840−801 or TASK
24−23−01−840−804).
(4) Remove the screws from their respective clamps as necessary to release the
electrical harnesses from the bird strike shields.
(5) Remove the left and the right bird strike shields (Refer to AMM TASK
53−10−36−000−801).
(6) Remove EFD No. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 (Refer to AMM TASK 31−61−01−000−801).
(7) Remove the CVR control unit (Refer to AMM TASK 23−71−04−000−801).
(8) Remove or lift the insulation as necessary to get to the inspection area (refer to AMM
TASK 25−81−01−000−801 and/or AMM TASK 25−81−02−000−801).
(9) Identify the locations to be examined (refer to Figure 1).
(10) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to SRM, 51−26−00).
(11) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(12) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−11−106 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the items that follow for cracks, corrosion,and other damage from WL79.50
up to the fuselage skin (above the floor), and from WL79.50 down to the fuselage
skin (below the floor):
− Stiffeners
− Web
− Strip doublers
− Capping angles
− Splice fittings
− Splice angles.
(2) Make sure to examine the pilot’s floor attachments along WL76.50 and WL79.50,
and from the bulkhead to the fuselage attachments, and the capping angles.
(3) Examine all of the fasteners of the stiffeners, the web, and the capping angles for
signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other unserviceable conditions.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801 and/or AMM TASK
25−81−02−400−801).
F. Install the left and the right birdstrike shields (refer to AMM TASK 53−10−36−400−801).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 3
53−11−106 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
G. Attach the electrical harnesses to the bird strike shields with the clamps and screws.
STIFFENER
STIFFENER
CAPPING
ANGLE
PILOTS
FLOORLINE
WL 79.50
WL 76.50
BL 0.00
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
NOTE
Left hand side shown
rnd5311106_001.dg, ik/jp, 25/01/00
A
FWD PRESSURE VIEW LOOKING FORWARD
BULKHEAD WEB AT FS202.75
Inspection of the Forward Pressure Bulkhead at FS202.75
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
PILOTS
FLOORLINE
WL 79.50
WL 76.50
BL 0.00
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
STRIP
DOUBLER
INSPECTION OF THE LOWER SECTOR OF THE WEB AND THE CAPS OF THE FRAME AT
FS235.0
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the forward and aft faces of the frame at
FS235.0 from the top cap to the lower cap between LBL12.0 and RBL12.0. The
inspection is to examine the area for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is in Zone 131/132 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the frame at FS235.0 is through the nose landing gear (NLG) wheel well
and from the flight compartment crawlway.
NOTE: It is necessary to remove the insulation blankets to get access to the inspection
area.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
A. Procedure
(1) Make sure the NLG lockpin is installed (Refer to AMM task 10−11−00−400−801).
(2) Open and isolate the NLG forward doors (refer to AMM TASK
32−22−01−980−801).
(3) Open the main avionics compartment door 811 (refer to NDTM Part 1 Chapter
51−01−03).
(4) Remove the following access components:
(5) Remove or lift the insulation as necessary to get to the inspection area (refer to AMM
TASK 25−81−01−000−801 and/or AMM TASK 25−81−02−000−801).
(6) Identify the locations to be examined (refer to Figure 1).
(7) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(8) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(9) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection of the Lower Sector of the Web and the Caps of the Frame at FS235.0
Refer to the areas shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
− Forward and aft faces of the center frame sector from the top angle to the bottom
angle between LBL12.00 and RBL12.00
− Top angle of the center frame sector
− Joints between the angles of the NLG beam installation and the splice strap of the
center frame sector at LBL6.00 and RBL6.00.
(2) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801 and/or AMM TASK
25−81−02−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the close out area.
E. Install the following access components:
F. Close the main avionics compartment door 811 (refer to NDTM Part 1 Chapter
51−01−03).
G. If required, close the NLG forward doors (refer to AMM TASK 32−22−01−980−802).
H. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
1
C
3
1 3
4
5 A
2 FRAME
CL
FS235.00
BL12.00
rnd5311108_001.dg, yf, 17/05/04
Inspection of the Lower Sector of the Web and the Caps of the Frame at FS235.0
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
CL
C
rnd5311108_002.dg, yf, 17/05/04
Inspection of the Lower Sector of the Web and the Caps of the Frame at FS235.0
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
DETAILED INSPECTION OF THE FLIGHT CREW ESCAPE HATCH SURROUND STRUCTURE AND
STOP FITTINGS
AWL 53−11−110
1. General
A. This inspection is used to visually examine the crew escape−hatch surround−structure,
fittings and back−up fittings for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
REFERENCE DESIGNATION
Commercially Available Mirror−Telescopic
Commercially Available Explosion Proof−Flashlight
B. Parts
C. Reference Information
4. Job Set−Up
A. Obey all the visual inspection procedures (NDT 51−20−09 (Part 1)).
B. Obey all the electrical/electronic safety precautions (AMM 24−00−00−910−801).
C. Remove the crew escape hatch (AMM 52−22−00−000−801).
D. Remove the headliner panels (AMM 25−15−02−000−801).
E. Remove the upper panel assembly (AMM 25−15−03−000−801).
F. Remove the electrical power services panel (AMM 24−13−01−000−801).
G. Remove the fuel control panel (AMM 28−31−01−000−801).
H. Remove the cabin pressure selector panel (AMM 21−31−10−000−801).
I. Remove or lift the insulation as necessary to get to the inspection area (AMM
25−81−02−000−801).
J. Make sure the inspection area is clean.
K. If necessary, remove the water−displacing corrosion−inhibiting compound (CIC) with a
lint−free cloth and solvent (SRM 51−26−00).
L. If the finish in the inspection area is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish.
5. Procedure
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Do the steps that follow for the detailed inspection:
(1) Examine the fuselage stop fittings, diaphragms, alignment fittings, all back−up
fittings, intercostals, gussets, the crew escape−hatch surround−structure, framing
members,cutout, and segment of frames FS254.68 and FS276.00 for cracks and
corrosion.
(2) Examine the fuselage outer skin over a width of 6.00 inches (152.40 mm) around the
perimeter of the crew escape−hatch cutout.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 3
53−11−110 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
(3) Use the inspection mirror and a light source to examine all of the fasteners for signs
of a loose, bent or corroded fastener, or other unserviceable condition.
B. Do the acceptance and rejection criteria as follows:
(1) All signs of corrosion or cracks are cause for rejection.
(2) All signs of damaged fasteners are cause for rejection.
C. If necessary, send a defect and damage report to MHI RJ Group (SRM 51−13−01).
6. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (SRM 51−21−16).
B. If necessary, apply water−displacing corrosion−inhibiting compound (CIC) to the
applicable surfaces (AMM 51−25−56−390−802).
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
D. Install the insulation (AMM 25−81−02−400−801).
E. Install the cabin pressure selector panel (AMM 21−31−10−400−801).
F. Install the fuel control panel (AMM 28−31−01−400−801).
G. Install the electrical power services panel (AMM 24−13−01−400−801).
H. Install the upper panel assembly (AMM 25−15−03−400−801).
I. Install the headliner panels (AMM 25−15−02−400−801).
J. Install the crew escape hatch (AMM 52−22−00−400−801).
FS 254.68
FS 255.84
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
FWD
B
FS 274.84
FS 276.00
FS 280.00
6.00 in.
LBL 11.160 RBL 11.160
A (152.40 mm)
(TYPICAL
VIEW LOOKING DOWN
(CREW ESCAPE HATCH REMOVED) AROUND
CUTOUT)
EXAMINE THE LBL 11.160
SHADED AREA
D RBL 11.160
2.00 in.
C (50.8 mm)
E
FS 280.00
F FS 276.00
rnd5311110_001.dg, jp/rm, 21/09/99
B
FS 255.84
VIEW LOOKING UP
(CREW ESCAPE HATCH REMOVED) FS 254.68
Crew Escape−Hatch Surround−Structure, Fittings and Back−Up Fittings
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
2.00 in.
(50.80 mm)
INTERCOSTAL
600−33051
FS 280.00
RBL 11.160
FS 276.00
PLATE
SKIN PANEL ANGLE 600−34017
601R33010 600−34017
STR 3
GUSSET (REF)
600−34022
ANGLE
601R33051
ANGLE GUSSET
600−34019 601R33048
FS 254.68
FRAME SECTOR
600−34020
DIAPHRAGM
601R33048
FRAME
600−34022
FS 270.10
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
FS 267.00
FS 259.92
GUSSET GUSSET
601R34019 601R33048
rnd5311110_002.dg, gb, 19/01/10
ANGLE
600−33051
INTERCOSTAL
LBL 11.160
STR 3 601R33051
(REF)
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
DIAPHRAGM
601R33048
CLEAT
600−34022
FS270.10
FRAME
600−34022 FS 276.00
FS 267.00
BACK−UP BRACKET
CANTED FRAME 600−33232
601R33302 GUSSET
601R33048
GUSSET
FS 259.92 600−34022
BACK−UP BRACKET
600−33232
SKIN PANEL
601R33010
FRAME SECTOR
601R34019
FS 254.68
GUSSET D
601R34019
BACK−UP STRUCTURE
(VIEW LOOKING INBOARD)
(TYPICAL BOTH SIDES)
Crew Escape−Hatch Surround−Structure, Fittings and Back−Up Fittings
Figure 1 (Sheet 3)
STIFFENER
GUSSET EXAMINE THE
601R51136
601R34019 SHADED AREA
FRAME SECTOR
CLEAT
601R34019 RBL 11.160
601R34019
CHANNEL
JOINT PLATE
601R33049
601R33049
BL 0.00
CHANNEL
601R33049 GUSSET
601R34019 INTERCOSTAL
E 600−33051
VIEW LOOKING FORWARD
STRINGER
601R33048 LBL 11.160 INTERCOSTAL
600−33051
CHANNEL SKIN PANEL
601R33049 601R33010
LBL 5.50
GUSSET
601R34019
BL 0.00
STRINGER FS 254.68
601R33048 RBL 5.50
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
RBL 11.160
FRAME SECTOR
601R34019
CLEAT
600−34019
JOINT PLATE STIFFENER
rnd5311110_005.dg, jp/rm, 22/09/99
601R33049 601R51136
CHANNEL
601R33049
CLEAT
600−34019
F
GUSSET INTERCOSTAL BACK−UP STRUCTURE
601R34019 600−33051 (VIEW LOOKING AFT)
Crew Escape−Hatch Surround−Structure, Fittings and Back−Up Fittings
Figure 1 (Sheet 4)
FRAME ANGLE
600−34020−27
SKIN PANEL
601R33010
FRAME ANGLE
ANGLE 600−34020−25
600−34017
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
RBL
5.590
PLATE
600−34017 BL 0.00
G LBL
5.590
VIEW LOOKING AFT FRAME SECTOR
FS 276.00
600−34020
PLATE FS 280.00
600−34017
ANGLE ANGLE
600−34017 PLATE 600−34017
600−34017
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
SKIN PANEL
601R33010
ANGLE
600−34017
LBL 11.160
LBL
5.590
PLATE
DIAPHRAGMS 600−34017
600−33048
rnd5311110_004.dg, jp/rm, 22/09/99
DIAPHRAGMS RBL
600−33048 5.590
FRAME SECTOR
H 600−34020 FS 280.00
VIEW LOOKING FORWARD
AT BACKUP STRUCTURE RBL 11.160 FS276.00
Crew Escape−Hatch Surround−Structure, Fittings and Back−Up Fittings
Figure 1 (Sheet 5)
AWL 53−11−112
1. General
A. The maintenance procedure that follows is for the detailed visual inspection of the
fuselage skin. The inspection is used to examine the external surface of the nose fuselage
skin below the lower windshield / side window sill between FS202.75 to FS280.0. This
procedure is applicable to the left side and the right side. The procedure for the left side is
given.
2. Effectivity
A. All Aircraft.
REFERENCE DESIGNATION
COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE Explosion Proof−Flashlight
NOT SPECIFIED Platform−General Maintenance
4. Job Set−Up
A. Make sure the inspection area is clean.
5. Procedure
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Do the detailed inspection of the nose fuselage skin from FS202.75 to FS280.0 at cockpit
floor level as follows:
(1) Carefully examine the skin panels below the lower windshield / side window sill
between FS202.75 and FS280.0.
(2) Make sure that you take a close look at the cutout edges and fastener holes.
(3) Make sure that there are no cracks, scratches, dents, gouges, corrosion or
damaged, loose or missing fasteners.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 1
53−11−112 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
B. If necessary, send a defect and damage report to MHI RJ Group (SRM 51−13−01).
6. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish.
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
LOWER WINDSHIELD/
SIDE WINDOW SILL
WL79.50
FS280.00
SKIN PANEL
FS202.75
A
rnd5311112_004.cgm, sl, may02/2019
NOTE
Shaded area to be examined.
Detail Visual Inspection of the Fuselage Skin FS202.75 to FS280.0 at Cockpit Floor Level
Figure 1
DETAILED INSPECTION OF THE WINDSHIELD CENTER POST AND BULKHEAD AFT POST AT
FS202.75
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine for surface cracks at the locations that
follow:
− Aft flange outer edge and web of the channel−aft center post frame at FS202.75,
BL0.00 below the windshield lower sill
− Bend radius of the lower strap − windshield lower sill−to−center post at
FS202.75, BL0.00
− Lower and upper center post fittings at FS202.75, WL110.00 and WL128.85.
NOTE: The inspection applies to both sides of the aircraft.
B. Reference Information
For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1−General Information, and Part 1,
51−20−09
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
The center post frame at FS202.75 is found in Zones 221/222 (Refer to NDTM Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the inspection area is by the flight compartment.
E. Parts Examined in This Procedure
Refer to Table 1.
Table 1 − Part Identification Data
ITEM DRAWING OR PART
DESCRIPTION MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
NO. NUMBER
1 Windshield Center 7050−T7451
601R33237 BAMS 516−003
2 Post, Lower Fitting AL ALY PL
3 Aft Center Post, 7075−T62
QQ−A−250/13
4 Channel AL ALY ALCD SH
601R34012
Aft Center Post,
5 2024−T3
Lower Strap QQ−A−250/5
QQ A 250/5
AL ALY ALCD SH
6 Windshield Center
P t U
Post, Upper S
Splice
li 601R33236 2024−T4 AL ALY
7 Fitting QQ−A−200/3
EXTN
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft (pre MODSUM TC601R15021 (Bulkhead 202.75 redesign)) and (pre MODSUM
TC601R18027 (FS202.75 pressure bulkhead reinforcement) or Pre SB 601R−53−073)).
5. Inspection for Surface Cracks on the Lower Strap, Channel−Aft Center Post, and Upper and
Lower Center Post Fittings
A. Inspection Procedure
Refer to Figure 1.
NOTE: The item numbers in parentheses that follow the name of the components
correspond to the item numbers in Figure 1 and Table 1.
(1) Put the borescope in the region of the aft center post lower strap (5) at FS202.75,
BL0.00 immediately below the windshield center post lower fittings (1, 2) near
WL110.00.
(2) Articulate the viewing head and examine the full length of the bend radius on the aft
center post lower strap (5).
NOTE: Look carefully at the outer edges of the lower strap.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−11−122 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
(3) Put the borescope in the region of the forward surface of the aft center post channel
(4).
(4) Articulate the viewing head and examine the forward surfaces on both aft flanges of
the aft center post channel (4) below the windshield lower sill.
NOTE: Look carefully at the outer edges between the three fasteners below the
lower sill.
(5) Examine the web surfaces up to the upper lightening hole at FS202.75, BL0.00
below WL110.00 (Refer to Figure 1, Views A and B).
(6) Examine around each fastener attachment and edges of each flange on the
windshield center post upper splice fittings (6, 7) at FS202.75, BL0.00 and
WL128.85.
(7) Examine around each fastener attachment and edges of each flange on the
windshield center post lower fittings (1, 2) at FS202.75, BL0.00 and WL110.00.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801 and/or AMM TASK
25−81−02−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the close out area.
E. Install the glareshield (Refer to AMM TASK 25−16−02−400−801).
F. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
LEGEND
1. Windshield center post
lower fitting.
2. Windshield center post
lower fitting.
3. Aft center post channel.
4. Aft center post channel.
5. Aft center post lower strap.
NOTES
A
1 All shaded areas to
be inspected.
2 Examine the forward
surfaces and outer edges
of the channel aft
flanges on item 4.
BL0.00
1
1 2
1
FS202.75
WL
110.00
(REF)
1
BEND RADIUS
(REF)
5
1 (BEND RADIUS
UPPERMOST ON STRAP−
2 CRITICAL
LIGHTENING
HOLE LOCATION)
3
4
B
rnd5311122_001.dg, rm/rm, 21/02/06
A B
Inspection Locations for the Windshield Center Post, Lower Strap, Upper and Lower Sill Fittings
at FS202.75, BL0.00
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 4
53−11−122 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
LEGEND
6. Windshield center
post upper splice fitting.
7. Windshield center
post upper splice fitting.
NOTE
1 All shaded areas to
C be inspected.
WL
128.85
(REF)
D 6
WINDSHIELD 7
CENTER POST
C
(REF)
WINDSHIELD 7
UPPER SILL
(REF)
D
VIEW LOOKING UP
Inspection Locations for the Windshield Center Post, Lower Strap, Upper and Lower Sill Fittings
at FS202.75, BL0.00
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 5
53−11−122 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
DETAILED INSPECTION OF THE WINDSHIELD SIDE POST UPPER AND LOWER JOINTS TO
SILLS AND FUSELAGE FITTINGS
AWL 53−11−123
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the upper and lower
attachtment fittings of the windshield side post and the sills area for cracks,
corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 221 and 222 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the interior of the flight deck.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft pre MODSUM TC601R18049.
5. Inspection for Damage to the Upper and Lower Attachtment Fittings of the Windshield Side
Post and the Sills Area
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the forward fittings (1 & 3), aft fittings (2 & 4), and both side of accessible
area of the sills (5 & 6) around the fasteners, including 2.0 in. (50.8 mm) each side of
the fittings for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801).
D. If required, install the pilot side panel (refer to AMM TASK 25−16−01−400−805).
E. If required, install the copilot side panel (refer to AMM TASK 25−16−01−400−806).
F. Install the side post covers (refer to AMM TASK 25−15−01−400−801).
G. Install the headlining panels (refer to AMM TASK 25−15−02−400−801).
H. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
A NOTES LEGEND
Left side shown, right side 1. Forward fitting, side post upper.
almost the same. 2. Aft fitting, side post upper.
3. Forward fitting, side post lower.
Examine the shaded area.
4. Aft fitting, side post lower.
5. Lower sill, forward.
6. Upper sill, forward.
6 2 1
SIDE POST
(REF)
UP
OUTBD
C
rnd5311123_020.dc, gv, dec18/2009
5 4 3
A
Inspection of the Upper and Lower Attachtment Fittings of the Windshield Side Post and the Sills
Area
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 4
53−11−123 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
NOTES LEGEND
Left side shown, right side 1. Forward fitting, side post upper.
almost the same. 2. Aft fitting, side post upper.
6. Upper sill, forward.
2 Area to be examined.
2 6
SIDE POST
2.0 in. (REF)
(50.8 mm)
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm)
2 2 1
rnd5311123_021.dc, gv, dec18/2009
Inspection of the Upper and Lower Attachtment Fittings of the Windshield Side Post and the Sills
Area
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 5
53−11−123 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
NOTES LEGEND
Left side shown, right side 3. Forward fitting, side post lower.
almost the same. 4. Aft fitting, side post lower.
5. Lower sill, forward.
2 Area to be examined.
SIDE POST
(REF) 3 5 2
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm)
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm) rnd5311123_022.dc, gv, dec18/2009
2 4
Inspection of the Upper and Lower Attachtment Fittings of the Windshield Side Post and the Sills
Area
Figure 1 (Sheet 3)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 6
53−11−123 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the nose−landing−gear (NLG)
wheel−well skin−cut−out, and the visible portions of the skin doubler and lateral
walls for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 130 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the area to be inspected is from the NLG wheel well.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
3. Tools and Equipment
A. Use the equipment that follows:
− Light source
− Inspection mirror.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 1
53−11−124 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
A. Procedure
(1) Open the NLG wheel−well doors (Refer to the AMM, Chapter 32).
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(2) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless it shows
deterioration or local damage.
(3) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, chapter 51).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Skin Cut−Out and Skin Doubler and Lateral Walls at the NLG
Wheel Well
Refer to the area shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Inspect the skin, and visible portions of the skin doubler, along the aft and side
edges of the NLG wheel−well cut−out, up to a distance of 4.00 in. (10.16 cm.) from
the edge of the cut−out at FS235.00 and between RBL6.00 − LBL6.00. Also inspect
the lateral walls of the NLG wheel−well cut−out up to a distance of 4.00 in. (10.16
cm.) from the lower edges for cracks and corrosion..
NOTE: Pay particular attention to the corners of the cut−out.
(2) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
6. Acceptance or Rejection Criteria
A. All signs of corrosion or cracks are cause for rejection.
B. All signs of damaged fasteners are cause for rejection.
C. Record and report results in accordance with company guidelines and policies.
D. For indications that exceed the allowable limits, it is recommended that you contact
MHIRJ Customer Support (refer to SRM 51−13−01).
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Close the NLG wheel−well doors (Refer to the AMM, Chapter 32).
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
LATERAL WALL
3
4.0 in.
(10.16 mm)
ANGLE
4
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREAS
A
4.0 in.
SKIN (10.16 mm)
2 EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREAS
4.0 in.
(10.16 mm)
LBL 6.0
BL 0.0
RBL 6.0
rnd5311124_001.dg, jp, 27/04/00
DOUBLERS
FWD 1
A FS 235.00
VIEW LOOKING UP
Inspection of the Nose−Landing−Gear Wheel−Well Skin−Cutout
Figure 1
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the fuselage skin between FS235.00 and
FS250.00 and STGR26L and STGR27L around the Flightfone VI cut−out for cracks,
corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 130 (refer to NDTM Part 1 General, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the inspection area is by the external fuselage.
2. Effectivity
A. Aircraft with Modsum TC601R60256 incorporated.
A. Procedure
(1) Remove the Flitefone antenna.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 1
53−11−126 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(2) Clean the inspection area (Refer to the SRM, Chapter 51).
(3) If the surfaces of the skin are painted, look at the paint condition (for signs of cracks
and corrosion).
(4) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, Chapter 51).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Fuselage Skin at the Flitefone Antenna Cut−Out between
FS235.00 and FS250.00, STGR26L and STGR27L
Refer to the area shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the fuselage skin over an area of 4.00 in. (102.00 mm) around the cut−out
for the Flitefone antenna for cracks, corrosion or other damage.
(2) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, corroded, or other unserviceable
condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Install the Flitefone antenna.
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
NOTES
1. Examine the shaded area.
A
FLITE FONE
FS250.00
ANTENNA
LOCATION (REF)
STGR27
STGR26
CUT−OUT 4 in.
(REF) (102 mm)
DOUBLER
rnd5311126_001.cgm
(REF)
A
VIEW LOOKING INBOARD
Flitefone VI antenna Cut−Out between FS235.00 and FS250.00 between STGR26L and
STGR27L
Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 3
53−11−126 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
DETAILED INSPECTION OF THE WINDSHIELD CENTER POST AND BULKHEAD AFT POST AT
FS202.75
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the splice fittings from the windshield
center post to the lower and upper sill at FS202.75, BL0.00, WL110.00 and
WL128.85.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is in Zones 221/222 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the inspection area is from the interior of the flight compartment.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft post MODSUM TC601R15021 (bulkhead 202.75 redesign).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 1
53−11−127 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
A. Procedure
(1) Remove the glareshield (Refer to AMM task 25−16−02−000−801).
(2) Remove or lift the insulation as necessary to get to the inspection area (refer to AMM
TASK 25−81−01−000−801 and/or AMM TASK 25−81−02−000−801).
NOTE: It may be necessary to release some of the electrical harnesses from their
respective clamps to remove the insulation blankets.
(3) Identify the locations to be examined (refer to Figure 1).
(4) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(5) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(6) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection for Damage of the Splice Fittings from the Windshield Center Post to the Lower and
Upper Sill at FS202.75, and BL0.00
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Examine the lower splice fittings (1) at WL110.00 and the upper splices (2) at WL128.85
for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, and
other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801 and/or AMM TASK
25−81−02−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the close out area.
E. Install the glareshield (Refer to AMM TASK 25−16−02−400−801).
F. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
LEGEND
1. Splice Fitting,Windshield
Center−Post Lower.
NOTES
1 Examine the shaded area.
Left side is shown,
A
right side is almost the same
BL0.00
WINDSHIELD CENTER
1
POST (REF) 1
LOWER SILL 1
(REF)
FS202.75 WL
110.00
(REF)
1
LOWER SILL
1 (REF)
AFT FLANGE
(REF)
rnd5311127_010.dg, mgr.mar.15, 2011
A B
Inspection of the Splice Fittings from the Windshield Center Post to the Lower and Upper Sill at
FS202.75, and BL0.00
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 4
53−11−127 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
LEGEND
2. Splice,Windshield
Center−Post Upper.
NOTES
1 Examine the shaded area.
C
Left side is shown,
right side is almost the same
UPPER SILL
(REF)
WL
128.85
(REF)
WINDSHIELD 2
CENTER POST
C
(REF)
WINDSHIELD 2
UPPER SILL
(REF)
D
VIEW LOOKING UP
Inspection of the Splice Fittings from the Windshield Center Post to the Lower and Upper Sill at
FS202.75, and BL0.00
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 5
53−11−127 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
AWL 53−11−128
1. General
A. This inspection is used to visually examine forward and aft faces of the web built−up
structure of the forward pressure bulkhead at FS202.75.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft Post−Modsum TC601R18027 or Post SB 601R−53−073.
REFERENCE DESIGNATION
Commercially available High intensity light source
Commercially available Inspection mirror
B. Reference Information
4. Job Set−Up
A. Open the access door that follows:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
121AL Nose hydraulics compartment
B. Remove the access panels that follow:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
211AL Forward equipment compartment
212AL Forward equipment compartment
D. Deploy the ADG (AMM 24−23−01−840−801 or TASK 24−23−01−840−804).
E. Remove the screws from their respective clamps as necessary to release the electrical
harnesses from the bird strike shields.
F. Remove the left and the right bird strike shields (AMM 53−10−36−000−801).
G. Remove electronic flight displays (EFD) No. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 (AMM
31−61−01−000−801).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−11−128 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
H. If necessary, release the electrical harnesses from their respective clamps behind the
instrument panels to access the forward pressure bulkhead.
I. Remove the cockpit voice recorder (CVR) control unit (AMM 23−71−04−000−801).
J. Remove or lift the single−layer fiberglass insulation as necessary to get to the inspection
area (AMM 25−81−01−000−801).
K. Remove the fiberglass and foam insulation as necessary to get to the inspection area
(AMM 25−81−02−000−801).
L. Make sure the inspection area is clean.
M. If necessary, remove the water−displacing corrosion−inhibiting compound (CIC) with a
lint−free cloth and solvent (SRM 51−26−00).
N. If necessary, remove the sealant.
O. If the finish in the inspection area is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish.
5. Procedure
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Do the detailed inspection of the forward and aft face of the pressure bulkhead at
FS202.75 above and below floor level as follows:
(1) Carefully examine the items that follow:
− Vertical stiffeners
− Capping angles and nested capping angles around the pressure bulkhead
− Attachment above and below the pilots floor level.
(2) Make sure that there are no cracks, scratches, dents, gouges, corrosion or
damaged, loose or missing fasteners.
B. If necessary, send a defect and damage report to MHI RJ Group (SRM 51−13−01).
6. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish.
B. If necessary, apply water−displacing corrosion−inhibiting compound (CIC) to the
applicable surfaces (TASK 51−25−56−390−802).
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
D. Install the single−layer fiberglass insulation (AMM 25−81−01−400−801).
E. Install the fiberglass and foam insulation (AMM 25−81−02−400−801).
F. If released, attach the electrical harnesses to their respective clamps behind the
instrument panels.
G. Install the CVR control unit (AMM 23−71−04−400−801).
H. Install EFD No. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 (AMM 31−61−01−400−801).
I. Install the left and the right birdstrike shields (AMM 53−10−36−400−801).
J. Attach the electrical harnesses to the bird strike shields with the clamps and screws.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 3
53−11−128 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
ACCESS DESIGNATION
211AL Forward equipment compartment
212AL Forward equipment compartment
ACCESS DESIGNATION
121AL Nose hydraulics compartment
WL 79.50
WL 76.50
BL 0.00
NOTES
1. Left hand side shown
right hand side similar.
A
VIEW LOOKING FORWARD
AT FS202.75
Detailed Inspection of the Forward Pressure Bulkhead at FS202.75
Figure 1 (Sheet 1 of 2)
WL 79.50
WL 76.50
BL 0.00
NOTES
1. Left hand side shown,
right hand side similar.
B
VIEW LOOKING AFT
AT FS202.75
DETAILED INSPECTION OF THE WINDSHIELD CENTER POST AND BULKHEAD AFT POST AT
FS202.75
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine for surface cracks at the locations that
follow:
− Aft flange outer edge and web of the channel−aft center post frame at FS202.75,
BL0.00 below the windshield lower sill
− Bend radius of the lower strap − windshield lower sill−to−center post at
FS202.75, BL0.00
− Lower and upper center post fittings at FS202.75, WL110.00 and WL128.85.
NOTE: The inspection applies to both sides of the aircraft.
B. Reference Information
For additional data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1−General Information, and Part 1,
51−20−09
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
The center post frame at FS202.75 is found in Zones 221/222 (Refer to NDTM Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the inspection area is by the flight compartment.
E. Parts Examined in This Procedure
Refer to Table 1.
Table 1 − Part Identification Data
ITEM DRAWING OR PART
DESCRIPTION MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
NO. NUMBER
2024 AL ALY ALCD
1 Splice Angle 601R340138 QQ−A−250/5
SH
2 Splice Fitting 7050−T7451 AL BAMS 516−003
601R340142
3 Splice Fitting ALY PL (CMS 516−3)
7475−T7351 AL BAMS 516−002
4 Aft Center Post 601R340128
ALY PL (CMS 516−2)
2024−T3 AL ALY
5 Windshield QQ−A−250/5
ALCD PL
Center−Post Upper 601R33236
Splice 2024−T4 AL ALY
6 QQ−A−200/3
EXTN
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft (Post MODSUM TC601R15021 (Bulkhead 202.75 redesign) and (Post
MODSUM TC601R18027 (FS202.75 pressure bulkhead reinforcement) or Post SB
601R−53−073)).
5. Inspection for Surface Cracks on the Lower Strap, Channel−Aft Center Post, and Upper and
Lower Center Post Fittings
A. Inspection Procedure
Refer to Figure 1.
NOTE: The item numbers in parentheses that follow the name of the components
correspond to the item numbers in Figure 1 and Table 1.
(1) Put the borescope in the region of the aft center post (4) at FS202.75, BL0.00
immediately below the splice fittings of the windshield center post (2, 3).
NOTE: Pay particular attention to the bottom row of fastener holes on the splice
fittings.
(2) Put the borescope in the region of the forward surface of the aft center post (4).
(3) Articulate the viewing head and examine the forward surfaces on both aft flanges of
the aft center post (4) below the windshield lower sill.
(4) Examine the web surfaces up to the uppermost lightening hole at FS202.75, BL0.00
below WL110.00 (Refer to Figure 1, Views A and B).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−11−129 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
(5) Examine around each fastener attachment and edges of each flange on the
windshield center post upper splices (5, 6) at FS202.75, BL0.00 and WL128.85.
(6) Examine around each fastener attachment and edges of each flange on the splice
fittings of the windshield center post (1, 2) at FS202.75, BL0.00 and WL110.00.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801 and/or AMM TASK
25−81−02−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the close out area.
E. Install the glareshield (Refer to AMM TASK 25−16−02−400−801).
F. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
LEGEND
1. Splice angle.
2. Splice fitting.
3. Splice fitting.
4. Aft center post.
NOTES
1 All shaded areas to
be inspected.
A
2 Examine the forward
surfaces and outer edges
of the channel aft
flanges on item 4.
1 2 3
FS202.75 1
WL
110.00
(REF)
2
4
AFT FLANGE
(REF)
4
B
rnd5311129_006.dg, rm/rm, 24/04/06
A B
Inspection Locations for the Windshield Center Post, Lower Strap, Upper and Lower Sill Fittings
at FS202.75, BL0.00
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 4
53−11−129 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
LEGEND
5. Windshield center
post upper splice fitting.
6. Windshield center
post upper splice fitting.
NOTE
1 All shaded areas to
C be inspected.
WL
128.85
(REF)
D 5
WINDSHIELD 6
CENTER POST
C
(REF)
WINDSHIELD 6
UPPER SILL
(REF)
D
VIEW LOOKING UP
Inspection Locations for the Windshield Center Post, Lower Strap, Upper and Lower Sill Fittings
at FS202.75, BL0.00
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 5
53−11−129 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
DETAILED INSPECTION OF THE WINDSHIELD CENTER POST AND BULKHEAD AFT POST AT
FS202.75
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine for surface cracks at the locations that
follow:
− Aft flange outer edge and web of the channel bulkhead aft−post (written as aft
center post in this task) at FS202.75, BL0.00 below the windshield lower sill
− Lower and upper splice fittings of the windshield center post at FS202.75,
WL110.00 and WL128.85.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
For additional data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
The inspection area is found in zones 221/222 at FS202.75 (Refer to NDTM Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the inspection area is by the flight compartment.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft pre MODSUM TC601R15021 (bulkhead 202.75 redesign) and post MODSUM
TC601R18027 (Pressure bulkhead FS202.75 reinforcement) or Post SB 601R−53−073.
5. Inspection for Damage to the Aft Center Post, and the Splice Fittings of the Windshield Center
Post at FS202.75 Pressure Bulkhead
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Examine the areas that follow for cracks, corrosion, and other damage:
(1) Splice fittings (1 & 2) of the windshield center post at FS202.75, BL0.00 and
WL110.00.
(2) Upper splices (3) of the windshield center post at FS202.75, BL0.00 and WL128.85.
(3) Forward surfaces of both aft flanges of the aft center post (4), adjacent to fastener
locations attached to the windshield center post lower fittings.
(4) Both side of the web surfaces of the aft center post (4), below the windshield lower
sill to the rivet row below the upper lightening hole.
(5) Doubler (5) area that overlap the web inspection area of the aft center post.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−11−130 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
(6) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801 and/or AMM TASK
25−81−02−400−801).
D. If released, attach the electrical harnesses to their respective clamps.
E. Install the glareshield (Refer to AMM TASK 25−16−02−400−801).
NOTE:
1 Examine the shaded area.
Left side shown, right side
is almost the same.
LEGEND
1. Splice Fitting, Left.
2. Splice Fitting, Right.
4. Aft Center Post.
5. Doubler.
BL0.00
FS202.75
WL WINDSHIELD
110.00 B CENTER POST
(REF) 2 (REF)
WINDSHIELD
LOWER SILL
(REF)
5 1
4
2
1
1
B
UP
rnd5311130_005.dg, mg.Feb11/11
Inspection of the Aft Center Post, and the Splice Fittings of the Windshield Center Post at
FS202.75 Pressure Bulkhead
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 4
53−11−130 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
NOTE
Examine the shaded area.
Left side shown, right side
LEGEND
WL
128.85
(REF)
WINDSHIELD
CENTER POST
(REF)
BL0.00 rnd5311130_006.dg, mg.Feb11/11
WINDSHIELD
UPPER SILL
(REF)
Inspection of the Aft Center Post, and the Splice Fittings of the Windshield Center Post at
FS202.75 Pressure Bulkhead
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 5
53−11−130 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
DETAILED INSPECTION OF THE PASSENGER DOOR CUT−OUT UPPER AND LOWER SILLS
AWL 53−21−101
1. General
A. This inspection is used to visually examine the passenger door upper sill and lower sill,
support frames, local skin, and related structure for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
2. Effectivity
All aircraft pre MODSUM TC601R13193 (phase IV passenger door).
REFERENCE DESIGNATION
Commercially Available Explosion Proof−Flashlight
Commercially Available Mirror−Telescopic
Commercially Available Magnifying Glass − 10 Power
B. Parts
DRAWING MATERIAL
ITEM DESCRIPTION
NUMBER SPECIFICATION
7050−T73651 AL
1 Latch Bracket 600−31925
ALY PL
2024−T8511
2 Hinge Half 600−31529
EXTRN
3 Lower Sill 601R31522 7075−T73652
4 Upper Sill 601R31527 clad
7050−T73651 AL
5 Open Lock Arrester 601R31722
ALY PL
6 Frame 310.00 601R32002 7075−T62 AL
7 Frame 349.00 601R32005 ALY ALCD SH
2024−T42 AL
8 Skin Panel 601R31000
ALY ALCD SH
9 Anchor Fitting 601R38074 7075−T651 AL
10 Stop Plate 601R38075 ALY SH
− Strap 601R31527
7075−T6
7075 T6 AL ALY
601R31527
− Doubler ALCD SH
601R31522
2024−T3 AL ALY
− Doubler 601R38338
ALCD SH
DRAWING MATERIAL
ITEM DESCRIPTION
NUMBER SPECIFICATION
7075−T73652
− Sill Fitting 600−31523
clad
6061−0 AL ALY
− Gutter 600−31016
SH
C. Reference Information
4. Job Set−Up
A. Remove the panels that follow:
D. Remove or lift the fiberglass and foam insulation as necessary to get to the inspection
area (AMM 25−81−02−000−801).
E. Make sure the inspection area is clean.
F. If necessary, remove the water−displacing corrosion−inhibiting compound (CIC) with a
lint−free cloth and solvent (SRM 51−26−00).
G. If the finish in the inspection area is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish.
5. Procedure
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Do the detailed inspection of the parts as follows:
(1) Examine the upper and lower passenger door sills, the sill members, the inner flange
doublers, and the fuselage skin doublers, for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
Pay particular attention to the corners of the passenger door cut−out and to the
hinge fitting attachments.
(2) Examine the external and internal top and side skin panels in the inspection area for
cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
(3) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
B. If necessary, send a defect and damage report to MHI RJ Group (SRM 51−13−01).
6. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish.
B. If necessary, apply water−displacing corrosion−inhibiting compound (CIC) to the
applicable surfaces (AMM 51−25−56−390−802).
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
D. Install the single−layer fiberglass insulation (AMM 25−81−01−400−801).
E. Install the fiberglass and foam insulation (AMM 25−81−02−400−801).
F. Install the lightning protection panels (AMM 53−01−01−410−801).
G. Install the panels that follow:
FS 280.00
A FS 295.00
FS 333.00 FS 310.00
FS 319.70
B 2
FS 349.00
1
FS 364.00
STR 3L
2
1
1
STR 11L
1
2
rnd5321101_001.dg, rm, 17/08/00
STR 17L
NOTE
Detailed Inspection of the Passenger Door Cut−Out Upper and Lower Sills
Figure 1 (Sheet 1 of 3)
FS 319.70
FS 321.50 1
FS 333.00
UPPER
FS 364.00 SILL
4
2
STR 2L
SKIN
8 FS 295.00
6
FRAME
C 310.00
STR 3L
NOTE
1
7 1 Examine shaded area.
STR 4L B
FRAME
349.00 2 Examine inner and outer skin.
FS 349.00
FS 333.00
STR 2L
FS 321.50
STR 3L
FS 310.00
STR 4L
FS 295.00
SKIN
8
1
2
rnd5321126_002.dg, rm, 17/08/00
FS 364.00
1 5
LATCH OPEN LOCK
BRACKET ARRESTER 1 4
LATCH UPPER
C BRACKET SILL
Detailed Inspection of the Passenger Door Cut−Out Upper and Lower Sills
Figure 1 (Sheet 2 of 3)
STOP
ANCHOR PLATE
FITTING 10
9
ANCHOR 1
LOWER
FS 349.00 FITTING SILL
STOP 9 HINGE
3
PLATE HALF
2
10 STR 19L
SKIN
8
FS 310.00
STR 17L
FS 319.70
FS 333.00
NOTES
STR 18L E
1 Examine shaded area.
D
2 Examine inner and outer skin.
FS 349.00 3 Structure and outer skin
removed for clarity.
1 FS 310.00
1
rnd5321126_003.dg , rm, 17/08/00
3 STR 17L
LOWER
SILL 2
HINGE
HALF
E
VIEW LOOKING UP AT LOWER SILL 3
Detailed Inspection of the Passenger Door Cut−Out Upper and Lower Sills
Figure 1 (Sheet 3 of 3)
1. General
A. Function
This inspection is used to visually examine the forward and aft frames of the cut−out for
the passenger door and one stringer bay above and below the door cut−out for cracks,
corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
The inspection area is in Zones 141, 231, and 241 (Refer to the NDTM, Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is through the cabin interior and by the fuselage exterior.
2. Effectivity
All aircraft pre Modsum TC601R13193 (phase 4 passenger door).
A. Procedure
(1) Remove the floor panel 231CLF (refer to AMM TASK 53−01−01−000−802).
(2) Remove the lightning protection panels (refer to AMM TASK 53−01−01−000−806).
(3) Remove or lift the insulation as necessary to get to the inspection area (refer to AMM
TASK 25−81−01−000−801 and/or AMM TASK 25−81−02−000−801).
(4) Identify the locations to be examined (refer to Figure 1).
(5) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
(6) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(7) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection of the Passenger Door Cut−Out Frames and Internal Back−Up Structure
Refer to the areas shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the two frames along the edges of the passenger door cut−out and one
stringer bay above and below (between STGR2 and STGR19) for cracks, corrosion,
and other damage. Give particular attention at the corners of the cut−out and at the
attachment areas of the pin stop fittings.
(2) Examine the interior back−up structure local to all the fittings for cracks, corrosion
and other damage.
(3) Examine the interior and exterior of the fuselage skin between FS295.00 and
FS364.00 between STGR2 and STRG19 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
(4) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801 and/or AMM TASK
25−81−02−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the close out area.
E. Install the lightning protection panels (refer to AMM TASK 53−01−01−410−801)
F. Install the floor panel 231CLF (refer to AMM TASK 53−01−01−400−802).
G. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
FS280.00
A FS295.00
FS333.00 FS310.00
FS319.70
B
FS349.00
FS364.00
PIN STOP
FITTING
(REF)
STGR3L
PIN STOP
FITTING
(REF) 5
6 2
4
3
STGR11L PIN STOP
FITTING
(REF)
9
2 10
rnd5321102_001.dg, rm/lr, oct03/2007
NOTES
STGR17L 7
2 8
1. Examine shaded area.
Inspection of the Passenger Door Cut−Out Frames and Internal Back−Up Structure
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
NOTES
FS364.00
1
2
3
STGR2L FS295.00
FS310.00
4
STGR3L
STGR4L B
FS349.00
Inspection of the Passenger Door Cut−Out Frames and Internal Back−Up Structure
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the passenger door latch bracket and
latch pin fittings on the upper sill, bearing rod, pin stop and tension button fittings on
the sides of the passenger−door cut−out for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is in Zone 231 (Refer to the NDTM, Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) It is necessary to open the passenger door.
2. Effectivity
Aircraft pre Modsum TC601R13193.
A. Procedure
(1) Open the passenger door.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(2) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless they show
deterioration or local damage.
(3) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, Chapter 51).
A. Inspection Procedure
NOTE: If the surfaces of any component are painted, look at the paint condition (for
signs of cracks and corrosion) in the component material.
(1) Examine the fittings that follow:
− Two latch brackets (1) and pins (2)
− Six pin stop fittings (3) and bearing rods (4)
− Four tension button fittings (5).
(2) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
6. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−21−103 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
C A
B
NOTES
1. Aft side shown, A
forward side opposite.
2. Examine the shaded area. B
A
A 1
C
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the service door sills, support frames,
local skin, stop fittings and related structure for cracks, corrosion, and other damage
between FS310.00 and FS364.00 from STGR8R to STGR19R.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1 General
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zones 142, 232, and 242 (refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by interior of the cabin and by the exterior fuselage.
2. Effectivity
A. All Aircraft.
3. Tools and Equipment
A. Use the equipment that follows:
− Light source
− Inspection mirror
− Borescope.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−21−108 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
A. Procedure
(1) Remove the floor panel 232CRF (refer to AMM TASK 53−01−01−000−802)
(2) Remove lightning protection panels (refer to AMM TASK 53−01−01−000−806)
(3) Remove or lift the insulation as necessary to get to the inspection area (refer to AMM
TASK 25−81−01−000−801 and/or AMM TASK 25−81−02−000−801).
(4) Remove the service door scuff plate (refer to AMM TASK 53−20−31−000−801).
(5) Remove the attaching fasteners and the lower sill cover plate from the service door
sill structure.
(6) Identify the locations to be examined (refer to Figure 1).
(7) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
(8) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, go directly to the inspection.
(9) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Service Door Sill Areas
Refer to the area shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the upper service−door sill, the fittings, the doublers, and the internal skin
surfaces between FS310.00 and FS364.00 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
Make sure that you carefully examine the corners of the service door cutout and also
to the latch fitting attachments and their local support structure.
(2) Examine the lower service−door sill, the doublers, the strap, and the internal skin
surfaces between FS310.00 and FS364.00 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
Make sure that you carefully examine the corners of the service door cutout and also
to the hinge fitting attachments and their local support structure.
(3) Examine the service door support−frames, the stop fittings and their local support
structure (which includes the intercostals, and gussets) at FS319.00 and at
FS349.00, between STGR8R and STGR19R for cracks, corrosion, and other
damage..
(4) Examine the frames at FS310.00, 333.00 and 364.00, between STGR8R and
STGR19R for cracks, corrosion, and other damage..
(5) Examine the external top and side skin panels in the inspection area for cracks,
corrosion, and other damage.
(6) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
6. Acceptance or Rejection Criteria
A. All signs of corrosion or cracks are cause for rejection.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 3
53−21−108 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
L FS 364.00
FS 349.00
FS 333.00
A
FS 319.00
FS 310.00
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
STR 8R B
2
F
STR 13R H
NOTE
2 North American Aircraft
configuration only.
A
STR 19R
Inspection of the Service−Door Surround Structure and Fittings
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
L FS 364.00
FS 349.00
FS 333.00
A
FS 319.00
FS 310.00
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
STR 8R B
F 3
STR 13R H
rnd5321108_007.dg, jp, 25/02/00
NOTE
3 European Aircraft
configuration only.
A
STR 19R
Inspection of the Service−Door Surround Structure and Fittings
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
FS 364.00
NOTE
1 Inner and outer web. FS 349.00
FS 333.00
1
FS 310.00
B
FS 364.00
UPPER SILL
FITTING
FS 349.00
FS 333.00
1
FS 319.00
FS 310.00
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
rnd5321108_002.dg, jp, 22/02/00
NOTE
1 Inner and outer web.
STR 8R
STR 8R
1 EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
E
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
STR 19R
D
rnd5321108_003.dg, jp, 24/02/00
STR 19R
Inspection of the Service−Door Surround Structure and Fittings
Figure 1 (Sheet 4)
NOTES
1 Inner and outer web.
2 1
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
STR 19R
F
STR 19R
rnd5321108_004.dg, jp, 25/02/00
FS 364.00
NOTE
1 Inner and outer web.
FS 349.00
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
FS 319.00
FS 310.00
FS 333.00
H
LOWER SILL FS 364.00
FS 349.00
FS 319.00 1
FS 310.00
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
rnd5321108_005.dg, jp, 22/01/00
FS 333.00
K
UPPER SILL
FITTING
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
UPPER ROLLER
FITTING
UPPER ROLLER
FITTING
BRACKET
STOP
FITTINGS
HINGE SUPPORT
ASSEMBLY
STOP
FITTING
STOP
HINGE SUPPORT FITTINGS
ASSEMBLY
STOP
FITTING
LOWER ROLLER
PROXIMITY SENSOR
FITTING LOWER ROLLER
SLIDE−FITTING
FITTING
LOCK PIN
FITTING
LOCKPIN
FS 319.00 FITTING
rnd5321108_006.dg, jp, 22/02/99
FS 333.00
FS 349.00
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the avionics−compartment−door cutout
surround structure from the aft face of FS349.00 to the forward face of FS409.00 and
between STGR24L and STGR24R for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area of inspection is in Zone 140 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the internal avionics−compartment−door cutout surround structure is by
the avionics−compartment door 811 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
(2) Access to the remaining inspection area is by the external bottom skin panels.
E. Parts Examined in This Procedure
Refer to Table 1.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
(1) Inspect the internal skin surface and surround structure as follows:
(a) Examine the avionics−compartment−door cutout surround structure, support
frames and related components. Also examine the internal skin from FS364.00
to FS394.00 between STGR24R and STGR24L for cracks, corrosion and other
damage. Carefully examine the corners of the door cut−out, the door fittings,
and structure local to the attachment fittings. Pay particular attention to the
splice angles.
(b) Examine the internal skin and structural components from the aft face of
FS349.00 to the forward face of FS409.00 and between STGR24R and
STGR24L for cracks, corrosion and other damage.
(c) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
(2) Inspect the external skin surface as follows:
(a) Examine the external skin from frame FS349.00 to frame FS409.00 between
STGR24R and STGR24L for cracks, corrosion, and other damage Carefully
examine the corners of the door cut−out and the fastener holes.
(b) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801 and/or AMM TASK
25−81−02−400−801).
D. Install the main avionics compartment floor−panels (refer to AMM TASK
53−01−01−000−801).
E. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the close out area.
F. Close the main avionics−compartment door 811 (refer to AMM, Chapter 52).
G. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 3
53−21−110 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
5
FRAME EDGE OF
409.00 4 CUT−OUT
FRAME
394.00
BL 0.0
FS 379.00 3
FRAME
364.00 2
FRAME
349.00
SKIN PANEL
1
INTERCOSTAL
(REF)
NOTE
Examine shaded area.
Examine the inner and A
outer skin. VIEW LOOKING DOWN
F
E
D
F
C
B
A B
FS 394.00
C
GUIDE F
E
FITTING
6 D
F
FS 364.00
A
ZONE 810
LATCH
PIN
FITTING
B 10
GUIDE
FITTING
7
STOP
FITTING
C 9
STOP
FITTING
8 rnd5321110_006.dg, pw/as, 28/08/01
NOTE
E Examine shaded area.
FS 394.00
A FS 364.00
ZONE 810
STR 25L
12
SPLICE
FS 364.00 ANGLE
11
FS 379.00
SPLICE
ANGLE
STR 26R 11
12
rnd5321110_007.dg, sm/as, 31/08/01
STR 27
12
NOTE
STR 26L
Examine shaded area.
12
STR 25R
12
FS 379.00 SPLICE
ANGLE
11
STN
394.00
SPLICE
ANGLE
11
STR 26R
12
STR 27
12
rnd5321110_008.dg, sm/as, 31/08/01
STR 26L
12
NOTE
Examine shaded area.
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the skin panels, stringers, frames, and
other attachments from FS280.00 to FS409.00 above the floor for cracks, corrosion
and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is in Zones 231, 232, 241, 242, 243 and 244 (Refer to NDTM Part
1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by interior of the cabin and by the exterior fuselage.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
A. Procedure
NOTE: As required, remove the components that follow in the inspection area, to
get access to the internal structure and skin panels:
(1) Remove the necessary main passenger cabin ceiling−panels (refer to AMM TASK
25−26−07−000−801 or TASK 25−26−07−000−802 or TASK
25−26−07−000−803
(2) Remove the necessary sidewall panels (refer to AMM TASK 25−26−01−000−801).
(3) Remove the necessary Dado Panels (refer to AMM TASK 25−26−02−000−802).
(4) Remove the wardrobe unit (refer to AMM TASK 25−24−01−000−801 or TASK
25−24−02−000−801 or TASK 25−24−02−000−802).
(5) If required, remove the galley (refer to AMM TASK 25−31−01−000−801 or TASK
25−31−01−000−802)
(6) Remove the necessary overhead storage compartment (refer to AMM TASK
25−23−01−000−801 or TASK 25−23−01−000−802 or TASK
25−23−01−000−804).
(7) Remove or lift the insulation as necessary to get to the inspection area (refer to AMM
TASK 25−81−01−000−801 and/or AMM TASK 25−81−02−000−801).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−21−115 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
5. Inspection for Damage to the Skin Panel and Interior Structure from FS280.00 to FS409.00,
and between STGR17L to STGR17R
Refer to the area shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the stringers, the frames and the internal skin surfaces from FS280.00 to
FS409.00 above the floor level for cracks corrosion, and other damage. Pay
particular attention to structure local to the passenger door and service door cut
outs.
(2) Examine the external skin panel surfaces from FS280.00 to FS409.00, above the
floor level for cracks, corrosion and other damage. Pay particular attention to
structure local to the passenger door and service door cut outs.
(3) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801 and/or AMM TASK
25−81−02−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the close out area.
E. Install the overhead storage compartment in the area (refer to AMM TASK
25−23−01−400−801 or TASK 25−23−01−400−802 or TASK 25−23−01−400−803).
F. If required, install the galley (refer to AMM TASK 25−31−01−400−801 or TASK
25−31−01−400−802)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 3
53−21−115 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
3
FS 310.00
2
FS 295.00
1
FS 280.00
STR 0
BULKHEAD
AT FS 280.00
(REF)
NOTE
Examine the
shaded area
Examine inner
STR 17 and outer skin
rnd5321115_001.dg, rt, 26/06/01
Inspection of the Fuselage Skin Panels and Structure from FS280.00 to FS409.00
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
STR 0 8
FS 379.00
6
FS 349.00
STR 3
NOTE
Examine the
shaded area
rnd5321115_002.dg, rt, 26/06/01
3
Examine inner FS 310.00
and outer skin
1
FS 280.00
Inspection of the Fuselage Skin Panels and Structure from FS280.00 to FS409.00
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
10
STR 0 FS 409.00
9
FS 394.00
8
FS 379.00
7
FS 364.00
NOTE
Examine the
shaded area
Examine inner
and outer skin
WL 73.00
(REF)
STR 17
rnd5321115_003.dg, rt, 26/06/01
Inspection of the Fuselage Skin Panels and Structure from FS280.00 to FS409.00
Figure 1 (Figure 3)
STR 3
STR 9
STR 0
BULKHEAD
AT FS 280.00
(REF)
NOTE
Examine the
shaded area
Examine inner
and outer skin
STR 17
WL 73.00
(REF)
1
FS 280.00
rnd5321115_004.dg, rt, 26/06/01
4
FS 319.00
Inspection of the Fuselage Skin Panels and Structure from FS280.00 to FS409.00
Figure 1 (Sheet 4)
10
FS 409.00
STR 0
9
FS 394.00
8
FS 379.00
7
FS 364.00
6
FS 349.00
STR 9
NOTE
Examine the
shaded area
Examine inner
and outer skin
NOTE
North American aircraft
configuration shown
WL 73.00
(REF)
rnd5321115_005.dg, rt, 26/06/01
STR 17
Inspection of the Fuselage Skin Panels and Structure from FS280.00 to FS409.00
Figure 1 (Sheet 5)
10
FS 409.00
STR 0
9
FS 394.00
8
FS 379.00
7
FS 364.00
6
FS 349.00
STR 9
NOTE
Examine the
shaded area
Examine inner
and outer skin
NOTE
European aircraft
configuration shown
WL 73.00
(REF)
rnd5321115_006.dg, rt, 26/06/01
STR 17
Inspection of the Fuselage Skin Panels and Structure from FS280.00 to FS409.00
Figure 1 (Sheet 6)
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the potable−water servicing door
cut−out from frame FS333.00 to FS379.00, between STGR18R and STGR21R for
cracks, corrosion and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 142 (Refer to the NDTM Part 1 General Information, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by interior of the main avionics compartment or/and the cabin floor and by
the exterior fuselage.
E. Parts Examined in This Procedure
Refer to Table 1.
Table 1 − Part Identification Data
ITEM
DRAWING OR PART
NO. DESCRIPTION MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
NUMBER [2]
[1]
Frame Sector − 7050−T7452 AL ALY
1 601R32005 BAMS 514−005
FS349.00 EXTRN
Frame Sector −
2 7075−T62 AL ALY
FS364.00 601R32007
ALCD SH
3 Splice Angle QQ−A−250/13
7075−T6 AL ALY
4 Shim
ALCD SH
2024−T42 AL ALY
5 Angle
ALCD SH
601R38316
2024−T3 AL ALY
6 Support Plate QQ−A−250/5
ALCD SH
7 [3] 2024−T42 AL ALY
Former Segments
8 ALCD SH
NOTE [1]: Item numbers correspond to item numbers in Figure 1.
NOTE [2]: Numbers that do not include a dashed suffix are drawing numbers.
NOTE [3]: If installed.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 1
53−21−118 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801 and/or AMM TASK
25−81−02−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the close out area.
E. If access inspection area through the floor, install the lightning protection panels (refer to
AMM TASK 53−01−01−400−806
F. Close the main−avionics compartment door 811 (Refer to the AMM, Chapter 52) or install
the passenger−compartment floor panel 242CRF (Refer to AMM TASK
53−01−01−400−802).
G. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
FORMER
SEGMENT
7
FRAME
SECTOR
1
SKIN PANEL
9
FORMER
SEGMENT
FS 379.00 8
STR 18R
ANGLE
5
FS 364.00
DOOR STR 19R
ASSEMBLY
(REF)
FS 352.37
STR 20R
NOTES
FS 349.00
Examine the shaded area. STR 21R
FORMER
If installed. SEGMENT FS 333.00
7
SKIN PANEL 5
9 DOUBLER
12
B C − C
Inspection of the Potable−Water Servicing−Door Cut−Out
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
STRINGER
11
STR 18R
SUPPORT PLATE
6
STR 19R
STR 20R
STR 21R
STRINGER
11
FS 379.00
FS 349.00
SKIN PANEL
9
rnd5321118_002.dg, ab/ik, 20/04/01
FS 333.00
AWL 53−21−119
1. General
A. The detailed inspection is used to examine the surround structure and service door cutout
that follows for cracks, corrosion and other damage:
− If applicable, the forward lavatory from FS280.00 to FS320.00, between STGR19R and
STGR23R
− The aft lavatory from FS559.00+80 to FS559.00+112, between STGR20R and
STGR23R.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
REFERENCE DESIGNATION
Commercially available High intensity light source
Commercially available Inspection mirror
Commercially available Borescope (If necessary)
B. Parts
DRAWING MATERIAL
ITEM DESCRIPTION
NUMBER SPECIFICATION
1 Frame Sector − FS310.00 601R32002 7075−T62 AL
2 Frame Sector − FS295.00 601R32001 ALY ALCD SH
3 Angle
4 Intercostal
601R38329 −
5 Skin Panel
6 Support Plate
MS28257C5−
7 Door Hinge Assembly −
1100
2024−T42 AL
8 Skin Panel 601R31021
ALY SH
9 Door Hinge Assembly 601R35232
10 Frame Sector − FS559.00+112 601R32217 7075−T62 AL
11 Frame − FS559.00+96 601R32216 ALY ALCD SH
12 Diaphragm 601R39000 −
DRAWING MATERIAL
ITEM DESCRIPTION
NUMBER SPECIFICATION
2024−T42 AL
13 Skin Panel 601R38328
ALY ALCD SH
2024−T3 AL ALY
14 Doubler 601R39000
ALCD SH
C. Reference Information
4. Job Set−Up
A. If applicable, do as follows for the forward lavatory:
(1) Open the access door that follows:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
811 Main avionics compartment door
142AR Door
ACCESS DESIGNATION
196AR Door
(2) Remove the aft−panel wing fairing (AMM 53−82−01−000−811).
(3) Remove the floor panels that follow:
5. Procedure
Refer to Figure 1.
A. If applicable, do as follows for the forward lavatory:
(1) Examine the forward−lavatory service−door−cutout and surround structure, the
fuselage internal and external skin, local frames and stringers from FS280.00 to
FS320.00, between STGR19R and STGR23R for cracks, corrosion and other
damage.
(2) Pay particular attention to the hinge assembly and its attachment to the surround
structure.
(3) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
B. Do as follows for the aft lavatory:
(1) Examine the aft−lavatory service−cutout and surround structure, the fuselage
internal and external skin, local frames and stringers from FS559.00+80 to
FS559.00+112, between STGR20R and STGR23R for cracks, corrosion and other
damage.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 3
53−21−119 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
(2) Pay particular attention to the hinge assembly and its attachment to the surround
structure.
(3) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
C. If necessary, send a defect and damage report to MHI RJ Group (SRM 51−13−01).
6. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish.
B. If necessary, apply water−displacing corrosion−inhibiting compound (CIC) to the
applicable surfaces (TASK 51−25−56−390−802).
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
D. If applicable, do as follows for the forward lavatory:
(1) Install the single−layer fiberglass insulation (AMM 25−81−01−400−801).
(2) If removed, install the access panels that follow:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
811 Main avionics compartment door
142AR Door
ACCESS DESIGNATION
196AR Door
FS 320.00
A
C
FS 310.00
FS 295.00
STGR 19R
B
FS 280.00
STGR 20R
STGR 21R
STGR 22R
rnd5321119_001.dg, kp, October 3, 2013
NOTE
Examine the shaded STGR 23R
area.
A
VIEW LOOKING INBOARD
Detailed Inspection of the Forward or Rear Lavatory Servicing Door Cut−Out and Internal
Structure
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 5
53−21−119 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
LEGEND
1. Frame sector − FS310.00. 3
2. Frame sector − FS295.00.
7
3. Angle.
4 5
4. Intercostal.
5. Skin panel.
6. Support plate.
7. Door hinge assembly.
8. Skin panel.
FS 295.00
8
STGR
19R
2
STGR FS 310.00
20R
8
STGR 6
21R
1
STGR
22R
STGR
23R
FS 280.00
NOTE
Examine the shaded
area.
Detailed Inspection of the Forward or Rear Lavatory Servicing Door Cut−Out and Internal
Structure
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 6
53−21−119 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
LEGEND
9. Door hinge assembly. 9
NOTE
Examine the shaded area.
rnd5321119_003.dg, kp, October 11, 2013
Detailed Inspection of the Forward or Rear Lavatory Servicing Door Cut−Out and Internal
Structure
Figure 1 (Sheet 3)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 7
53−21−119 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
NOTE
Examine the shaded area.
FS 559.00
+112.00
F
STGR
20R G FS 559.00
+100.00
FS 559.00
+96.00
STGR
21R
STGR FS 559.00
22R +80.00
STGR
23R
Detailed Inspection of the Forward or Rear Lavatory Servicing Door Cut−Out and Internal
Structure
Figure 1 (Sheet 4)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 8
53−21−119 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
LEGEND NOTE
10. Frame sector − FSS559.00 + 112.00. Examine the shaded area.
11. Frame sector − FSS559.00 + 96.00.
12. Diaphragm.
13. Skin panel.
14. Doubler.
STGR
20R
13
11
STGR
21R
12
STGR
22R 14
10
STGR
23R
FS 559.00
+80
G
VIEW LOOKING OUTBOARD
Detailed Inspection of the Forward or Rear Lavatory Servicing Door Cut−Out and Internal
Structure
Figure 1 (Sheet 5)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 9
53−21−119 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine fuselage skin panels, splice
straps, and butt strap at FS280.00 between STGR8L and STGR8R, and between
STGR11L and STGR11R for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
equivalent unless specified.
B. Reference Information
(1) For additional data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is in Zones 231 and 232 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03)
D. Access
(1) Access is by the external fuselage surface, through the passenger door, and through
the main avionics compartment door.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
B. It is necessary to do NDTM TASK Part 6, 53−21−125 to complete the inspection of SSI
53−21−125.
A. Use the equipment that follows (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1, 51−20−09).
− Light source
− Inspection mirror
− Borescope.
ACCESS DESIGNATION
811 Main Avionics Compartment Door
832 Passenger Door
(2) Remove the crawlway panels 141AFL and 141BFL (refer to AMM Chapter 25).
(3) Remove the access panels that follow:
(4) Remove or lift the insulation as necessary to get to the inspection area (refer to AMM
TASK 25−81−02−000−801).
(5) Identify the locations to be examined (refer to Figure 1).
(6) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(7) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(8) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Fuselage Skin Panels, Splice Straps, and Butt Strap
A. Inspection Procedure
Refer to Figure 1.
(1) Examine the accessible areas that follow between STGR8L and STGR8R, and
between STGR11L and STGR11R for cracks, corrosion, and other damage:
(a) Skin panels (1) external surfaces 4.0 in (101.6 mm.) forward to aft of FS280.00
(b) Splice straps (2) internal surfaces at STGR16, and STGR23 4.0 in (101.6 mm.)
forward to aft of FS280.00
(c) Butt strap (3) forward fastener row at FS279.00 and both fastener rows aft of
FS280.00.
(2) Examine all accessible splice angles (4) at all stringers location for cracks, corrosion,
and other damage. Make sure you carefully examine at STGR3L and STGR3R
location.
(3) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK 51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−02−400−801).
D. Install the access panels that follow:
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 3
53−21−125 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
E. Install the crawlway panels 141AFL and 141BFL (refer to AMM Chapter 25).
F. Close the access doors that follows:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
811 Main Avionics Compartment Door
832 Passenger Door
G. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
FS280.00
NOTES
Left side is shown, right
side is almost the same.
Area to be inspected.
LEGEND
B 1. Panel, skin.
STGR 22
STGR 23
STGR 24
4.0 in. 4.0 in.
UP
NOTE
Left side is shown,
right side is almost
the same. STGR16
is shown, STGR23 FS280.00
is almost the same.
LEGEND
1. Panel skin.
2. Strap, splice.
3. Strap, butt.
STGR 16
1
FS280.00
BULKHEAD
(REF)
FLOOR SILL
STGR 17 (REF)
rnd5321125_010.dg, gw/kmw, dec18/2009
B
UP
FS280.00
NOTES
Left side is shown, right
side is almost the same.
C Examine shaded area.
2 Splice angle at STGR3 shown,
typical for all inspection areas.
LEGEND
1. Panel, skin.
4. Angle, splice.
STGR3
2 (REF)
FS280.00 4
C FWD
DETAILED INSPECTION OF THE PHASE IV PASSENGER DOOR CUT−OUT UPPER AND LOWER
SILLS
AWL 53−21−126
1. General
A. This inspection is used to visually examine the passenger door upper sill and lower
sill, support frames, local skin, and related structure for cracks, corrosion, and other
damage.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft post MODSUM TC601R13193 (Phase IV passenger door).
REFERENCE DESIGNATION
Commercially Available Explosion Proof−Flashlight
Commercially Available Mirror−Telescopic
Commercially Available Magnifying Glass − 10 Power
B. Parts
DRAWING MATERIAL
ITEM DESCRIPTION
NUMBER SPECIFICATION
7050−T73651 AL
1 Latch Bracket 600−31925
ALY PL
2024−T8511
2 Hinge Half 600−31529
EXTRN
3 Lower Sill 601R31522 7075−T73652
4 Upper Sill 601R31527 clad
7050−T73651 AL
5 Open Lock Arrester 601R31722
ALY PL
6 Frame 310.00 601R32002 7075−T62 AL
7 Frame 349.00 601R32005 ALY ALCD SH
2024−T42 AL
8 Skin Panel 601R31000
ALY ALCD SH
9 Anchor Fitting 601R38074 7075−T651 AL
10 Stop Plate 601R38075 ALY SH
Strap 601R31527
7075−T6
7075 T6 AL ALY
601R31527
ALCD SH
− 601R31522
Doubler
2024−T3 AL ALY
601R38338
ALCD SH
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 1
53−21−126 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
DRAWING MATERIAL
ITEM DESCRIPTION
NUMBER SPECIFICATION
7075−T73652
Sill Fitting 600−31523
clad
−
6061−0 AL ALY
Gutter 600−31016
SH
C. Reference Information
ACCESS DESIGNATION
832 Passenger door
B. Remove the left windscreen (AMM 25−24−04−000−801).
C. Remove the wardrobe (AMM 25−24−01−000−801).
D. Remove the passenger seats corresponding to the inspection area (AMM
25−21−01−000−801).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−21−126 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
E. Remove the overhead storage compartments corresponding to the inspection area (AMM
25−23−01−000−801).
H. Remove the lightning protection panel corresponding to the inspection area (231CLF)
(AMM 53−01−01−000−806).
I. Remove or lift the single−layer fiberglass insulation as necessary to get to the inspection
area (AMM 25−81−01−000−801).
J. Remove or lift the fiberglass and foam insulation as necessary to get to the inspection
area (AMM 25−81−02−000−801).
K. Make sure the inspection area is clean.
L. If necessary, remove the water−displacing corrosion−inhibiting compound (CIC) with a
lint−free cloth and solvent (SRM 51−26−00).
M. If the finish in the inspection area is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish.
5. Procedure
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Do the detailed inspection of the parts as follows:
(1) Examine the upper and lower passenger door sills, the sill members, the inner flange
doublers, and the fuselage skin doublers, for cracks, corrosion and other damage.
Pay particular attention to the corners of the passenger door cut−out, the hinge and
the latch fitting attachments.
(2) Examine the external and internal top and lower skin panels along the length of the
upper and lower sill panels for cracks, corrosion and other damage.
(3) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
B. If necessary, send a defect and damage report to MHI RJ Group (SRM 51−13−01).
6. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish.
B. If necessary, apply water−displacing corrosion−inhibiting compound (CIC) to the
applicable surfaces (TASK 51−25−56−390−802).
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
D. Install the single−layer fiberglass insulation (AMM 25−81−01−400−801).
E. Install the fiberglass and foam insulation (AMM 25−81−02−400−801).
F. Install the lightning protection panel removed for the inspection (AMM
53−01−01−410−801).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 3
53−21−126 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
H. Install the overhead storage compartments removed for the inspection (AMM
25−23−01−400−801).
ACCESS DESIGNATION
832 Passenger door
FS 280.00
A FS 295.00
FS 333.00 FS 310.00
FS 319.70
B 2
FS 349.00
1
FS 364.00
STR 3L
2
1
1
STR 11L
1
2
rnd5321126_001.dg, rm, 15/08/00
STR 17L
NOTE
FS 319.70
FS 321.50 1
FS 333.00
UPPER
FS 364.00 SILL
4
2
STR 2L
SKIN
8 FS 295.00
6
FRAME
C 310.00
STR 3L
NOTE
1
7 1 Examine shaded area.
STR 4L B
FRAME
349.00 2 Examine inner and outer skin.
FS 349.00
FS 333.00
STR 2L
FS 321.50
STR 3L
FS 310.00
STR 4L
FS 295.00
SKIN
8
1
2
rnd5321126_002.dg, rm, 17/08/00
FS 364.00
1 5
LATCH OPEN LOCK
BRACKET ARRESTER 1 4
LATCH UPPER
C BRACKET SILL
STOP
ANCHOR PLATE
FITTING 10
9
ANCHOR 1
LOWER
FS 349.00 FITTING SILL
STOP 9 HINGE
3
PLATE HALF
2
10 STR 19L
SKIN
8
FS 310.00
STR 17L
FS 319.70
FS 333.00
NOTES
STR 18L E
1 Examine shaded area.
D
2 Examine inner and outer skin.
FS 349.00 3 Structure and outer skin
removed for clarity.
1 FS 310.00
3 STR 17L
LOWER
SILL 2
HINGE
HALF
E
VIEW LOOKING UP AT LOWER SILL 3
Inspection of the Phase IV Passenger Door Upper and Lower Sills
Figure 1 (Sheet 3)
1. General
A. Function
This inspection is used to visually examine the forward and aft frames of the cut−out for
the passenger door and one stringer bay above and below the door cut−out for cracks,
corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
The inspection area is in Zones 141, 231, and 241 (Refer to the NDTM, Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is through the cabin interior and by the fuselage exterior.
2. Effectivity
All aircraft post Modsum TC601R13193 (phase 4 passenger door).
A. Procedure
(1) Remove the floor panel 231CLF (refer to AMM TASK 53−01−01−000−802).
(2) Remove the lightning protection panels (refer to AMM TASK 53−01−01−000−806).
(3) Remove or lift the insulation as necessary to get to the inspection area (refer to AMM
TASK 25−81−01−000−801 and/or AMM TASK 25−81−02−000−801).
(4) Identify the locations to be examined (refer to Figure 1).
(5) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
(6) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(7) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection of the Passenger Door Cut−Out Frames and Internal Back−Up Structure
Refer to the areas shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the two frames along the edges of the passenger door cut−out and one
stringer bay above and below (between STGR2 and STGR19) for cracks corrosion,
and other damage. Give particular attention at the corners of the cut−out and at the
attachment areas of the pin stop fittings.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−21−127 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
(2) Examine the interior back−up structure local to all the fittings for cracks, corrosion
and other damage.
(3) Examine the interior and exterior of the fuselage skin between FS295.00 and
FS364.00 between STGR2 and STRG19 for cracks, corrosion and other damage.
(4) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801 and/or AMM TASK
25−81−02−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the close out area.
E. Install the lightning protection panels (refer to AMM TASK 53−01−01−410−801)
F. Install the floor panel 231CLF (refer to AMM TASK 53−01−01−400−802).
G. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
FS280.00
A FS295.00
FS333.00 FS310.00
FS319.70
B
FS349.00
FS364.00
PIN STOP
FITTING
(REF)
STGR3L
PIN STOP
FITTING
(REF) 5
6 2
4
3
STGR11L
9
2 10
rnd5321127_001.dg, rm/lr, oct03/2007
NOTES
STGR17L 7
2 8
1. Examine shaded area.
Inspection of the Passenger Door Cut−Out Frames and Internal Back−Up Structure
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
NOTES
FS364.00
1
2
3
STGR2L FS295.00
FS310.00
4
STGR3L
STGR4L B
FS349.00
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the passenger door latch bracket and
latch pin fittings on the upper sill, bearing rod, pin stop and tension button fittings on
the sides of the passenger−door cut−out for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is in Zone 230 (Refer to the NDTM, Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) It is necessary to open the passenger door.
2. Effectivity
Aircraft post Modsum TC601R13193.
A. Procedure
(1) Open the passenger door.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(2) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless they show
deterioration or local damage.
(3) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, Chapter 51).
A. Inspection Procedure
NOTE: If the surfaces of any component are painted, look at the paint condition (for
signs of cracks and corrosion) in the component material.
(1) Examine the fittings that follow:
− Two latch brackets (1) and pins (2)
− Four pin stop fittings (3) and bearing rods (4)
− Four tension button fittings (5).
(2) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
6. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−21−128 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
C A
B
NOTES
1. Aft side shown, A
forward side opposite.
2. Examine the shaded area.
B
A 1
C
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the passenger door piano−hinge half on
the fuselage side.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1 General
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The passenger door hinge is in Zone 832 (refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Remove these components in the inspection area as follows:
− The passenger door hinge fairings
− The top step panel (lift this panel to get access to the hinge).
E. Parts Examined in This Procedure
Refer to Table 1.
2. Effectivity
A. All Aircraft.
− Inspection mirror.
4. Preparation and Cleaning
A. Procedure
(1) Prepare the inspection area as follows:
(a) Remove the access panels that follow (Refer to Part 1, 51−01−04):
(b) Remove the top step panel 832ET (lift this panel to get access to the door
hinge and door structure) (Refer to AMM Task 52−11−04−000−801)
(c) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the part unless it shows
deterioration or local damage.
(d) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the
finish (Refer to the SRM, chapter 51).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Passenger Door Piano−Hinge Half on the Fuselage Side
Refer to the area shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the passenger door hinge pin (2) for damage or corrosion.
NOTE: It is not necessary to fully remove the hinge pin (2) from the hinge. Pull the
pin out halfway on each side.
If necessary, support the door while you examine the hinge pin (2).
(2) Examine the passenger door hinge half for cracks or damage to the lugs.
(3) Examine the passenger door hinge with the door in the open position and in the
closed position.
LEGEND
1. Half hinge.
2. Hinge pin.
A
NOTE
Shaded area is
to be inspected.
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the components that follow for cracks,
corrosion and other damage:
− The ADF antenna cut−out at FS409+74 and STGR0 (BL0.00).
− The two DME antennas cut−outs at FS409+55, between STGR25 and STGR26,
at LBL9.00 and RBL9.00 respectively.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1− General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection areas are in Zone 260 for the ADF antenna and Zones 140 for the two
DME antennas (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the inspection area for the ADF antenna cut−out is by the external top
skin panel at FS409.00+74 and STGR0.
NOTE: It is necessary to remove the ADF antenna at FS409.00+74 to inspect its
cut−out.
(2) Access to the inspection area for each DME antenna cut−out is by the external
bottom skin panel at FS409.00+55, between STGR25 and STGR26, at LBL9.00 and
RBL9.00 respectively.
NOTE: It is necessary to remove the two DME antennas at FS409.00+55 to
inspect their cut−outs.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
A. Procedure
(1) Remove the ADF antenna at FS409.00+74 and the two DME antennas at
FS409.00+55 (Refer to the AMM, Chapter 34).
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(2) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00),
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless it shows
deterioration or local damage.
(3) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, chapter 51).
A. Inspection Procedure
NOTE: If the surfaces of any component are painted, look at the paint condition (for
signs of cracks and corrosion) in the component material.
(1) At FS409.00+74 and STGR0 (BL0.00), do the inspection that follows:
(a) Examine the external surface of the top skin panel 4.00 in. (102.00 mm) around
the antenna cut−out for cracks or corrosion. Pay attention to fastener holes.
(b) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent,
corroded, or other unserviceable condition.
NOTES A
ADF antenna removed for clarity.
TOP FS 409.00+64
SKIN PANEL STR 1L
1
STR 0
(BL 0.00)
FS 409.00+74
STR 1R
4.00 in.
(102.00 mm)
ALL AROUND
FS 409.00+80
A. Inspection Procedure
NOTE: If the surfaces of any component are painted, look at the paint condition (for
signs of cracks and corrosion) in the component material.
(1) At FS409.00+55 and at LBL9.00, between STGR25L and STGR26L, do the
inspection that follows:
(a) Examine the external surface of the bottom skin panel 4.00 inches (102.00 mm)
around the antenna cut−outs for cracks or corrosion. Pay attention to fastener
holes.
(b) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent,
corroded, or other unserviceable condition.
8. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Install the ADF antenna at FS409.00+74 (Refer to the AMM, Chapter 34).
C. Install the two DME antennas at FS409.00+55 (Refer to the AMM, Chapter 34).
D. Remove all tools, equipment and unwanted materials from the work area.
NOTES
LBL 9.00 is shown.
RBL 9.00 is similar.
DME antenna removed
for clarity. A
Examine the shaded area.
4.00 in.
STR 26L FS 409.00+48
(102.00 mm)
ALL AROUND
BOTTOM
SKIN PANEL
2
FS 409.00+55
ANTENNA
CUT−OUT
LBL 9.00
A
VIEW LOOKING UP
Inspection of the DME Antenna Cut−Outs at FS409.00+55, Between STGR25L and STGR26L
Figure 2
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the fuselage skin between FS409.00+112
and FS409.00+128 and STGR13 and STGR14 around the emergency light cut−out
for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zones 251 and 252 (refer to NDTM Part 1 General, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the inspection area is by the external fuselage.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(1) Clean the inspection area (Refer to SRM 51−26−00).
(2) Is is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless they show deterioration
or local damage.
NOTE: If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove
the finish (Refer to the SRM, Chapter 51).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Fuselage Skin at the Emergency Landing Light Cut−Out
between FS409.00+112 and FS409.00+128, STGR13 and STGR14
A. Inspection Procedure
Refer to Figure 1.
NOTE: If the surfaces of the skin are painted, look at the paint condition (for signs of
cracks and corrosion).
(1) Examine the fuselage skin over an area of 4.00 in. (102.00 mm) around the cut−out
for the emergency landing light, for cracks, corrosion or other damage.
(2) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, corroded, or other unserviceable
condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
NOTES
1. Examine the shaded area.
2. Left side shown, right side
is almost the same.
4.00 in.
(102.00 mm)
FS409.00+128
FS409.00+112
STGR 14
Inspection of the Emergency Landing Light Cut−Out between FS409.00+112 and FS409.128,
between STGR13 and STGR14
Figure 1
INSPECTION OF THE FORWARD AND AFT KEEL−BEAM LUGS AND THE FORWARD
KEEL−BEAM LINK−LUGS
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the structural components that follow for
cracks, corrosion, and other damage:
− Forward keel−beam bayonet−fitting lugs at FS409.00+114.65
− Forward keel−beam link−lugs at FS409.00+114.65 and FS409.00+128.00
− Aft keel−beam lugs at FS513.00.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 160 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the external side of the fuselage and through the MLG bay.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft for the forward keel−beam bayonet−fitting lugs and the forward keel−beam
link−lugs inspection.
B. All aircraft pre Modsum TC601R25147 for the aft keel−beam lugs inspection.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 1
53−41−104 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(3) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(4) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(5) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
A. Inspection Procedure
Refer to Figure 1.
(1) Examine the lugs of the forward keel−beam bayonet fittings (1) at FS409.00+114.65
and the local support structure for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
(2) Examine the lugs of the forward keel−beam links (2) at FS409.00+114.65 and
FS409.00+128.00 and the local support structure for cracks, corrosion, and other
damage.
(3) Examine the lugs of the aft keel−beam (3) at 513.00 and the local support structure
for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
C. Record and report results in accordance with company guidelines and policies.
D. For indications that exceed the allowable limits, it is recommended that you contact
MHIRJ Customer Support (refer to SRM TASK 51−13−01).
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the main landing gear wheel bins (refer to AMM TASK 53−83−01−400−801).
D. Install the forward−fairing access panel (refer to AMM TASK 53−82−01−400−801).
E. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
1 FS409.00 +112
2
NOTES
1. Pressure box omitted
for clarity.
2. Examine the shaded area.
FS409.00+128
A
FRONT SPAR
(REF)
REAR SPAR
(REF)
FS513.00
rnd5341104_001.dg, gb/lr, oct15/2008
Inspection of the Forward Keel−Beam Bayonet−Fittings, Forward Keel−Beam Links, and Aft
Keel−Beam Lugs
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 4
53−41−104 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the external and internal
surface of the top skin panel at FS455.80 and STGR0 (BL0.00) around the VHF No. 3
antenna for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zone 260 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the external fuselage surface and through the passenger compartment.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft with the VHF No. 3 antenna installed.
5. Inspection for Damage to the VHF Antenna Cut−Out at FS455.80 and STGR0
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the external and internal surface of the top skin panel (1) 4.00 in. (102.00
mm) around the VHF antenna at FS455.80 and STGR0 (BL0.00) for cracks,
corrosion, and other damage.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801 and/or AMM TASK
25−81−02−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the close out area.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−41−107 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
E. Install the main passenger cabin ceiling−panel in the area (refer to AMM TASK
25−26−07−400−801 or TASK 25−26−07−400−802 or TASK 25−26−07−400−803
F. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
NOTES
1 Examine the shaded area.
2 Examine the inner and outer skin.
A
LEGEND
1. Top skin panel.
FS 461.50
STGR 0
A
VIEW LOOKING DOWN
Inspection of the VHF No. 3 Antenna Cut−Out at FS455.80 and STGR0 (BL0.00)
Figure 1
INSPECTION OF THE SKIN AT STGR5 AND FRAMES FS424.00, FS449.00, FS473.00, AND
FS513.00
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the external surface of the top
skin panel at the machined frames from FS409.00+128.00 to FS559.00 and from
STGR5L to STGR5R.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is in Zones 263 and 264 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the fuselage external surface.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(2) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(3) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(4) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection for Damage to the External Surface of the Top Skin Panel From FS409.00+128.00
to FS559.00 and from STGR5L to STGR5R
Refer to Figure 1 and Figure 2.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the external surface of the top skin panel (1) 4.0 in. (101.6 mm) forward and
aft of the machined frames at FS424.00, FS449.85, FS473.15, and FS513.00
between STGR5L and STGR5R, and that includes the area above STGR6L and
STGR6R for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to the SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
NOTES
1 Examine the shaded area. LEGEND
2. Left side shown, right side 1. Skin panel.
is almost the same.
1
1
STA 1 STA
409.00 STA STA
424.00 449.85 473.15
+128.00
STGR 0
STGR 1
STGR 2
STGR 3
STGR 4
STGR 5
STGR 6
4.0 in. 4.0 in. 4.0 in.
(101.6mm) (101.6mm) (101.6mm)
rnd5341108_001.dg, rb, 27jan2009
Inspection of the External Surface of the Top Skin Panel at the Machined Frames From
FS409.00+128.00 to FS559.00 and From STGR6L to STGR6R.
Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 3
53−41−108 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
STA
409.00 STA
+128.00 559.00
B
NOTES
LEGEND 1 Examine the shaded area.
1. Skin panel.
2. Left side shown, right side
is almost the same. 1
STA 1 STA
513.00 559.00
STGR 0
STGR 1
STGR 2
STGR 3
STGR 4
STGR 5
STGR 6
4.0 in.
rnd5341108_002.dg, rb, 27jan2009
(101.6mm)
B
VIEW LOOKING INBOARD
Inspection of the External Surface of the Top Skin Panel at the Machined Frames From
FS409.00+128.00 to FS559.00 and From STGR6L to STGR6R.
Figure 2
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 4
53−41−108 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the external surface of the side
skin panels at the machined frames from FS409.00+128.00 to FS559.00 and from
STGR6 to STGR17.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is in Zones 261 and 262 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the fuselage external surface.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(2) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(3) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(4) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection for Damage to the External Surface of the Side Skin Panels From FS409.00+128.00
to FS559.00 and from STGR6 to STGR17
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the external surface of the side skin panel (1) 4.0 in. (101.6 mm) forward
and aft of the machined frames at FS424.00, FS449.85, FS473.15, and FS513.00
between STGR6 and STGR17 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage. Make sure
you carefully examine these areas:
− the final two 3/16 in (4.76 mm) diameter rivet holes in STGR13 at each frame
location.
− 6.0 in. (152.4 mm) forward and aft of each machined frames of the side (1) and
the top (2) skin panels below STGR5 to above STGR7.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to the SRM TASK
51−21−16).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−41−111 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
NOTES
1 4.0 in. (101.6 mm)
LEGEND
1. Skin panel. 2 Examine the shaded area.
2. Skin panel.
3. Left side shown, right side
is almost the same.
FS409.00 4 6.0 in. (152.4 mm)
+128.00
4 4
4 4 1
2 2 2 FS559.00
STGR5
STGR6
STGR7
STGR8
STGR9
STGR10
STGR11
STGR12
STGR13
STGR14
STGR15
STGR16
STGR17
1 1 1
1
rnd5341111_001.dg, lr, feb23/2009
1 1 1
UP
1
FWD
FS424.00 FS449.85 FS473.15 FS513.00
A
VIEW LOOKING INBOARD AT LEFT SKIN
Inspection of the External Surface of the Side Skin Panels at the Machined Frames From
FS409.00+128.00 to FS559.00 and From STGR5 to STGR17.
Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 4
53−41−111 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the external and internal
surfaces of the side skin panels around the emergency light cut−outs at FS416.50
and FS491.50, between STGR13 and STGR14 for cracks, corrosion, and other
damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same unless specified.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is in Zones 261 and 262 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the external fuselage surface and through the passenger compartment.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
− Inspection mirror.
5. Inspection for Damage to the Side Skin Panels at FS416.50 and FS491.50, between STGR13
and STGR14
Refer to Figure 1 and Figure 2.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the external and internal surfaces of the side skin panel (1) 5.00 in. (127.00
mm) around the emergency light cut−outs at FS416.50 and FS491.50 between
STGR13 and STGR14 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−41−112 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
A
NOTE
Left side shown.
Right side almost the same.
LEGEND
1. Skin panel. 1 5.00 in.
(127.00 mm)
EMERGENCY
LIGHT CUT−OUT
(REF)
NOTE B
Left side shown.
Right side almost the same.
LEGEND
1. Skin panel.
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
STR 12 WINDOW CUT−OUT
(REF)
FS 491.50
STR 13
WL 95.8
STR 14
EMERGENCY
LIGHT CUT−OUT
5.00 in. EXAMINE THE (REF)
(127.00 mm) SHADED AREA
rnd5341112_002.dg, jp/rb, 13oct2008
STR 15
B
VIEW LOOKING
FS 484.00 FS 499.00
INBOARD
Inspection of the Side Skin Panel at FS491.50, between STGR13 and STGR14.
Figure 2
AWL 53−41−116
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the forward side of the pressure bulkhead
web and the related structure below floor level at FS409.00+128 for cracks,
corrosion and other damage.
(2) This inspection is also used to visually examine the pressure bulkhead web. forward
and aft side, and the related structure below the floor level at FS559.00 for cracks,
corrosion and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
2. Effectivity
A. All Aircraft.
A. Procedure
(1) Open the main avionic−compartment door 811 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
(2) Remove the necessary floor panels that follow (Refer to AMM TASK
53−01−01−000−802):
(4) Remove or lift the insulation as necessary to get to the inspection area (refer to AMM
TASK 25−81−02−000−801).
(5) Identify the locations to be examined (refer to Figure 1 and Figure 2).
(6) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(7) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(8) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Vertical Beams of the Pressure Bulkhead Webs at
FS409.00+128 and FS559.00
Refer to the areas shaded in Figure 1 and Figure 2.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Do the inspection that follows at FS409.00+128 below the floor level:
Inspect the entire bulkhead web of FS409.00+128 below the floor level at WL 69.00
for cracks, corrosion, and other damage. Pay particular attention to the vertical row
of fasteners on the vertical beams at BL0.00, LBL/RBL9.00, LBL/RBL18.00,
LBL/RBL27.00 and LBL/RBL36.00.
(2) Do the inspection that follows at FS559.00 below the floor level:
Inspect the entire bulkhead web of FS559.00 below the floor level at WL 69.00 for
cracks, corrosion, and other damage. Pay particular attention to the vertical row of
fasteners on the vertical beams at BL0.00, LBL/RBL9.00, LBL/RBL18.00,
LBL/RBL27.00 and LBL/RBL36.00.
(3) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801 and/or AMM TASK
25−81−02−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the close out area.
E. Install the floor panels that follow (Refer to AMM TASK 53−01−01−400−802):
F. Close the main avionic−compartment door 811 (refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
G. Install the MLG wheel well bins (refer to AMM TASK 53−83−01−400−801).
H. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
NOTE
1 Examine the shaded area.
2.00 in.
(50.80 mm)
RBL 36.00
RBL 27.00
RBL 18.00
RBL 9.00
BL 0.00 VERTICAL
BEAM
FUSELAGE LBL 9.00 2
SKIN
4 LBL 18.00
LBL 27.00
LBL 36.00
VERTICAL BEAM
2
REINFORCING
PLATE
5
rnd5341116_001.dg, ab/as, 06/06/01
BULKHEAD WEB
3 1
FRAME
1
VIEW LOOKING AFT
AT FS409.00 + 128
Inspection of the Vertical Beams of the Pressure Bulkhead Web at FS409.00+128 − Below Floor
Level
Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 5
53−41−116 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
RBL 36.00
RBL 27.00
RBL 18.00
RBL 9.00
BL 0.00
FUSELAGE
LBL 9.00 SKIN
LBL 18.00 4
VERTICAL
BEAM LBL 27.00
2
LBL 36.00
BULKHEAD WEB
3
1
VERTICAL BEAM
2
FRAME
1
rnd5341116_002.dg, as, 06/06/01
VERTICAL
BEAM
2
NOTE
1 Examine the shaded area.
RBL 36.00
RBL 27.00
RBL 18.00
RBL 9.00
BL 0.00
LBL 9.00
LBL 18.00
LBL 27.00
LBL 36.00
Inspection of the Vertical Beams of the Bulkhead Web at FS559.00 − Below Floor Level
Figure 2 (Sheet 2)
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the components that follow for cracks,
corrosion, and other damage:
− Forward side of the bulkhead web and the related structure below floor level at
FS409.00+128
− Bulkhead web and the related structure below floor level at FS559.00.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1, General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The areas of inspection are in Zones 151, 152, 163, 164, 171, and 172 (refer to
NDTM Part 1 General, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the bulkhead area at FS409.00+128 is by the main avionics compartment,
and through the interior of the passenger compartment floors.
(2) Access to the bulkhead at FS559.00 is through the interior of the passenger
compartment floors and by the MLG wheel well.
2. Effectivity
A. All Aircraft.
(3) Remove or lift the insulation as necessary to get to the inspection area (refer to AMM
TASK 25−81−02−000−801).
(4) Identify the locations to be examined (refer to Figure 1).
(5) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(6) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(7) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
B. Prepare the inspection area for the bulkhead at FS559.00 as follows:
(1) Remove the necessary floor panels that follow (Refer to AMM task
53−01−01−000−802):
(2) Remove the MLG wheel bins (Refer to AMM task 53−83−01−000−801).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 3
53−41−124 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
(3) Remove or lift the insulation as necessary to get to the inspection area (refer to AMM
TASK 25−81−02−000−801).
(4) Identify the locations to be examined (refer to Figure 2).
(5) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(6) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(7) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Bulkhead Web and the Related Structure at FS409.00+128
Refer to the area shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Do the inspection that follows at FS409.00+128 below floor level:
(a) Inspect the entire bulkhead web of FS409.00+128. Pay particular attention to
the web local to the vertical beams, the fuselage skin, the pressure floor
attachments, and the edges of the chem−milled pockets of the web for cracks,
corrosion, and other damage.
(b) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
6. Inspection for Damage to the Bulkhead Web and the Related Structure at FS559.00
Refer to the areas shaded in Figure 2.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Do the inspection that follows at FS559.00 below the floor:
(a) Inspect the entire bulkhead web of FS559.00. Pay particular attention to the
web local to the stiffeners, the channels, the fuselage skin, the pressure floor
attachments, and the edges of the chem−milled pockets of the web for cracks,
corrosion, and other damage.
(b) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
8. Close Out
A. Close out the bulkhead at FS409.00+128 as follows:
(1) If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to TASK
51−21−16).
(2) Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
(3) Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801 and/or AMM TASK
25−81−02−400−801).
(4) Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the close out area.
(a) Install the floor panels that follow (Refer to AMM task 53−01−01−400−802):
(5) Close the main avionic−compartment door 811 (refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
(6) Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
B. Close out the bulkhead at FS559.00 as follows:
(1) If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to TASK
51−21−16).
(2) Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
(3) Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801 and/or AMM TASK
25−81−02−400−801).
(4) Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the close out area.
(5) Install the floor panels that follow (Refer to AMM task 53−01−01−400−802):
(6) Install the MLG wheel bin (Refer to AMM task 53−83−01−400−801).
(7) Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
NOTE
Examine the shaded area.
LEGEND
1. Frame angle.
2. Angle.
3. Angle.
4. Reinforcing angle.
5. Bulkhead web.
6. Stiffener.
RBL36.00 7. Fuselage skin.
RBL27.00
RBL18.00
RBL9.00
BL0.00
7
LBL9.00
4
LBL18.00
LBL27.00
LBL36.00
3
rnd5341118_001.dg, jp/lr, 10/01/05
2
1
NOTE
Examine the shaded area.
LEGEND RBL36.00
1. Fuselage skin. RBL27.00
2. Channel.
3. Bulkhead web. RBL18.00 6
4. Stiffener.
5. Frame segment. RBL9.00 2
6. Post.
BL0.00
1
LBL9.00
LBL18.00 2
LBL27.00
LBL36.00
NOTE
Examine the shaded area.
RBL36.00
LEGEND
RBL27.00 3. Bulkhead web.
7. Angle.
RBL18.00 8. Stiffener.
9. Reinforcing angle.
RBL9.00
BL0.00
LBL9.00
LBL18.00
LBL27.00
LBL36.00
8
7
rnd5341124_002.dg, jp/lr, 11/01/05
8
9
OVER WING EMERGENCY EXIT, DOOR CUT−OUT, FRAMES AND INTERNAL BACK−UP
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the door cut−out frames and
the internal backup structure of the overwing emergency exit for cracks, corrosion,
and other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection areas are found in Zones 261 and 262 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is through the passenger cabin and by the external side of the fuselage.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
5. Inspection for Damage to the Door Cut−Out Frames and the Internal Backup Structure of the
Overwing Emergency Exit
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the areas that follow for cracks, corrosion, and other damage:
(a) External surface of the fuselage skin (1) over a width of 4.0 in. (101.4 mm)
around the perimeter of the emergency exit door cut−out
(b) Machined frames at FS449.85 (2) and FS473.15 (3), and the inner doubler (4)
between STGR6 and STGR15
(c) Top sill support structure of the emergency exit door between FS439.00 and
FS484.00, at STGR6, STGR7, and STGR 8:
− frame segment (5)
− intercostals (6)
− gusset plates (7) and (8)
− straps (9)
− tee fittings (10)
− angle (11).
(d) Bottom sill support structure of the emergency exit door between FS439.00 and
FS484.00, at STGR15:
− gusset plates (8)
− sill (12)
− attachment angles (13).
(e) Six emergency door stop fittings (14) and the adjacent support structure from
FS439.00 to FS484.00, between STGR9 and STGR10, between STGR11 and
STGR12, and between STGR13 and STGR14:
− intercostals (6)
− gusset plates (7).
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801).
D. Install the overwing emergency exit (refer to AMM TASK 52−21−00−400−801).
E. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
NOTE
1. Left side shown, right side
almost the same.
A
FS484.00
FS473.15
6 STGR6
FS461.50 7
6
FS449.85
FS473.15
FS439.00 6 STGR8
13 4
6
6
7 9
6 7
7 3 6
2
9 7
13
B 7 6
7
rnd5341125_003.dg, lr/kmw, dec15/2009
8 12
FS461.50
Inspection of the Door Cut−Out Frames and the Internal Backup Structure of the Overwing
Emergency Exit
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 5
53−41−125 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
STGR8
NOTE
Left side shown, right side
almost the same.
14
(6 PLACES) STGR15
FS473.15
8
FS449.85 8
6
9
STGR6
10
rnd5341125_004.dg, lr/kmw, dec16/2009
8
11
6
10
6
STGR8
Inspection of the Door Cut−Out Frames and the Internal Backup Structure of the Overwing
Emergency Exit
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 6
53−41−125 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the wing attachment lugs for cracks,
corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: This inspection procedure is for the components on the left side of the
aircraft. The inspection procedure for the components on the right side is
similar.
B. Reference Information
(1) For additional data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is in Zones 161 and 162 (refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the external side of the fuselage.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
− Inspection mirror
− Borescope, if required.
A. Inspection Procedure
NOTE: If the surfaces of any components are painted, look at the paint condition (for
signs of cracks and corrosion) in the component material.
(1) Examine the wing attachment lugs for cracks, corrosion and other damage.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the forward side fairings 161DL and 162DL (refer to AMM TASK
53−82−01−400−805).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−41−133 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
D. Install the wing−to−fuselage side panels 161CL and 162CL (refer to AMM TASK
53−82−01−400−804).
E. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
FS424.00
A NOTES
1. Left attachment lug shown,
the right lug is similar.
2. Examine the shaded area.
WL73.00
1
rnd5341133_001.dg, lr, jul23/2008
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the frame inner flange at
FS449.85 and between STGR8 and STGR11 for cracks, corrosion, and other
damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 261 and 262 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is through the passenger compartment.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
− Inspection mirror.
5. Inspection for Damage to the Frame Inner Flange at FS449.85 and between STGR8 and
STGR11
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the frame (1) inner flange at FS449.85 between STGR8 and STGR11 for
cracks, corrosion, and other damage. Make sure you carefully examine the fillet radii
of the frame inner flange.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−41−134 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
A
FS449.85
LEGEND
1. Frame sector.
NOTES
1 Examine the shaded area.
STGR8
1
1
B 1
STGR11
FRAME
DATUM
rnd5341134_001.dg, lr, feb19/2009
B B
WL73.00
A
Inspection of the Frame Inner Flange at FS449.85 and between STGR8 and STGR11.
Figure 1
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the wing attachment lugs at FS473.15
(2) This inspection applies to the left and right side of the aircraft. The inspection of the
left side only is given.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zones 161 and 162 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the area is by removal of the center side access fairing in Zone 161 and
162 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
2. Effectivity
A. All Aircraft.
A. Procedure
(1) Remove the center side access fairings to get access to the wing attachment lugs at
FS473.15 (Refer to AMM TASK 53−82−01−000−806).
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(2) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless it shows
deterioration or local damage.
(3) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, chapter 51).
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Do the inspection that follows at FS473.15 below the floor (WL73.50):
(a) Carefully examine the wing−to−fuselage attachment lug for cracks and
corrosion.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Install the center side fairings (Refer to AMM TASK 53−82−01−400−806).
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
FS473.15
A NOTES
1. Left attachment lug shown,
the right lug is similar.
2. Examine the shaded area.
WL73.00
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the frames above floor at
FS424.00, FS473.15, and FS513.00 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 261 thru 264 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is through the passenger compartment.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
− Light source
− Inspection mirror.
5. Inspection for Damage to the Frames at FS424.00, FS473.15, and FS513.00, above WL73.00
Refer to Figure 1, Figure 2, and Figure 3.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the webs, inner and outer flanges of the frames (1), (2), and (3) above
WL73.00 at FS424.00, FS473.15, and FS513.00 for cracks, corrosion, and other
damage. Make sure you carefully examine the frame spice locations at STGR0, and
FS513.00 between WL73.00 and STGR15.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−41−139 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−02−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
FS424.00
1
B
WL73.00
LEGEND
rnd5341139_001.dg, lr, nov11/2008
NOTE
B B 1 Examine the shaded area.
C
FS473.15
D
2
WL73.00
LEGEND
rnd5341139_002.dg, lr, nov12/2008
NOTE
D D
1 Examine the shaded area.
FS513.00
WL73.00
E
1
LEGEND
rnd5341139_003.dg, lr, nov11/2008
NOTE
1 Examine the shaded area.
F F
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the wing−to−fuselage attachment fitting
(lug fitting) and the related components that are attached to the lateral beam at
BL13.10 and FS513.00, also the lower−cap horizontal surfaces of the lateral beam.
(2) A check for proper torque is also done for the components that attach the lug fitting
to the main landing gear (MLG) side brace fittings at BL13.10.
(3) This inspection applies to the left and right side of the aircraft. The inspection of the
left side only is given.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zones 510 and 610 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the area is by removal of the MLG wheel bins in Zone 163 and 164 (Refer
to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
2. Effectivity
A. All Aircraft.
5. Inspection for Damage to the Wing to Fuselage Attachment Fittings (Lug Fittings) at FS513.00
and BL13.10
Refer to the area shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Do the inspection that follows at FS513.00 below the pressure floor (WL 69) between
LBL9.00 and LBL18.00:
(a) Carefully examine the lug fitting and its related components that are attached to
the lateral beam lower−cap at BL13.10 and FS513.00 for cracks and corrosion.
(b) Carefully examine the upper and the lower horizontal surfaces of the lateral
beam lower−cap on FS513.00 from LBL9.00 to LBL18.00 for cracks and
corrosion.
(c) Locally inspect around the lug fitting and the lateral beam lower−cap mating
surfaces. Make sure that there is not a gap between these components.
NOTE: Use the applicable borescope probe to examine the components if
required.
If the surfaces of any component are painted, look at the paint
condition (for signs of cracks and corrosion) in the component
material.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−41−142 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
(d) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
(e) Remove the cotter pin (P/N MS24665−377) from the bolt in the lug fitting (Refer
to Figure 1, View B−B).
(f) Do a check for proper torque of the lug bolt at the lug fitting that attaches the
lateral beam lower−cap at BL13.10 and FS513.00 to the MLG side brace fitting
as follows:
1 Torque the nut to 1200 lbf·in (135 N·m) and install a new cotter pin. If the
cotter pin cannot be installed, do the steps that follow:
a Continue to torque the nut to a maximum of 1500 lbf·in (170 N·m) until
the cotter pin can be installed.
2 If the cotter pin cannot be installed, do the steps that follow:
a Remove the nut from the bolt.
b Add or remove washers as necessary.
NOTE: It is permissible to use a combination of solid and laminated
washers as required. The maximum number of washers
allowed together is three. A laminated washer must be
installed between two solid washers.
c Install a new nut (P/N MS9363−19) on to the bolt.
(g) Do all of the torque check again as in the above steps until the cotter pin can
be installed.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Install the MLG wheel bins (Refer to AMM TASK 53−83−01−400−801).
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
NOTES
Examine the shaded area.
The left side of the aircraft is shown.
The right side is similar.
A
LBL 18.00 LBL 13.10 LBL 9.00
FS 513.00
B
WL 69.00
MLG LATERAL
SIDE BRACE BEAM
FITTING 1
(REF)
LATERAL
BEAM
1
LUG
WL 61.00
FITTING
2
LUG
B − B FITTING
B 2
VIEW LOOKING
INBOARD WL 57.25
rnd5341142_001.dg, rm/ik, 15/08/01
A
VIEW LOOKING FORWARD
ON WING−BOX REAR SPAR
Inspection of the Wing to Fuselage Attachment Fittings at FS513.00 and BL13.10
Figure 1
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the internal side of the pressure floor skin
between FS409.00+128 and FS559.00 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1 General
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 163 (refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is through the passenger compartment.
2. Effectivity
A. A/C 7002−8079
A. Procedure
(1) Identify the locations to be inspected.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 1
53−41−149 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
(2) Remove the passenger compartment floor panels 261ALF, 261CLF, 261DLF, 262CRF,
and 262DRF (refer to AMM TASK 53−01−01−000−802).
(3) Remove the pressure box assembly (refer to AMM TASK 28−20−01−000−807).
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(4) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(5) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(6) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Inspect the pressure floor skin between FS409.00+128 and FS559.00 for cracks and
corrosion. Pay particular attention to the skin local to the floor beams, and also the
edges of the chem−milled pockets.
(2) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the pressure box assembly (refer to AMM TASK 28−20−01−400−807).
D. Install the passenger compartment floor panels 261ALF, 261CLF, 261DLF, 262CRF, and
262DRF (refer to AMM TASK 53−01−01−400−802).
E. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
FS559.00
FS409.00
+128.00
FLOOR STRUCTURE
(REF)
NOTE
1 Examine the shaded area.
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the pressure floor structure (floor support
beams) and local skin between FS409.00+128 and FS559.00, at BL0.00,
LBL/RBL9.00, LBL/RBL18.00, LBL/RBL27.00 and LBL/RBL36.00 for cracks, corrosion
and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1 General information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 160 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) The access to the pressure floor structure is by removing the applicable
passenger−compartment floor panels.
2. Effectivity
A. All Aircraft.
A. Procedure
(1) Remove the applicable passenger−compartment floor panels (Refer to AMM TASK
53−01−01−000−802).
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(2) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless they show
deterioration or local damage.
(3) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, chapter 51).
5. Inspection of the Pressure−Floor Support Beams and Local Skin Between FS409.00+128 and
FS559.00
Refer to the area shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Do the inspection between FS409.00+128 and FS559.00 as follows:
(a) Inspect the flanges and webs of the floor support beams at BL0.00,
LBL/RBL9.00, LBL/RBL18.00, LBL/RBL27.00 and LBL/RBL36.00, between
FS409.00+128 and FS559.00, and the local pressure floor skin for cracks and
corrosion. Pay particular attention to the fastener holes along the upper and
lower flanges of the floor support beams. Pay also attention to the lightening
holes.
(b) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Install all of the passenger−compartment floor panels that were removed (Refer to AMM
TASK 53−01−01−400−802).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−41−150 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
RBL36.00 RBL18.00
FS559.00 BL0.00
RBL27.00 LBL18.00
RBL9.00
LBL9.00
LBL27.00
LBL36.00
FS409.00
+128.00
B
LBL9.00
A
2 NOTE
PRESSURE FLOOR SKIN 1 Examine the shaded area.
Inspection of the Pressure−Floor Support Beams and Local Skin Between FS409.00+128 and
FS559.00
Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 4
53−41−150 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the chemically milled (chem−mill) lines of
the sill assembly from FS409.00+128 to FS559.00 between BL36.00 and BL45.00.
The inspection also includes an examination of the webs of the pressure bulkheads
below WL73.00 at FS409.00+128 and FS559.00.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1 General
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The areas of inspection are in Zones 161, 162, 261, and 262 (Refer to NDTM Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the exterior fuselage to wing fairings, through the MLG wheel wells,and
through the floor panels of the passenger compartment.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 1
53−41−155 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
A. Procedure
(1) Remove the access panels that follow:
(2) If required,remove the floor panels that follow (Refer to AMM TASK
53−01−01−000−802):
ACCESS DESIGNATION
251CLF
252CRF
Floor panels
261DLF
262DRF
(3) Remove the MLG wheel bins (Refer to AMM TASK 53−83−01−000−801).
(4) Identify the locations to be inspected (refer to Figure 1).
(5) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(6) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(7) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection of the Floor Sill Assembly, Aft Face of the Bulkhead at FS409.00+128, and Forward
Face of the Bulkhead at FS559.00
Refer to the areas shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Carefully examine the floor structure sill assembly from FS409.00+128 to FS559.00
between BL36.00 and BL45.00 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: Pay particular attention to the chem−mill edges of the floor structure sill
assembly.
(2) Carefully examine the forward face of the pressure bulkhead web at FS559.00 for
cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
(3) Carefully examine the aft face of the pressure bulkhead web at FS409.00+128 for
cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
(4) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
6. Acceptance or Rejection Criteria
A. All signs of corrosion or cracks are cause for rejection.
B. All signs of damaged fasteners are cause for rejection.
C. Record and report results in accordance with company guidelines and policies.
D. For indications that exceed the allowable limits, it is recommended that you contact
MHIRJ Customer Support (refer to SRM 51−13−01).
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the floor panels that follow (Refer to AMM TASK 53−01−01−400−802):
FS559.00
NOTES
Examine the shaded
FS409.00 area.
LBL36.00 LBL45.00
+128 Aircraft skin not shown
for clarity.
LEGEND
1. Left sill assembly
floor panel.
2. Bulkhead web
FS409.00 + 128.
3. Bulkhead web
FS559.00.
rnd5341155_001.dg, rm, 10/04/06
Inspection of the Floor Structure Sill Assembly, the Aft Face of the Forward Pressure Bulkhead at
FS409.00+128, and the Forward Face of the Aft Pressure Bulkhead at FS559.00
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 5
53−41−155 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
LEGEND NOTES
1. Left sill assembly Examine the shaded
floor panel. area.
Aircraft skin not shown
CHEM MILL
for clarity.
FS409.00 LINE (REF)
+128 FS424.00 FS439.00 FS449.85
LBL
36.00
LBL
45.00
LBL
47.00
CHEM MILL
FS461.50 FS473.15 FS484.00 FS499.00 LINE (REF)
LBL
36.00
LBL
45.00
LBL
47.00
FS516.85 FS544.00
FS513.00 FS529.00 FS540.25 FS559.00
LBL
36.00
LBL
45.00
rnd5341155_001.dg, rm, 11/04/06
LBL
47.00
FS522.40 FS533.45 FS549.00
CHEM MILL FS554.00
LINE (REF)
Inspection of the Floor Structure Sill Assembly, the Aft Face of the Forward Pressure Bulkhead at
FS409.00+128, and the Forward Face of the Aft Pressure Bulkhead at FS559.00
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 6
53−41−155 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the intercostals, channels, and
adjacent structure between FS409.00+128 and FS559.00, and from BL36.00 to
BL45.00 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zone 165 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is through the main−landing gear (MLG) bay and by the external side of the
fuselage.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
− Light source
− Inspection mirror
− Borescope, if required.
5. Inspection for Damage to the Intercostals, Channels, and Adjacent Structure between
FS409.00+128 and FS559.00, and from BL36.00 to BL45.00
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the intercostals (1) and channels (2), and the adjacent structure attached to
the pressure floor skin at WL69.00, floor panel at WL73.00, floor beam at BL36.00,
and underfloor longeron at BL45.00, from FS409.00+128 to FS559.00 for cracks,
corrosion, and other damage. Make sure you carefully examine the structure at
FS424.00, FS473.00, and FS544.00.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the rear side fairings 161FL and 162FL (refer to AMM TASK 53−82−01−400−807).
D. Install the center side fairings 161EL and 162EL (refer to AMM TASK
53−82−01−400−806).
E. Install the forward side fairings 161DL and 162DL (refer to AMM TASK
53−82−01−400−805).
F. Install the right forward wing−to−fuselage fairing (refer to AMM TASK
53−82−01−400−802).
G. Install the left forward wing−to−fuselage fairing (refer to AMM TASK
53−82−01−400−803).
H. Install the MLG wheel bins (refer to AMM TASK 53−83−01−400−801).
I. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
FS559.00
A
FS409.00 B
+128
A
FS559.00
LBL36.00
FS544.00
FS513.00
FS499.00
FS484.00
FS473.15
FS409.00 FS461.50
+128 FS449.85
FS439.00 B 1
FS424.00
BL36.00 BL47.00
rnd5341156_002.dg, gw, may12/2009
NOTES
1 Left side is shown,
right side is almost the same.
Inspection of the Intercostals, Channels, and Adjacent Structure between FS409.00+128 and
FS559.00, and from BL36.00 to BL45.00
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 4
53−41−156 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
BL
FLOOR PANEL
45.00
(REF)
BL
36.00
WL73.00 1
FLOOR
BEAM
LONGERON (REF)
(REF)
WL69.00
M/C PRESSURE
BRACKET FLOOR SKIN
(REF) (REF)
DE−ICING
(REF)
LEGEND
1. Intercostal.
2. Channel.
BL BL BL
47.00 45.00 36.00
WL73.00
FLOOR
BEAM
(REF)
WL69.00
LONGERON NOTES
(REF)
1. Examine the shaded area.
2 2. Left side shown, right side almost
rnd5341156_003.dg, gw, may12/2009
the same.
FS427.00 shown, typical for all
inspection areas between FS409.00+128
and FS513.00.
Inspection of the Intercostals, Channels, and Adjacent Structure between FS409.00+128 and
FS559.00, and from BL36.00 to BL45.00
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 5
53−41−156 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the frame−to−longeron cleats
at WL73.00 of FS439.00, FS461.50, FS484.00, FS499.00, FS529.00, and FS544.00
for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zone 165 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is through the passenger compartment.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
− Light source
− Inspection mirror.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the frame−to−longeron cleats (1) at WL73.00 of FS439.00, FS461.50,
FS484.00, FS499.00, FS529.00, and FS544.00 for for cracks, corrosion, and other
damage. Make sure you carefully examine the fillet radii of the cleats.
(2) Examine 2.0 in. (50.80 mm) of the floor angle (2) around the edges of the
frame−to−longeron cleats (1) at WL73.00 of FS439.00, FS461.50, FS484.00,
FS499.00, FS529.00, and FS544.00 for for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
(3) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−41−157 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−02−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
FS439.00 FS544.00
(REF) SKIN PANEL FS499.00
1 (REF) FS461.50
3
FS529.00
B
FS484.00
FS439.00
4
WL73.00
4 (STGR17)
2
FS439.00
(REF)
1 3
A
SKIN PANEL
(REF)
NOTES
4
1. Left side is shown, right side is
almost the same.
2. FS439.00 is shown, almost the same 4
for FS461.50, FS484.00, FS499.00,
FS529.00, and FS544.00.
3 Area to be examined.
4
the edges of the frame−to−longeron WL73.00
cleat (1). (STGR17)
2
B
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the underfloor longeron assemblies for
cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
(2) The inspection applies to the longeron assemblies local to FS409.00+128 and
FS559.00.
(3) This inspection applies to the left and right side of the aircraft. The inspection of the
left side is given. Differences for the right side are identified.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1 General
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 160 (refer to NDTM Part 1 General, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is from the outside of the fuselage, under the floor inside the passenger
compartment and the main landing gear (MLG) bay.
NOTE: It is necessary to remove the wing−to−fuselage fairings 191BB/192BB and
the passenger−compartment floor panels 251CLF, 252CRF, 272ERF and
271ELF to gain access to the inspection areas.
E. Parts Examined in This Procedure
Refer to Table 1.
Table 1 − Part Identification Data
DRAWING OR PART
DESCRIPTION MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
NUMBER [1]
Fwd floor fitting
601R31227−1/2
FS409.00+128
Aft floor fitting
601R31227−5/6
FS559.00
Longeron assy
FS409.00+128− 601R31229−7/8 7050−T7452 AMS 4108
FS424.00
Longeron assy
601R31233−9/10
FS513.00−FS559.00
Clip, FS409.00+128 601R31228−5/6
Note [1]: Numbers that do not include a dashed suffix are drawing numbers.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft
A. Procedure
(1) Remove the left forward wing−to−fuselage fairing (Refer to AMM TASK
53−82−81−000−803).
(2) Remove the right forward wing−to−fuselage fairing (Refer to AMM TASK
53−82−81−000−802).
(3) Remove the floor panels 251CLF, 252CRF, 272ERF and 271ELF if necessary (Refer
to AMM TASK 53−01−01−000−802).
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(4) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless it shows
deterioration or local damage.
(5) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, chapter 51).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Underfloor Longeron Assembly at FS409.00+128 and FS559.00
Refer to the areas shaded in Figure 2.
A. Inspection Procedure
NOTE: If the surfaces of any component are painted, look at the paint condition (for
signs of cracks and corrosion) in the component material.
(1) Use the inspection mirror and a light source, and the borescope if required, to
examine the longeron assemblies 601R31229, 601R31233, forward and aft floor
fitting 601R31227 3.00 in. (76.00 mm) forward and 3 in. (76.00 mm) aft of FS409.00
+128 and FS559.00 for cracks and corrosion.
(2) Carefully examine the clip 601R31228 at FS409.00+128.
(3) Inspect the frame web 2 in. (50.8 mm) around the periphery of the longeron
attachment members (clip or longeron end faces) for cracks and corrosion.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−41−158 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
NOTE
FS 473.15
Left hand side shown, (REF)
right hand side opposite.
A
FS 424.00
FS 409.00+128
CLIP
BL 45.00 (601R31228)
LONGERON
A ASSEMBLY FRAME WEB
601R31231 B
(REF) EXAMINE THE
(REF) SHADED AREA 2.00 in.
Inspection of the Underfloor Longeron Assembly Local to FS409.00+128 and FS559.00
Figure 2
(4) Examine the fasteners for signs of loose, bent, corroded, or other unserviceable
conditions.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. If removed, install the floor panels 251CLF, 252CRF, 272ERF and 271ELF (Refer to AMM
TASK 53−01−01−400−802).
C. Install the right forward wing−to−fuselage fairing (refer to AMM TASK
53−82−81−400−802).
D. Install the left forward wing−to−fuselage fairing (refer to AMM TASK
53−82−81−400−803).
E. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the longeron assembly at FS424.00 for
cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
(2) This inspection applies to the left and right side of the aircraft. The inspection of the
left side is given. Differences for the right side are identified.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 160 (refer to NDTM Part 1 General Information, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is through the wing to fuselage fairings.
E. Parts Examined in This Procedure
Refer to Table 1.
Table 1 − Part Identification Data
ITEM
DRAWING OR PART
NO. DESCRIPTION MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
NUMBER [2]
[1]
Longeron assembly
1 FS409+128 to 601R31229
FS424.00 7050−T7452 AMS 4108
Longeron assembly
2 601R31230
FS424.00 to FS473.15
NOTE [1]: Item numbers correspond to item numbers in Figure 1.
NOTE [2]: Numbers that do not include a dashed suffix are drawing numbers.
2. Effectivity
A. All Aircraft.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the fairings and the access panels that follow:
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
NOTES
1 Examine shaded area.
Left hand side shown, FS 473.15
(Typical both sides). (REF) BL 45.00
LONGERON
ASSEMBLY
2
A
A
LONGERON
ASSEMBLY
1 C
WL 73.00
B
FS 424.00
3.00 in.
3.00 in.
1
1
rnd5341159_001.dg, rt, 26/05/00
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the entire underfloor longeron at BL45.00,
between FS409.00+128 and FS559.00 for cracks, corrosion and other damage.
NOTE: This inspection applies to the left and right side of the aircraft. The
inspection of the left side only is given.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 161/162 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) It is necessary to remove the wing−to−fuselage fairings and side panels to get
access to the underfloor longeron.
(2) It is also necessary to remove the main landing−gear (MLG) wheel well bins to get
access to the underfloor longeron.
2. Effectivity
A. All Aircraft.
A. Procedure
(1) Remove any applicable wing−to−fuselage fairings and side panels to access the
underfloor longeron (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03 and the AMM, Chapter 53).
(2) Remove the main landing−gear (MLG) wheel well bins (Refer to the AMM, Chapter
53).
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(3) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless it shows
deterioration or local damage.
(4) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, chapter 51).
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the entire underfloor longeron at BL45.00, from FS409.00+128 to FS559.00
for cracks and corrosion. Pay particular attention to the longeron cut−outs and
attachment to the fuselage frames.
(2) Examine the fasteners for signs of loose, bent, corroded, or other unserviceable
conditions.
FS 559.00
WL 73.00
LONGERON
ASSEMBLY
4
FS 513.00
LONGERON
ASSEMBLY FS 473.15
3
FS 473.15
LONGERON
ASSEMBLY
2
FS 424.00
LONGERON
ASSEMBLY
1
NOTE
rnd5341163_001.dg, rt/gw, 07/08/01
FS 409.00+128
WL 73.00 1
LONGERON
ASSEMBLY
1
FS 424.00 1
FRAME
(REF)
CLIP LONGERON
(REF) ASSEMBLY
2
FRAME
WL 73.00 (REF)
LONGERON
NOTE
ASSEMBLY
The left side of the 1
aircraft is shown.
The right side is similar.
Examine the shaded area.
LONGERON
ASSEMBLY
3
FS 473.15
LONGERON
ASSEMBLY
2
rnd5341163_002.dg, rt/gw, 07/08/01
FRAME
(REF)
WL 73.00
1
FS 513.00
LONGERON
ASSEMBLY
4
FRAME
(REF)
LONGERON
ASSEMBLY
3
FS 559.00
NOTE 1
The left side of the
LONGERON
aircraft is shown.
ASSEMBLY
The right side is similar.
4
Examine the shaded area.
FRAME
rnd5341163_003.dg, rt/gw, 02/08/01
(REF)
WL 73.00
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Install the wing−to−fuselage fairings and side panels that were removed (Refer to NDTM
Part 1, 51−01−03 and the AMM, Chapter 53).
C. Install the main landing−gear (MLG) wheel well bins (Refer to the AMM, Chapter 53).
D. Remove all tools, equipment and unwanted materials from the work area.
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the top skin panel assembly from
FS559.00 to FS559.00+112 for cracks, corrosion and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For additional data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is in Zone 273 and 274 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the external fuselage surface.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(2) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(3) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(4) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Fuselage Skin Panel from FS559.00 to FS559.00+112, between
STGR7L and STGR7R
A. Inspection Procedure
Refer to Figure 1.
(1) Examine the external surface of the skin panel (1) from above STGR7L to above
STGR7R between FS559.00 to FS559.00+112 for cracks and corrosion, and other
damage. Make sure you carefully examine the longitudinal splice area of the skin
panel at STGR6L and STGR6R.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
NOTES
LEGEND 1. Examine the shaded area.
1. Skin panel. 2. Examine the outer skin
2. Skin panel. left side shown, right side similar.
STGR7
B A 2
REFERENCE FS559.00
FS559.00 LONGITUDINAL SPLICE 1 + 16
STRG 6
B 2
Inspection of the Fuselage Skin Panel from FS559.00 to FS559.00+112, between STGR7L and
STGR7R.
Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 3
53−41−165 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the external surface of the side skin panel
from FS559.00 to FS559.00+112 between STGR6 and STGR20 for cracks, corrosion
and other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For additional data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is in Zone 171, 172, 271, and 272 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the fuselage external surface.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(2) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(3) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(4) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Fuselage Skin Panel from FS559.00 to FS559.00+112, between
STGR6 and STGR20
A. Inspection Procedure
Refer to Figure 1.
(1) Examine the external surface of the skin panel (1) from below STGR6 to STGR20
between FS559.00 to FS559.00+112 for cracks and corrosion, and other damage.
Make sure you carefully examine each side of the STGR10 area of the skin panel.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
STGR7L
STGR8L
STGR9L
STGR10L
STGR11L
STGR12L
STGR13L
STGR14L
STGR15L
STGR16L
STGR17L
STGR18L
STGR19L
1
UP
A
NOTES
VIEW LOOKING INBOARD
1. Inspect shaded area.
2. Examine the outer skin LEGEND
3. Left side shown, right 1. Skin panel.
side almost the same.
Inspection of the Fuselage Skin Panel from FS559.00 to FS559.00+112, between STGR6 and
STGR20.
Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 3
53−41−166 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the fuselage skin at between
FS409.00+80 and FS409.00+96 and STGR24L and STGR25L around the oxygen
indicator cut−out for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 140 (refer to NDTM Part 1 General, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the inspection area is by the external fuselage.
E. Parts Examined in This Procedure
Refer to Table 1.
Table 1 − Part Identification Data
ITEM DRAWING OR PART
DESCRIPTION MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
No. [1] NUMBER [2]
Skin Panel, 0.058 in. (1.60 mm)
1 601R38323 AMS QQ−250/5
(chem−milled) Alclad 2024−T3
Note [1]: Item number corresponds to the item number shown in Figure 1.
Note [2]: Numbers that do not include a dashed suffix are drawing numbers.
2. Effectivity
A. Aircraft with Modsum TC601R60256 incorporated.
(2) Is is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless they show deterioration
or local damage.
NOTE: If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove
the finish (Refer to the SRM, Chapter 51).
5. Inspection for Damage to the fuselage Skin at the Oxygen Indicator Cut−Out at FS409.00+80
between STGR24L and STGR25L
Refer to the area shaded in Figure 1.
NOTE: If the surfaces of the skin are painted, look at the paint condition (for signs of cracks
and corrosion).
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the fuselage skin over an area of 4.00 in. (102.00 mm) around the cut−out
for the oxygen discharge indicator for cracks, corrosion or other damage.
(2) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, corroded, or other unserviceable
condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
NOTE
Examine the shaded area.
FS409.00+96
FS409.00+88
STGR25L
OXYGEN
DISCHARGE
INDICATOR
(REF)
STGR24L
rnd5341171_001.dg, lr, sep06/2007
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the fuselage skin around the single or
dual GPS antenna(s) from FS409.00+32 and FS409.00+48, between STGR1L and
STGR1R.
B. Reference Information
(1) For additional data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is in Zones 253 and 254 (Refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the external fuselage surface.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft post Mosdum TC601R14601, TC601R14602, TC601R60256, TC601R60420, or
with SB 601R−34−096 incorporated.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(2) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(3) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(4) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Fuselage Skin around the GPS Antenna(s)
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the external surface of the top skin panel (1) 4.00 in. (101.6 mm) around the
GPS antenna(s) (2) for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
(2) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
A
FS409 32
NOTES
1. Top skin panel.
2. GPS antenna.
3. Examine the shaded area.
FS409 32
4.00 in. (101.60 mm)
ALL AROUND
FS409 48
GPS ANTENNA
1
2
STGR1R
BL0.00
FWD
STGR1L
rnd5341176_001.dg, gb, 01/10/08
2 3
A
VIEW LOOKING DOWN
Inspection of the Fuselage Skin around the GPS Antenna(s) from FS409.00+32 and
FS409.00+48, between STGR1L and STGR1R.
Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 3
53−41−176 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the forward and the aft faces of the
pressure bulkhead, frame FS409.00+128, at the keel beam box (pressure box)
between RBL12.00 and LBL12.00 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1 General
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 150 (refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is through the main avionics compartment−door and the wing−to−fuselage
fairings.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft with SB 601R−53−047 incorporated (Rework Configuration No. 1).
B. All aircraft with Modsum TC601R14465 (bulkhead repairs) incorporated (Rework
Configuration No. 2).
A. Procedure
(1) Remove the left wing−to−fuselage fairing 191BB (refer to AMM TASK
53−82−01−000−803).
(2) Remove the right wing−to−fuselage fairing 192BB (refer to AMM TASK
53−82−01−000−802).
(3) Open the access door that follows:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
811 Main avionics compartment−door
(4) Remove or lift the insulation as necessary to get to the inspection area (refer to AMM
TASK 25−81−01−000−801 and/or AMM TASK 25−81−02−000−801).
(5) Identify the locations to be examined (refer to Figure 1 and Figure 2).
(6) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(7) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−41−177 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) On aircraft with Rework Configuration No. 1, do the inspection that follows (refer to
Figure 1):
(a) Examine the aft face of the pressure bulkhead between RBL12.00 and
LBL12.00, and 2.00 in. (50.80 mm) below the transverse angle 601R30006−3.
Carefully examine the corners of the pressure−bulkhead web cut−out.
(b) Examine the lower flange of the transverse angle 601R30006−3 between
RBL12.00 and LBL12.00. Carefully examine the transverse angle
601R30006−3 at RBL6.00 and LBL6.00.
(c) Examine the forward face of the pressure bulkhead and support structure
between RBL12.00 and LBL12.00, and between WL45.00 and WL73.00, full
depth of the bulkhead web 601R32208−123. Carefully examine the pressure
bulkhead web immediately above the pressure box angle 601R32208−73.
(2) On aircraft with Rework Configuration No. 2, do the inspection that follows (refer to
Figure 2):
(a) Examine the aft face of the pressure bulkhead between RBL12.00 and
LBL12.00, and 2.00 in. (50.80 mm) below the channel 601R32207−5. Carefully
examine the corners of the pressure−bulkhead web cut−out.
(b) Examine the lower flange of the channel 601R32207−5 between RBL12.00 and
LBL12.00. Carefully examine the channel 601R32207−5 at RBL6.00 and
LBL6.00.
(c) Examine the forward face of the pressure bulkhead and support structure
between RBL12.00 and LBL12.00, and between WL45.00 and WL73.00, full
depth of the bulkhead web 601R32208−123. Carefully examine the pressure
bulkhead web immediately above the pressure box angle 601R32208−73.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801 and/or AMM TASK
25−81−02−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the close out area.
E. Close the access door that follows:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
811 Main avionics compartment−door
F. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
G. Install the left wing−to−fuselage fairing 191BB (refer to AMM TASK
53−82−01−400−803).
H. Install the right wing−to−fuselage fairing 192BB (refer to AMM TASK
53−82−01−400−802).
WL 73.00
WL 69.00
LBL 12.00
GUSSET LBL 9.00
PRESSURE BOX 601R30006−5
ANGLE
601R32208−73
C BL 0.00
GUSSET
601R30006−6
PRESSURE
BULKHEAD WEB RBL 9.00
FRAME ANGLE
601R32208−123 RBL 12.00 601R32208−15
ANGLE
601R32208−69
601R32208−16 (REF)
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
ANGLE B
601R32208−70 VIEW LOOKING AFT AT
FS 409.00 + 128 BETWEEN
RBL 12.00 AND LBL 12.00
Inspection of the Pressure Bulkhead at FS409.00+128 (Rework Configuration No. 1)
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
RBL 12.00
D
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
TRANSVERSE LBL 12.00
ANGLE C FILLER
601R30006−3 601R30006−11
VIEW LOOKING FORWARD AT
FS 409.00 + 128 BETWEEN 2.00 in.
(50.80 mm)
RBL 12.00 AND LBL 12.00
ANGLE BL 0.00
601R32208−81
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
ANGLE
601R32208−79
2.00 in.
(50.80 mm)
LBL 12.00
rnd5341177_002.dg, jp/rm, 21/03/00
PRESSURE
BULKHEAD WEB
601R32208−123
D
VIEW LOOKING UP ON TRANSVERSE ANGLE
RBL 12.00 AT FS 409.00 + 128 BETWEEN RBL 12.00 AND LBL 12.00
Inspection of the Pressure Bulkhead at FS409.00+128 (Rework Configuration No. 1)
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
WL 69.00
STR 26 STR 26
RBL 12.00 (RBL 6.00) (LBL 6.00) LBL 12.00
NOTE
A
This inspection applies to all aircraft VIEW LOOKING AFT
with Modsum TC601R14465. AT FS 409.00 + 128
LBL 12.00
GUSSET LBL 9.00
PRESSURE BOX 601R30007−3
ANGLE
601R32208−73
BL 0.00
C
PRESSURE
BULKHEAD WEB RBL 9.00
601R32208−123 FRAME ANGLE
RBL 12.00 601R32208−15
ANGLE
601R32208−69
601R32208−16 (REF)
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
ANGLE B
601R32208−70
VIEW LOOKING AFT AT
FS 409.00 + 128 BETWEEN
RBL 12.00 AND LBL 12.00
Inspection of the Pressure Bulkhead at FS409.00+128 (Rework Configuration No. 2)
Figure 2 (Sheet 1)
RBL 12.00
D
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
LBL 12.00 GUSSET
C 601R30007−3
VIEW LOOKING FORWARD AT 2.00 in.
FS 409.00 + 128 BETWEEN (50.80 mm)
RBL 12.00 AND LBL 12.00
BL 0.00
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
2.00 in.
(50.80 mm)
LBL 12.00
rnd5341177_004.dg, jp/rm, 21/03/00
PRESSURE
BULKHEAD WEB
601R32208−123
D
VIEW LOOKING UP ON CHANNEL
RBL 12.00 AT FS 409.00 + 128 BETWEEN RBL 12.00 AND LBL 12.00
Inspection of the Pressure Bulkhead at FS409.00+128 (Rework Configuration No. 2)
Figure 2 (Sheet 2)
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the forward and the aft faces of the
pressure bulkhead, frame FS409.00+128, at the keel beam box (pressure box)
between RBL12.00 and LBL12.00 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1 General
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 150 (Refer to NDTM Part 1 General, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is through the main avionics compartment−door and the wing−to−fuselage
fairings.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft with MODSUMS TC601R25125 (Bulkhead FS409+128 reinforcement),
TC601R25126 and TC601R25127 (Bulkhead rework) incorporated.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 1
53−41−179 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
A. Procedure
(1) Remove the left wing−to−fuselage fairing 191BB (refer to AMM TASK
53−82−01−000−803).
(2) Remove the right wing−to−fuselage fairing 192BB (refer to AMM TASK
53−82−01−000−802).
(3) Open the access door that follows:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
811 Main avionics compartment−door
(4) Remove or lift the insulation as necessary to get to the inspection area (refer to AMM
TASK 25−81−01−000−801 and/or AMM TASK 25−81−02−000−801).
(5) Identify the locations to be examined (refer to Figure 1).
(6) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(7) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(8) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Pressure Bulkhead at Frame FS409.00+128, Between RBL12.00
and LBL12.00
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the forward face of the pressure bulkhead web (2) and the frame angle (3)
between RBL12.00 and LBL12.00, and between WL 45.00 and WL 73.00. Make sure
you carefully examine the pressure bulkhead web immediately above the joint angle
(4) and corner angle (5).
(2) Examine the aft face of the pressure bulkhead (2) between RBL12.00 and LBL12.00,
and 2.00 in. (50.80 mm) below the channel (1). Make sure you carefully examine the
corners of the pressure−bulkhead web cut−out.
(3) Examine the lower flange of the channel (1) between RBL12.00 and LBL12.00. Make
sure you carefully examine the channel at RBL6.00 and LBL6.00.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−41−179 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801 and/or AMM TASK
25−81−02−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the close out area.
E. Close the access door that follows:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
811 Main avionics compartment−door
F. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
G. Install the left wing−to−fuselage fairing 191BB (refer to AMM TASK
53−82−01−400−803).
H. Install the right wing−to−fuselage fairing 192BB (refer to AMM TASK
53−82−01−400−802).
WL 73.00
WL 69.00
WL 48.95
1
WL 45.00
B
STR 26 STR 26
RBL 12.00 (RBL 6.00) (LBL 6.00) LBL 12.00
NOTE
A
1 Examine the shaded area.
VIEW LOOKING AFT
This inspection applies to all aircraft AT FS 409.00 + 128
with TC601R25125, TC601R25126,
and TC601R25127 incorporated.
CORNER LBL 12.00
ANGLE
5 LBL 9.00
1
CORNER
C ANGLE
BL 0.00
5
PRESSURE
RBL 9.00
BULKHEAD WEB FRAME ANGLE
2 RBL 12.00 3
PRESSURE BOX
(REF)
rnd5341179_001.dg, jp/rm, 25/01/01
B
VIEW LOOKING AFT AT
FS 409.00 + 128 BETWEEN
RBL 12.00 AND LBL 12.00
CHANNEL
1
RBL 9.00
PRESSURE BL 0.00 WL 48.95
BULKHEAD WEB
2 LBL 9.00
D RBL 12.00
1
LBL 12.00 C
VIEW LOOKING FORWARD AT
FS 409.00 + 128 BETWEEN 2.00 in.
RBL 12.00 AND LBL 12.00 (50.80 mm)
BL 0.00
2.00 in.
(50.80 mm)
RBL 12.00
rnd5341179_002.dg, kms/sw, 05/03/01
PRESSURE
BULKHEAD WEB
2
D
VIEW LOOKING UP ON CHANNEL
LBL 12.00 AT FS 409.00 + 128 BETWEEN RBL 12.00 AND LBL 12.00
Inspection of the Pressure Bulkhead at FS409.00+128
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
AWL 53−41−180
1. General
A. This nondestructive testing procedure is for the detailed inspection procedure is used to
visually examine the forward and aft surfaces of the pressure bulkhead web, the lower
flange of the reinforcing channel and reinforcing strap at FS409.00+128 for cracks,
corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 171 and 172 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the aircraft main avionics door.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft Post−Modsum TC601R25125, TC601R25126, and TC601R25127.
B. All aircraft Post−Modsum TC601R25128 or SB 601R−53−050.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 1
53−41−180 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
ACCESS DESIGNATION
811 Main avionics compartment−door
(4) Remove or lift insulation as necessary to get to the inspection area (refer to AMM
TASK 25−81−02−000−801).
(5) Identify the locations to be examined (refer to Figure 1).
(6) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(7) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(8) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration on local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Forward and Aft Face Pressure Bulkhead Web surfaces with
Reinforcing Strap
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the forward face pressure bulkhead web (2) between LBL12 and RBL12
and between WL45 and WL 73 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage. Make sure
you pay attention to the pressure bulkhead web (2) immediately above the pressure
box corner angles and the corners of the pressure bulkhead.
(2) Examine the reinforcing strap (3) that’s below the keel beam links make sure you
carefully examine each fastener holes.
(3) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−41−180 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
(4) Examine the aft pressure bulkhead web (2) between LBL 12 and RLB 12, and 2
inches below the reinforcing channel (3).
(5) Examine the lower flange of the reinforcing channel (1).
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−02−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
FS409.00+128
WL 66.50
1
rnd5341180_001.dg, gw, aug6/2009
Inspection of the Forward and Aft Face Pressure Bulkhead Web with Reinforcing Strap
Figure 1 Sheet 1
NOTE
Examine shaded area.
WL
68.92
STGR 18
STGR 19
STGR 19
STGR 20 STGR 20
STGR 21 STGR 21
STGR 22 STGR 22
STGR 23 STGR 23
1 STGR 24
WL45
STGR 25
STGR 24 STGR 26 STGR 26
FRAME ANGLE STGR 25
CORNER ANGLE
(REF)
(REF)
3
rnd5341180_002.dg, kp, 26−Feb−2014
Inspection of the Forward and Aft Face Pressure Bulkhead Web with Reinforcing Strap
Figure 1 Sheet 2
WL
68.92
STGR 18
STGR 19 STGR 19
STGR 20 STGR 20
STGR 21 STGR 21
STGR 22 STGR 22
STGR 23 STGR 23
STGR 24
STGR 24
STGR 25 STGR 25
STGR 26 STGR 26
NOTE
Examine shaded
area.
VIEW LOOKING AFT
TOP FLANGE
(REF)
LOWER
FLANGE
rnd5341180_003.dg, gw, aug5/2009
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the forward and the aft faces of the
pressure bulkhead, frame FS409.00+128, at the keel beam box between RBL12.00
and LBL12.00 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1 General
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 150 (refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is through the main avionics compartment−door and the wing−to−fuselage
fairings.
2. Effectivity
− Rework Configuration No. 1 − All aircraft with SB 601R−53−047, and SB 601R−53−050 or
Modsum TC601R14589 (external reinforcing strap) incorporated
− Rework Configuration No. 2 − All aircraft with Modsum TC601R14465 (bulkhead repairs),
and SB 601R−53−050 or Modsum TC601R14589 (external reinforcing strap) incorporated
− Rework Configuration No. 3 − All aircraft repaired in accordance with Air Canada Drawing
53−10002, and SB 601R−53−050 or Modsum TC601R14589 (external reinforcing strap)
incorporated
− Rework Configuration No. 4 − All aircraft repaired in accordance with REO
601R−53−31−012 (SB 601R−53−046), and SB 601R−53−050 or Modsum TC601R14589
(external reinforcing strap) incorporated.
A. Procedure
(1) Remove the left wing−to−fuselage fairing 191BB (refer to AMM TASK
53−82−01−000−803).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 4
53−41−185 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
(2) Remove the right wing−to−fuselage fairing 192BB (refer to AMM TASK
53−82−01−000−802).
(3) Open the access door that follows:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
811 Main avionics compartment−door
(4) Remove or lift the insulation as necessary to get to the inspection area (refer to AMM
TASK 25−81−01−000−801 and/or AMM TASK 25−81−02−000−801).
(5) Identify the locations to be examined (refer to Figure 1, Figure 2, Figure 3, and
Figure 4).
(6) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(7) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(8) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) On aircraft with Rework Configuration No. 1, do the inspection that follows (refer to
the shaded area in Figure 1):
(a) Examine the aft face of the pressure bulkhead between RBL12.00 and
LBL12.00, and 2.00 in. (50.80 mm) below the transverse angle 601R30006−3.
Carefully examine the corners of the pressure−bulkhead web cut−out.
(b) Examine the lower flange of the transverse angle 601R30006−3 between
RBL12.00 and LBL12.00. Carefully examine the transverse angle 601R3006−3
at RBL6.00 and LBL6.00
(c) Examine the forward face of the pressure bulkhead between RBL12.00 and
LBL12.00, and between WL45.00 and WL73.00, full depth of the bulkhead web.
Carefully examine the pressure bulkhead web immediately above the pressure
box angle 601R32208−73.
(d) Examine the strap 601R30008−3, shim 601R30008−5 and the skin
601R38323−7 area 2.00 in. (50.8 mm) around the strap.
WL 73.00
WL 69.00
RBL 9.00
FRAME ANGLE
RBL 12.00 601R32208−15
ANGLE
601R32208−69
PRESSURE BOX
(REF)
rnd5341185_001.dg, rm/jp, 29/11/99
FRAME ANGLE
601R32208−16
EXAMINE THE STRAP
ANGLE SHADED AREA 601R30008−3
B 601R32208−70
VIEW LOOKING AFT AT
FS 409.00 + 128 BETWEEN RBL 12.00 AND LBL 12.00
Inspection of the Pressure Bulkhead at FS409.00+128 (Rework Configuration No. 1)
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
LBL 18.00
RADIUS BLOCK
(REF)
RBL 12.00
D
SHIM
601R30008−5
(TWO PLACES)
EXAMINE THE
STRAP SHADED AREA
601R30008−3 FILLER
LBL 12.00 601R30006−11
RADIUS BLOCK C
(REF) VIEW LOOKING FORWARD AT 2.00 in.
FS 409.00 + 128 BETWEEN (50.80 mm)
RBL 12.00 AND LBL 12.00
ANGLE BL 0.00
601R32208−81
TRANSVERSE
ANGLE
601R30006−3
ANGLE 2.00 in.
601R32208−79 (50.80 mm)
SKIN
601R38323−7
2.00 in.
(50.80 mm) PRESSURE
RBL 12.00 BULKHEAD WEB
601R32208−123
rnd5341185_002.dg, jp/kms, 22/02/00
SKIN SHIM
601R38323−7 601R30008−5
(TWO PLACES) STRAP
601R30008−3
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA D
2.00 in.
(50.80 mm) VIEW LOOKING UP ON TRANSVERSE ANGLE AND STRAP
LBL 12.00 AT FS 409.00 + 128 BETWEEN RBL 12.00 AND LBL 12.00
Inspection of the Pressure Bulkhead at FS409.00+128 (Rework Configuration No. 1)
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
(2) On aircraft with Rework Configuration No. 2, do the inspection that follows (refer to
the shaded area in Figure 2):
(a) Examine the aft face of the pressure bulkhead between RBL12.00 and
LBL12.00, and 2.00 in. (50.80 mm) below the channel 601R32207−5. Carefully
examine the corners of the pressure−bulkhead web cut−out.
(b) Examine the lower flange of the channel 601R32207−5 between RBL12.00 and
LBL12.00. Carefully examine the channel 601R32207−5 at RBL6.00 and
LBL6.00.
(c) Examine the forward face of the pressure bulkhead between RBL12.00 and
LBL12.00, and between WL45.00 and WL73.00, full depth of the bulkhead web.
Carefully examine the pressure bulkhead web immediately above the pressure
box angle 601R32208−73.
(d) Examine the strap 601R30008−3, shim 601R30008−5 and the skin
601R38323−7 area 2.00 in. (50.8 mm) around the strap.
WL 73.00
WL 69.00
PRESSURE BOX
ANGLE
601R32208−73 BL 0.00
C
RBL 9.00
FRAME ANGLE
RBL 12.00 601R32208−15
ANGLE
601R32208−69
PRESSURE BOX
(REF)
FRAME ANGLE
rnd5341185_003.dg, rm/jp, 29/11/99
601R32208−16 STRAP
EXAMINE THE 601R30008−3
SHADED AREA
ANGLE
B 601R32208−70
VIEW LOOKING AFT AT
FS 409.00 + 128 BETWEEN RBL 12.00 AND LBL 12.00
Inspection of the Pressure Bulkhead at FS409.00+128 (Rework Configuration No. 2)
Figure 2 (Sheet 1)
RBL 18.00
CHANNEL
PRESSURE RADIUS 601R32207−5
BULKHEAD WEB BLOCK
RBL 9.00 WL 48.95
601R32208−123 (REF)
BL 0.00
GUSSET
601R30007−3 LBL 9.00 RADIUS
BLOCK
(REF)
LBL 18.00
RADIUS BLOCK
(REF)
D RBL 12.00
SHIM
601R30008−5
(TWO PLACES)
EXAMINE THE
STRAP SHADED AREA
601R30008−3 GUSSET
LBL 12.00 601R30007−3
RADIUS BLOCK C
(REF) 2.00 in.
VIEW LOOKING FORWARD AT (50.80 mm)
FS 409.00 + 128 BETWEEN
RBL 12.00 AND LBL 12.00
BL 0.00
CHANNEL
601R32207−5
2.00 in.
(50.80 mm)
PRESSURE
2.00 in. BULKHEAD WEB
(50.80 mm) 601R32208−123
RBL 12.00
SKIN
rnd5341185_004.dg, jp/kms, 22/02/00
(3) On aircraft with Rework Configuration No. 3, do the inspection that follows (refer to
the shaded area in Figure 3):
(a) Examine the aft face of the pressure bulkhead and the repair web doubler
between RBL12.00 and LBL12.00, and 2.00 in. (50.80 mm) below the
transverse angle 601R−53−31−012−13. Carefully examine the corners of the
repair web doubler cut−out.
(b) Examine the lower flange of the transverse angle 601R−53−31−012−13
between RBL12.00 and LBL12.00. Carefully examine the transverse angle
601R−53−31−012−13 at RBL6.00 and LBL6.00.
(c) Examine the forward face of the pressure bulkhead between RBL12.00 and
LBL12.00, and between WL45.00 and WL73.00, full depth of the bulkhead web
and repair web doubler. Carefully examine the repair web doubler immediately
above the pressure box angle 53−10002−17.
(d) Examine the strap 601R30008−3, shim 601R30008−5 and the skin
601R38323−7 area 2.00 in. (50.8 mm) around the strap.
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
A RBL 12.00 BL 0.00 LBL 12.00
RBL 9.00 LBL 9.00
WL 73.00
WL 69.00
A
WL 48.95
VIEW LOOKING AFT
AT FS 409.00 + 128 WL 45.00
B
STR 26 STR 26
NOTES
RBL 12.00 (RBL 6.00) (LBL 6.00) LBL 12.00
1 Optional trim.
2. This inspection applies to all PRESSURE
aircraft repaired to Air Canada REPAIR WEB LBL 12.00 BULKHEAD WEB
drawing 53−10002, and Modsum DOUBLER 601R32208−123
TC601R14589 or SB 601R−53−050 53−10002−1 LBL 9.00
incorporated.
BL 0.00
FILLER FRAME ANGLE
C
53−10002−27 601R32208−15
RBL 9.00 (REF)
PRESSURE
BULKHEAD WEB RBL 12.00
601R32208−123
FRAME ANGLE
53−10002−11
1
PRESSURE BOX
FILLER
(REF)
53−10002−9
PRESSURE BOX
rnd5341185_005.dg, jp/kms, 17/12/99
ANGLE 53−10002−17
LBL 9.00
ANGLE RADIUS
601R32208−79 BLOCK
(REF) (REF)
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
PRESSURE D RBL 12.00
BULKHEAD WEB
601R32208−123
TRANSVERSE ANGLE
601R−53−31−012−13
FILLER (REF)
STRAP
601R−53−31−012−15
601R30008−3
LBL 12.00
EXAMINE THE
RADIUS BLOCK SHADED AREA
(REF)
rnd5341185_006.dg, jp, 29/11/99
C
VIEW LOOKING FORWARD AT
FS 409.00 + 128 BETWEEN
RBL 12.00 + LBL 12.00
PRESSURE
RBL 9.00 BULKHEAD WEB
FILLER 601R32208−123
53−10002−3
BL 0.00
ANGLE
601R32208−81
(REF)
FILLER
LBL 9.00 601R−53−31−012−15
REPAIR WEB
DOUBLER
53−10002−1
PRESSURE
BULKHEAD WEB
601R32208−123
STRAP
RBL 12.00 601R30008−3
SHIM
601R30008−5
(TWO PLACES)
TRANSVERSE
ANGLE
601R−53−31−012−13
SKIN
rnd5341185_007.dg, jp/kms, 22/02/00
2.00 in.
(50.80 mm)
D
(4) On aircraft with Rework Configuration No. 4, do the inspection that follows (refer to
the shaded area in Figure 4):
(a) Examine the aft face of the pressure bulkhead, the skin filler
601R−53−31−012−5 and the two doublers 601R−53−31−012−1/−3
between RBL12.00 and LBL12.00, and 2.00 in. (50.80 mm) below the
transverse angle 601R−53−31−012−13. Carefully examine the corners of the
skin filler cut−out.
(b) Examine the lower flange of the transverse angle 601R−53−31−012−13
between RBL12.00 and LBL12.00. Carefully examine the transverse angle
601R−53−31−012−13 at RBL6.00 and LBL6.00.
(c) Examine the forward face of the pressure bulkhead between RBL12.00 and
LBL12.00, and between WL45.00 and WL73.00, full depth of the bulkhead web
and the two doublers. Carefully examine the two doublers immediately above
the pressure box angle 601R−53−31−012−9.
(d) Examine the strap 601R30008−3, shim 601R30008−5 and the skin
601R38323−7 area 2.00 in. (50.8 mm) around the strap.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801 and/or AMM TASK
25−81−02−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the close out area.
E. Close the access door that follows:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
811 Main avionics compartment−door
F. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
G. Install the left wing−to−fuselage fairing 191BB (refer to AMM TASK
53−82−01−400−803).
H. Install the right wing−to−fuselage fairing 192BB (refer to AMM TASK
53−82−01−400−802).
I. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 15
53−41−185 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
NOTE
This inspection applies to all aircraft
repaired to REO 601R−53−31−012
A
(SB 601R−53−046), and Modsum
TC601R14589 or SB 601R−53−050
incorporated.
RBL BL LBL
12.00 0.00 12.00
RBL LBL
9.00 9.00
WL
73.00
WL
69.00
WL
48.95
EXAMINE THE WL
SHADED AREA 45.00
B
STR 26 STR 26
(RBL 6.00) (LBL 6.00) LBL
RBL
12.00 12.00
A
VIEW LOOKING AFT
AT FS 409.00 + 128
rnd5341185_008.dg, jp/kms, 20/12/99
C
PACKER
601R−53−31−012−47
PRESSURE RBL 9.00
BULKHEAD WEB SPLICE ANGLE
601R32208−123 RBL 12.00 601R−53−31−012−41
(TWO PLACES)
LBL 9.00
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
RADIUS BLOCK
(REF)
D RBL 12.00
TRANSVERSE ANGLE
601R−53−31−012−13
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
PACKER STRAP
601R−53−31−012−15 LBL 12.00 601R30008−3
ANGLE
RADIUS BLOCK 601R32208−79
rnd5341185_010.dg, jp/gw, 29/02/00
(REF) (REF)
C
VIEW LOOKING FORWARD AT
FS 409.00 + 128 BETWEEN
RBL 12.00 AND LBL 12.00
RBL 9.00
PACKER
WEB FILLER
601R−53−31−012−15
601R−53−31−012−5
BL 0.00
ANGLE
601R32208−81
(REF) 2.00 in.
(50.80 mm)
PRESSURE LBL 9.00
BULKHEAD WEB
601R32208−123
2.00 in.
(50.80 mm)
RBL 12.00
SHIM
601R30008−5
(TWO PLACES)
STRAP
601R30008−3
TRANSVERSE
ANGLE
601R−53−31−012−13
EXAMINE THE
LBL 12.00
SHADED AREA SKIN
rnd5341185_011.dg, jp/gw, 29/02/00
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the forward and the aft faces of the
pressure bulkhead, frame FS409.00+128, at the keel beam box (pressure box)
between RBL12.00 and LBL12.00 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1 General
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 150 (refer to NDTM Part 1 General, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is through the main avionics compartment−door and the wing−to−fuselage
fairings.
E. Parts Examined in This Procedure
Refer to Table 1.
Table 1 − Part Identification Data
DRAWING OR PART
DESCRIPTION MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
NUMBER [1]
Pressure bulkhead
601R32208−123
web
Doubler 601R−53−31−012−1
Doubler 601R−53−31−012−3 2024−T3 −
Packer 601R−53−31−012−7
Packer 601R−53−31−012−9
Packer 601R−53−31−012−31
Packer 601R−53−31−012−33
Packer 601R−53−31−012−43
Packer 601R−53−31−012−27
Packer 601R−53−31−012−29 2024−T3 −
Packer 601R−53−31−012−45
Packer 601R−53−31−012−35
Web filler 601R−53−31−012−5
Note [1]: Numbers that do not include a dashed suffix are drawing numbers.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft repaired in accordance with REO 601R−53−31−012 (SB 601R−53−046).
A. Procedure
(1) Identify the locations to be examined (refer to Figure 1).
(2) Remove the left wing−to−fuselage fairing 191BB (refer to AMM TASK
53−82−01−000−803).
(3) Remove the right wing−to−fuselage fairing 192BB (refer to AMM TASK
53−82−01−000−802).
(4) Open the access door that follows:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
811 Main avionics compartment−door
(5) Remove or lift the insulation as necessary to get to the inspection area (refer to AMM
TASK 25−81−01−000−801 and/or AMM TASK 25−81−02−000−801).
(6) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(7) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−41−188 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the aft face of the pressure bulkhead between RBL12.00 and LBL12.00, and
2.00 in. (50.80 mm) below the transverse angle 601R−53−31−012−13. Carefully
examine the corners of the pressure−bulkhead web cut−out.
(2) Examine the lower flange of the transverse angle 601R−53−31−012−13 between
RBL12.00 and LBL12.00. Carefully examine the transverse angle
601R−53−31−012−13 at RBL6.00 and LBL6.00.
(3) Examine the forward face of the pressure bulkhead between RBL12.00 and
LBL12.00, and between WL 45.00 and WL 73.00, full depth of the bulkhead web.
Carefully examine the pressure bulkhead web, web filler and doublers immediately
above the pressure box angle 601R−53−31−012−59 and fastener holes.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801 and/or AMM TASK
25−81−02−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the close out area.
E. Close the access door that follows:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
811 Main avionics compartment−door
F. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 3
53−41−188 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
NOTE
This inspection applies to all aircraft
repaired to REO 601R−53−31−012
A
(SB 601R−53−046).
RBL BL LBL
12.00 0.00 12.00
RBL LBL
9.00 9.00
WL
73.00
WL
69.00
WL
48.95
EXAMINE THE WL
SHADED AREA B 45.00
STR 26 STR 26
(RBL 6.00) (LBL 6.00) LBL
RBL
12.00 12.00
A
VIEW LOOKING AFT
AT FS 409.00 + 128
rnd5341188_001.dg, rm/jp, 08/12/99
C
PACKER
601R−53−31−012−47
PRESSURE RBL 9.00
BULKHEAD WEB SPLICE ANGLE
601R32208−123 RBL 12.00 601R−53−31−012−41
(TWO PLACES)
LBL 9.00
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
RBL 12.00
D TRANSVERSE ANGLE
601R−53−31−012−13
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREA
PACKER LBL 12.00
601R−53−31−012−15 ANGLE
rnd5341188_003.dg, jp/kms, 28/02/00
601R32208−79
(REF)
C
VIEW LOOKING FORWARD AT
FS 409.00 + 128 BETWEEN
RBL 12.00 AND LBL 12.00
RBL 9.00
PACKER
WEB FILLER
601R−53−31−012−15
601R−53−31−012−5
BL 0.00
ANGLE
601R32208−81
(REF)
2.00 in.
(50.80 mm)
2.00 in.
(50.80 mm)
RBL 12.00
TRANSVERSE
ANGLE
601R−53−31−012−13
EXAMINE THE
LBL 12.00
rnd5341188_004.dg, jp/kms, 23/02/00
SHADED AREA
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the outer skin of the top and
bottom beacon light cut−outs at FS409.00+24, located at STGR0, and STGR27 for
cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 141, 142, 243, and 244 (refer to NDTM TASK
Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the exterior of the fuselage.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
5. Inspection for Damage to the Outer Skin of the Top and Bottom Beacon Light Cut−Outs at
FS409.00+24, Located at STGR0, and STGR27
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the external surface of the top skin (1), and bottom skin (2) panels, and 2.0
in. (50.8 mm) around the beacon light at FS409.00+24 at STGR0 and STGR27 for
cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
VHF ANTENNA
(REF) 2
FWD
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm) L STGR 26
STGR 27
R STGR 26
VIEW LOOKING UP
NOTE
Bottom skin shown,
top skin almost the same. LEGEND
Inspect shaded area. 2. Bottom skin.
Inspection of the Outer Skin of the Top and Bottom Beacon Light Cut−Outs at FS409.00+24,
Located at STGR0, and STGR27
Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 3
53−41−190 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the skin panel of the pressure floor from
the right edge to the left edge between FS409+128 and FS559.00.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1 General
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The skin panel of the pressure floor is in Zone 261/262 (refer to NDTM Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is through the passenger compartment.
2. Effectivity
A. A/C 8080−8999
A. Procedure
(1) Remove the passenger compartment floor panels 261ALF, 261CLF, 261DLF, 262CRF,
and 262DRF (refer to AMM TASK 53−01−01−000−802).
(2) Remove the pressure box assembly (refer to AMM TASK 28−20−01−000−807).
(3) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(4) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(5) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection of the Pressure Floor Skin Boarded by FS409+128 and FS559.00, Left Extremity of
Floor to the Right Extremity
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Do the inspection that follows:
(a) Examine the pressure floor skin panel for cracks and corrosion.
(b) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the pressure box assembly (refer to AMM TASK 28−20−01−400−807).
D. Install the passenger compartment floor panels 261ALF, 261CLF, 261DLF, 262CRF, and
262DRF (refer to AMM TASK 53−01−01−400−802).
FS559.00
WL73.00
FS409.00
+128.00
RBL36.00
LBL36.00
1
rnd5341193_001.dg, lr, 08/03/04
Inspection of the Internal Pressure Floor Skin Boarded by FS409+128 and FS559.00, Left
Extremity of Floor to Right Extremity
Figure 1
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 3
53−41−193 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
AWL 53−41−198
1. General
A. This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the Forward and Aft splice angles
for cracks, corrosion, and other damage. This procedure is applicable to the left side and
the right side.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft Post SB 601R−53−074, or Post SB 601R−53−083, or Post−Modsum
TC601R25334 or Post SB601R−53−083.
REFERENCE DESIGNATION
Commercially available High intensity light source
Commercially available Inspection mirror
Commercially available Borescope, if required
B. Parts
DRAWING MATERIAL
ITEM DESCRIPTION
NUMBER SPECIFICATION
1 Splice Angles K601R32208 QQ−A−250/12
NOTE [1]: Item numbers correspond to item numbers in Figure 1
NOTE [2]: Numbers that do not include a dashed suffix are drawing numbers.
C. Reference Information
4. Job Set−Up
A. Remove the Left Forward Wing−to−Fuselage Fairing (AMM 53−82−01−000−803).
B. Remove the Right Forward Wing−to−Fuselage Fairing (AMM 53−82−01−000−802).
C. Open the access doors that follow:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
811 Main avionics door−compartment
D. Remove or lift the insulation as necessary to get to the inspection area (AMM
25−81−02−000−801).
E. Make sure the inspection area is clean.
F. If necessary, remove the water−displacing corrosion−inhibiting compound (CIC) with a
lint−free cloth and solvent (SRM 51−26−00).
G. If necessary, remove the sealant.
H. If the finish in the inspection area is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish.
5. Procedure
Refer to Figure 1.
6. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−41−198 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
ACCESS DESIGNATION
811 Main avionics door−compartment
NOTE
Examine shaded area.
Left side is shown,
right side is almost the same.
LEGEND FS409.00+128
1. Splice angle.
LBL 27 LBL 36
STGR. 17
WL 69.00
STGR. 18
STGR. 19
1
STGR. 20
rnd5341198_001.dg, gw, aug5/2009
STGR. 21
STGR. 22
VIEW LOOKING AFT
0.55 MINIMUM
EDGE DISTANCE
B − B
0.55 MINIMUM
EDGE DISTANCE
C − C
DETAILED INSPECTION OF THE FS409.00+128 FRAME CAP AFT AND FORWARD SPLICE
ANGLES AT STGR21 LEFT AND RIGHT
AWL 53−41−200
1. General
A. The nondestructive testing procedure that follows is for the inspection for surface cracks
on the splice angles of the pressure bulkhead FS409.00+128 at STGR21L and STGR21R.
This data applies to both sides of the aircraft. The inspection procedure for the
components on the left side is given. The procedure for the components on the right side
is similar.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
REFERENCE DESIGNATION
Commercially Available Explosion Proof−Flashlight
Commercially Available Mirror−Telescopic
B. Parts
MATERIAL
ITEM DESCRIPTION DRAWING NUMBER
SPECIFICATION
1 Angle
7075−T62
7075 T62 AL ALY
2 Angle, Splice 601R32208
ALCD SH
3 Angle
C. Reference Information
ACCESS DESIGNATION
811 Main avionics compartment−door
E. Remove or lift the insulation as necessary to get to the inspection area (AMM
25−81−02−000−801).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−41−200 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
5. Procedure
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Do the detailed inspection of the parts as follows:
(1) Examine the angles (1 & 3) and splice angles (2) on the forward and aft sides of the
pressure bulkhead in the area around STGR21L and STGR21R.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
B. If necessary, send a defect and damage report to MHI RJ Group (SRM 51−13−01).
6. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish.
B. If necessary, apply water−displacing corrosion−inhibiting compound (CIC) to the
applicable surfaces (AMM 51−25−56−390−802).
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
D. Install the insulation (AMM 25−81−02−400−801).
E. Install the access panels that follow:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
811 Main avionics compartment−door
BL0.00
A LBL27.00
STGR20R
WL73.00
(STGR17.00)
B
STGR20L
A
C
D STGR20
1
C 3
DOUBLER
(REF)
D 2
STGR22 B
VIEW LOOKING AFT AT FS409 +128 OUTER SKIN
C C (REF)
LEFT SIDE SHOWN, RIGHT SIDE OPPOSITE
1
3
LEGEND
1. Angle.
rnd5341200_001.dg, gb/lr, apr15/2006
2. Splice angle.
3. Ahgle. 2
OUTER SKIN
(REF) D D
DETAILED INSPECTION OF THE FS559.00 PRESSURE BULKHEAD WEB AND CAP ANGLE
LOCAL TO BL9.00 AND BL18.00 LEFT AND RIGHT
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the pressure bulkhead web
(written as the web) and the cap−angle at FS559.00 from BL9.00 to BL18.00 for
cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zone 171and 172 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by by the interior of the fuselage cabin.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft post MODSUM TC601R17941 (Modification of FS559.00 bulkhead web by
adding reinforcement doublers) or Post SB 601R−53−076.
C. Remove or lift the insulation as necessary to get to the inspection area (refer to AMM
TASK 25−81−01−000−801 and/or AMM TASK 25−81−02−000−801).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Web and the Cap−Angle at FS559.00 Local to BL9.00 and
BL18.00
Refer to Figure 1, Figure 2 and, Figure 3.
A. Examine the web (1) at the FS559.00 from the BL9.00 to the BL18.00 and 1 inch (25.4mm)
areas on each side of the posts for cracks, corrosion, and other damage. Make sure you
carefully examine the following areas:
(1) The web chem−mill areas close to the support−aileron mixer attachment points.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−41−202 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Replace any pressure and environmental sealant that was removed from the inspection
areas (refer to SRM TASK 51−23−00).
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
D. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−01−400−801 and/or AMM TASK
25−81−02−400−801).
E. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
F. Install the floor panels that follow:
G. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
WL73.00
RBL18.00
RBL9.00
BL0.00
LBL9.00
LBL18.00
FS559.00
Inspection of the Web and the Cap−Angle at FS559.00 Local to BL9.00 and BL18.00
Figure 1
LEGEND
1. Web.
2. Cap Angle.
3. Cap Angle.
WEB CHEM−MILL
1 (REF)
DOUBLERS
(REF)
3 SUPPORT AILERON
2
rnd5341202_002.dg, mgr, dec15/2010
MIXER (REF)
Inspection of the Web and the Cap−Angle at FS559.00 Local to BL9.00 and BL18.00
Figure 2
FS559.00
WL69.00
1 LEGEND
1. Web.
2. Cap Angle.
DOUBLER 3. Cap Angle.
(REF)
NOTE
Examine the shaded areas
DOUBLER
3 (REF)
WL50.00 2
Inspection of the Web and the Cap−Angle at FS559.00 Local to BL9.00 and BL18.00
Figure 3
DETAILED INSPECTION OF THE FS409+128 VERTICAL BEAMS AT BL0 & BL18 LOCAL TO WL69
AWL 53−41−203
1. General
A. This inspection procedure is used to visually examine FS409+128 vertical beams at BL0 &
BL18 local to WL69 for cracks, corrosion and other damage.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft Post SB 601R−53−083.
REFERENCE DESIGNATION
Commercially Available Explosion Proof−Flashlight
Commercially Available Mirror−Telescopic
Commercially Available Magnifying Glass − 10 Power
B. Reference Information
4. Job Set−Up
A. Open the access doors that follow:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
811 Main avionics door−compartment
B. Remove or lift the fiberglass and foam insulation as necessary to get to the inspection
area (AMM 25−81−02−000−801).
C. Make sure the inspection area is clean.
D. If necessary, remove the water−displacing corrosion−inhibiting compound (CIC) with a
lint−free cloth and solvent (SRM 51−26−00).
E. If necessary, remove the sealant.
F. If the finish in the inspection area is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish.
5. Procedure
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Do the detailed inspection of the FS409+128 vertical beams at BL0 &BL18 local to WL69
as follows:
(1) Examine the items that follow:
− Fwd flanges
− Web
− Reinforce strap
(2) Make sure you carefully examine the fastener holes attaching the strap to the
flanges.
(3) Examine the areas for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
(4) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
B. If necessary, send a defect and damage report to MHI RJ Group (SRM 51−13−01).
6. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish.
B. If necessary, apply water−displacing corrosion−inhibiting compound (CIC) to the
applicable surfaces.
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
D. Install the fiberglass and foam insulation (AMM 25−81−02−400−801).
E. Close the access doors that follow:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
811 Main avionics door−compartment
FS409.00 +128 A
WL69.00
RBL18.00
BL0.00
LBL18.00
STGR20
C
C WL73.00
LEGEND (STGR17.00)
A STGR20
1. Vertical beam at BL0.00 channel.
2. Vertical beam at BL0.00 channel.
3. Vertical beam at BL18.00 channel.
4. Vertical beam at BL18.00 channel.
NOTES
B
1 Shaded areas to be inspected on C−channels
(flange and web).
B
3 2 View looking Aft on vertical beam C−channels
4 at FS409+128.
END OF STRAP B
1
1 2
0.50 in.
(12.70 mm) END OF STRAP
1
WL69.00
0.50 in.
rnd5341199_002.dg, YL, May 21, 2014
(12.70 mm)
C BL18.00 2
D BL0.00 2
Detailed Inspection of the FS409+128 VERTICAL BEAMS AT BL0 & BL18 LOCAL TO WL69
Figure 1
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the rear pressure bulkhead at FS621.00
above and below the floor.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1 General
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM).
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The areas are in Zones 170, 280 and 310 (Refer to NDTM Part 1 General,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the area to be inspected is from the Aft equipment compartment door
311BB (Refer to NDTM Part 1 General, 51−01−04).
E. Parts Examined in This Procedure
Refer to Table 1.
Table 1 − Part Identification Data
ITEM
DRAWING OR PART
NO. DESCRIPTION MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
NUMBER [2]
[1]
2024−T3 AL ALY
1 Bulkhead Web QQ−A−250/5
ALCD SH
Z−Member Vertical 2024−T8511 AL ALY
2 601R36008 QQ−A−200/3
Stiffener EXTRN
2024−T3 AL ALY
3 Doubler
ALCD SH
QQ−A250/13
2024−T42 AL ALY
4 Splice Fitting 600−36000
ALCD SH
2024−T3 AL ALY
5 Angle QQ−A−250/5
ALCD SH
601R36008
6 Attaching Clip Angle
− −
7 Intercostal
NOTE [1]: Item numbers correspond to item numbers in Figure 1.
NOTE [2]: Numbers that do not include a dashed suffix are drawing numbers.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
3. Tools and Equipment
A. Use the equipment that follows:
− Light source
− Inspection mirror.
4. Preparation and Cleaning
A. Procedure
(1) Identify the locations to be inspected.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(2) Open the aft equipment compartment access door 311BB to get access to the rear
pressure bulkhead.
(3) Remove the APU enclosure assembly (Refer to AMM TASK 49−11−01−000−801).
(4) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(5) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, go directly to the inspection.
(6) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Rear Pressure Bulkhead at FS621.00
Refer to the area shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the entire rear pressure bulkhead including the bulkhead web, vertical
stiffeners, attaching clip angles, doublers, splice fittings, and intercostals.
(2) Pay particular attention to the vertical stiffener aft mid flange, bulkhead cut−outs and
the following attachments:
− Attaching clip angles
− Bulkhead web to floor
− Bulkhead web to vertical stiffener
− Bulkhead web to intercostal
− Splice fitting
− Bulkhead web to engine support beam.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−61−101 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
(3) Examine all fasteners of the bulkhead web for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or
other unserviceable conditions.
6. Acceptance or Rejection Criteria
A. All signs of corrosion or cracks are cause for rejection.
B. All signs of damaged fasteners are cause for rejection.
C. Record and report results in accordance with company guidelines and policies.
D. For indications that exceed the allowable limits, it is recommended that you contact
MHIRJ Customer Support (refer to SRM 51−13−01).
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
C. Install the APU and the complete APU enclosure (Refer to AMM TASK
49−11−01−400−801).
D. Close the aft equipment compartment access door 311BB (Refer to the AMM, Chapter 6).
ANGLE
ASSEMBLY
5
FITTING
4
INTERCOSTAL VERTICAL
7 STIFFENER
2
ATTACHING CLIP
ANGLE
6
VERTICAL 1
STIFFENER
2 VERTICAL
STIFFENER
2
B
C
TYPICAL 4 PLACES
Inspection of the Rear Pressure Bulkhead at FS621.00
Figure 1
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the longeron, STGR1, and
doubler between FS712.00 and FS721.00 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 311 and 312 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is through the aft equipment compartment.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
− Light source
− Inspection mirror.
ACCESS DESIGNATION
311BB Aft−equipment compartment door
5. Inspection for Damage to the Longeron, STGR1, and Doubler between FS712.00 and
FS721.00
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the longeron (1), STGR1 (2), and 1.0 in (25.4 mm) of the adjacent doubler
(3) between FS712.00 and FS721.00 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
D. Close the access door that follows:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
311BB Aft−equipment compartment door
NOTES
Examine shaded area.
Left side is shown, right side
is almost the same.
LEGEND
1. Longeron.
2. STGR 1.
3. Doubler.
STGR 1 STGR 2
STGR 0
VIEW LOOKING UP
Inspection of the Longeron, STGR1, and Doubler between FS712.00 and FS721.00
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
SHIM
3 (REF)
1.0 in.
RAM AIR (24.5 mm)
INTAKE
ANGLE
(REF) 1
STGR 1
1.0 in.
(24.5 mm)
SKIN
(REF)
FS712.00 FS718.00 FS721.00
VIEW LOOKING UP
2
rnd5361104_002.dg, gw, dec16/2009
SHIM
(REF)
Inspection of the Longeron, STGR1, and Doubler between FS712.00 and FS721.00
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the cap angle of the rear pressure
bulkhead (RPB) at FS621.00 as well as a 1.0−inch (25.4−mm) width of the bulkhead
web above WL78.00.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1 General
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM).
C. Location
(1) The RPB is located in the aft equipment compartment, above and below the floor.
(2) The area of inspection is in Zone 280 (Refer to Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the inspection area is through the cargo compartment door (Refer to
Part1, 51−01−03).
(2) It is necessary to remove the cargo compartment rear bulkhead linings to access the
inspection area.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft, including those with modification summary TC601R16159 or TC601R16430
incorporated.
3. Tools and Equipment
A. Use the equipment that follows:
− Light source
− Inspection mirror.
4. Preparation and Cleaning
A. Procedure
(1) Remove the cargo compartment rear bulkhead linings (Refer to AMM Task
25−52−01−000−802).
(2) Identify the locations to be inspected.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(3) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless it shows
deterioration or local damage.
(4) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, chapter 51).
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the cap angles of the rear pressure bulkhead as well as a 1.0−inch
(25.4−mm) wide strip of the bulkhead web that is next to the cap angles above
WL78.00.
(2) Examine all fasteners of the cap angles and a the narrow adjoining perimeter of the
bulkhead web for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other unserviceable condition.
6. Acceptance or Rejection Criteria
A. All signs of corrosion or cracks are cause for rejection.
B. All signs of damaged fasteners are cause for rejection.
C. Record and report results in accordance with company guidelines and policies.
D. For indications that exceed the allowable limits, it is recommended that you contact
MHIRJ Customer Support (refer to SRM 51−13−01).
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Install the cargo compartment rear bulkhead linings (Refer to AMM Task
25−52−01−400−802).
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
NOTE LEGEND
Examine the shaded 1. Right upper cap.
area. 2. Upper web.
3. Left upper cap.
4. Left lower cap.
5. Lower web.
A 1 6. Right lower cap.
2
WL78.00
A
rnd5361105_001.dg, rm, 24/08/05
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the drag angle of the rear
fuselage−to−vertical stabilizer (written as drag angle) between FS718.00 and
VS81.79% at STGR2 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 310 and 350 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the external surface of the fuselage.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 1
53−61−106 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
5. Inspection for Damage to the Drag Angle between FS718.00 and VS81.79% at STGR2
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the drag angle (1) and 1.0 in. (25.4 mm) of the adjacent top skin panel (2),
side skin panel (3), and vertical stabilizer skin panel (4) between FS718.00 and
VS81.79% at STGR2 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage. Make sure you
carefully examine the drag angle 3.0 in. (76.2 mm) forward to 3.0 in. (76.2 mm) aft of
FS755.00.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−61−106 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
RAM AIR
INTAKE FAIRING
VS81.70%
(REF) 1 4
1.0 in.
(25.4 mm) 3
FS755.00
1.0 in.
(25.4 mm)
FS718.00
UP
1.0 in.
(25.4 mm) FWD
rnd5361106_001.dc, gw, dec10/2009
NOTES
Left side shown, right side
almost the same.
1 Area to be examined.
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the floor beams attachment
structure to the rear pressure bulkhead from FS609.00 to FS621.00, BL9.00 and
BL27.00, and between WL69.00 and WL73.00 for cracks, corrosion, and other
damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 172 and 172 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is through the cargo compartment.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
− Light source
− Inspection mirror
− Borescope, if required.
ACCESS DESIGNATION
834 Cargo door
(2) Remove the cargo compartment floor panels that follow (refer to AMM TASK
53−01−01−000−802):
ACCESS DESIGNATION
281DLF Floor panel
281JLF Floor panel
281LLF Floor panel
282GRF Floor panel
282KRF Floor panel
(3) Remove or lift the insulation as necessary to get to the inspection area (refer to AMM
TASK 25−81−02−000−801).
(4) Identify the locations to be examined (refer to Figure 1).
(5) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(6) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(7) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Floor Beams Attachment Structure to the Rear Pressure
Bulkhead from FS609.00 to FS621.00, BL9.00 and BL27.00, and between WL69.00 and
WL73.00
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the areas that follow from FS609.00 to FS621.00, BL9.00 and BL27.00, and
between WL69.00 and WL73.00 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage:
− Floor beam end fitting (1)
− Floor rail fitting (2)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−61−108 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
− Seat rail beam (3) and adjacent structure up to a length of 12.0 in (304.8 mm)
forward of the pressure bulkhead
− Forward side of the bulkhead web (4) 1.0 in. (25.4 mm) around the perimeter of
the adjacent fittings.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−02−400−801).
D. Install the cargo compartment floor panels that follow (refer to AMM TASK
53−01−01−400−802):
ACCESS DESIGNATION
282KRF Floor panel
282GRF Floor panel
281LLF Floor panel
281JLF Floor panel
281DLF Floor panel
ACCESS DESIGNATION
834 Cargo door
F. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
FS621.00
FS559.00
+112
A
BL27.0
BL9.0
FWD
LEGEND BL9.0
1. Floor beam end fitting. BL27.0
2. Floor rail fitting.
3. Seat rail beam. A
4. Bulkhead web.
NOTE 2
Shaded area is to 4
be inspected.
12.0 in.
(304.8 mm)
3
1
Inspection of the Floor Beam Attachment Structure to the Rear Pressure Bulkhead from
FS609.00 to FS621.00, BL9.00 and BL27.00, and between WL69.00 and WL73.00
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 4
53−61−108 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
STA. STA.
605.00 621.00
3
BL9.00
STA. STA.
605.00 2 621.00
WL73.00
12.0 in.
(304.8 mm)
BL0.00 BL9.00
4
1.0 in.
(25.4 mm)
INSPECTION OF THE SKIN PANEL LOCAL TO THE REAR PRESSURE BULKHEAD STGR7L TO
STGR7R
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the top skin, side skin,
stringers and doublers from FS615.00 to FS631.30 between STGR7L and STGR7R
for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 281, 282, 311 and 312 (refer to NDTM TASK
Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is through the aft equipment compartment and cargo door.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
ACCESS DESIGNATION
311BB Aft−equipment compartment door
834AZ Cargo door
(2) As necessary, remove cargo compartment sidewall linings (refer to AMM TASK
25−52−01−000−801).
(3) As necessary, remove cargo compartment rear bulkhead linings (refer to AMM TASK
25−52−01−000−802).
(4) Identify the locations to be examined (refer to Figure 1).
(5) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(6) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(7) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Top Skin Panel, Stringers, and Doubler
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the areas that follow from 6.0 in. (152.4 mm) forward of FS621.00 to 6.0 in.
(152.4 mm) aft of FS625.30 between STGR7L and STGR7R for cracks, corrosion,
and other damage:
− External surfaces of the top (1) and side (4) skin panels
− Stringer (2) and 1.0 in (25.4 mm) of the adjacent doubler (3).
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−61−113 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
D. As necessary,install cargo compartment sidewall linings (refer to AMM TASK
25−52−01−400−801).
E. As necessary, install cargo compartment rear bulkhead linings (refer to AMM TASK
25−52−01−400−802).
F. Close the access door that follows:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
311BB Aft−equipment compartment door
834AZ Cargo door
FS625.30
FS625.30
FS621.00
STGR 0
2 2
STGR 1
2
STGR 2
2 2
3
STGR 3
1
2
STGR 4
2 2
STGR 5
STRG 6
rnd5361113_001.dg, gw, dec14/2009
FWD
VIEW LOOKING DOWN
OUTBD
LEGEND NOTES
1. Skin, top. Left side shown, right side
2. Stringer. is almost the same.
3. Doubler. Area to be inspected.
FS625.30
FS621.00 FS640.00
6.0 in. 6.0 in.
(152.4 mm) (152.4 mm)
STGR 6
2 2 3 4
STRG 7
STRG 8
FWD
LEGEND NOTES
2. Stringer. Left side shown, right side
3. Doubler. is almost the same.
4. Side skin. Area to be inspected.
1. General
A. The nondestructive testing procedure that follows is for the inspection of the rear
pressure−bulkhead webs and splice at FS621.00. This procedure is applicable to the left
side and the right side.
2. Effectivity
A. Aircraft Serial Nos. 8026 to 8029, 8031 to 8033, 8035 to 8999.
REFERENCE DESIGNATION
Commercially Available Explosion Proof−Flashlight
Commercially Available Mirror−Telescopic
Commercially Available Magnifying Glass − 10 Power
B. Parts
DRAWING MATERIAL
ITEM DESCRIPTION
NUMBER SPECIFICATION
2024−T3
1 Web, Upper 601R360081
AL ALY SH
2024−T3
2 Web, Lower 601R360082
AL ALY SH
2024−T3
3 Splice 601R360088
AL ALY SH
C. Reference Information
4. Job Set−Up
A. Open the access door that follows:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
834 Cargo door
B. Remove the bulkhead protective barrier on the rear pressure bulkhead (AMM
53−61−19−000−801).
C. Remove the access panels that follow:
5. Procedure
Refer to Figure 1.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−61−147 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
6. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish.
B. If necessary, apply water−displacing corrosion−inhibiting compound (CIC) to the
applicable surfaces (TASK 51−25−56−390−802).
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
D. Install the fiberglass and foam insulation (AMM 25−81−02−400−801).
E. Install the single−layer fiberglass insulation (AMM 25−81−01−400−801).
F. Install the access panels that follow:
G. Install the bulkhead protective barrier on the rear pressure bulkhead (AMM
53−61−19−400−801).
H. Close the access door that follows:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
834 Cargo door
CLIPS (REF)
3 A
1
LEGEND
1. Web, upper.
2. Web, lower.
3. Splice.
1. General
A. Function
This inspection is used to visually examine the parts of the engine support beam that were
not examined in NDTM Part 4, 53−61−152 or NDTM Part 6, 53−61−152:
− Complete upper web from the edge of the engine support beam not covered by
doubler or cap angles
− Lower web not covered by doubler or cap angles
− Forward and aft sides of engine support beam
− Angles
− Shims.
B. Reference Information
For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information, and 51−20−06
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
The inspection area is in Zone 311/312 (Refer to the NDTM, Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the engine support beam is through the aft−equipment compartment door
311BB.
(2) It is recommended that the auxiliary power unit (APU) and the complete APU
enclosure be removed to gain access to the engine support beam.
E. Parts Examined in This Procedure
For aircraft repaired per kit K601R35011 (modification summary TC601R16420)
incorporated, refer to Table 1.
For aircraft repaired per modification summary TC601R16486 or kit K601R35012
incorporated, refer to Table 2.
For aircraft repaired per REO 601R−53−61−870, refer to Table 3.
Table 1 − Part Identification Data for Aircraft Post TC601R16420 (Kit Drawing K601R35011)
Table 1 − Part Identification Data for Aircraft Post TC601R16420 (Kit Drawing K601R35011)
(Continued)
ITEM DRAWING OR PART
DESCRIPTION MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
No. [1] NUMBER [2]
601−35006 2024−T42 Al Alloy
y AMS
601R−99002−49 Alcd Sheet QQ−A−250/5
601−35006
3 Angle 7050−T76511 AMS 4340
601R−53−61−345
601−35006 7075−T62 Al Alloy
y AMS
601R−53−61−345 Alcd Sheet QQ−A−250/13
2024−T3 Al Alloy Alcd AMS
601R−53−61−345
Sheet QQ−A−250/5
2024−T3 Al Alloy Alcd AMS
4 Shim Sheet QQ−A−250/5
K601R35011 S10249
1100 Al Sheet MIL−S−22499
QQ−A−250/1
7075−T62 Al Alloy AMS
Clip 601−35006−73, −77
Alcd Sheet QQ−A−250/13
Note [1]: Item numbers correspond to item numbers in Figure 1.
Note [2]: Numbers that do not include a dashed suffix are drawing numbers.
Table 2 − Part Identification Data for Aircraft Post TC601R16486 (Kit Drawing K601R35012)
Table 2 − Part Identification Data for Aircraft Post TC601R16486 (Kit Drawing K601R35012)
(Continued)
ITEM DRAWING OR PART
DESCRIPTION MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
No. [1] NUMBER [2]
2024−T3 Al Alloy Alcd AMS
Sheet QQ−A−250/5
4 Shim K601R35012 S10249
1100 Al Sheet MIL−S−22499
QQ−A−250/1
7075−T62 Al Alloy AMS
Clip 601−35006−73, −77
Alcd Sheet QQ−A−250/13
Note [1]: Item numbers correspond to item numbers in Figure 1.
Note [2]: Numbers that do not include a dashed suffix are drawing numbers.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft post one of the following configurations:
− TC601R16420 (SB601R−53−068 Part A (Kit K601R35011))
− TC601R16486 (SB601R−53−068 Part B (Kit K601R35012))
− REO 601R−53−61−870.
NOTE: NDTM Part 4, 53−61−152 and NDTM Part 6, 53−61−152 must be accomplished in
order to complete the full inspection.
A. Procedure
(1) Open the aft−equipment compartment door 311BB to get access to the engine
support beam (Refer to Part 1, 51−01−04).
(2) Remove the auxiliary power unit (APU) and the complete APU enclosure (Refer to
AMM Task 49−11−01−000−801).
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(3) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless it shows
deterioration or local damage.
(4) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, Chapter 51).
A. Inspection Procedure
NOTE: If the surfaces of any component are painted, look at the paint condition (for
signs of cracks and corrosion) in the component material.
(1) Visually examine the engine support beam. Pay particular attention to the areas that
follow:
− Upper, lower, forward, and aft webs not covered by the upper or lower doubler
− Horizontal and vertical angles
− Shims
− Clips.
(2) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
3
A
1
B
NOTE LBL36.20
1
Examine the shaded areas.
LBL27.50
LBL18.00
LBL9.50
BL0.00
RBL9.50
RBL36.20
RBL18.00 1 FS625.30
A
RBL27.50
RBL27.50
RBL18.00
RBL36.20
FS640.00 RBL9.50
BL0.0
LBL9.50
4
LBL18.00
LBL27.50
LBL36.20 2
LEGEND
1. Web.
B 2. Web.
3. Angle.
4. Shim.
7. Close Out
A. Make sure that NDTM Part 4, 53−61−152 and NDTM Part 6, 53−61−152 have been
completed.
B. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
C. Install the APU and the complete APU enclosure (Refer to AMM Task
49−11−01−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
E. Close the aft−equipment compartment door (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−04).
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the bulkhead webs at FS621.00 for
cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is in Zone 280 (Refer to the NDTM, Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the inspection area is through the cargo compartment door.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft post modification summary TC601R16430.
A. Procedure
(1) Remove the cargo compartment rear bulkhead linings (Refer to AMM Task
25−52−01−000−802).
(2) Remove the protective barrier from the rear pressure bulkhead (Refer to AMM Task
53−61−19−000−801).
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(3) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless it shows
deterioration or local damage.
(4) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, Chapter 51).
A. Inspection Procedure
NOTE: If the surfaces of any component are painted, look at the paint condition (for
signs of cracks and corrosion) in the component material.
(1) Examine the areas that follow:
− Bulkhead web
− Web splices.
(2) Carefully examine the area where the lintel of the cargo compartment door attaches
to the bulkhead web.
(3) Carefully examine the doublers which are in line with the heel of the Z members in
the zones that follow:
− Zone 1 − WL74.00 to WL110.00 at LBL36.20, LBL27.50, LBL18.00, LBL9.50,
BL0.00, RBL9.50, RBL18.00, RBL27.50, and RBL36.20
− Zone 2 − From WL122.00 to WL140.00 (including the horizontal splice) at
LBL27.50, LBL18.00, LBL9.50, BL0.00, RBL9.50, RBL18.00, and RBL27.50
− Zone 3 − From WL140.00 to the lower edge of the upper cap angle attaching the
rear pressure bulkhead to the fuselage skin at LBL18.00, LBL9.50, BL0.00,
RBL9.50, and RBL18.00.
(4) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
2
LBL9.50
1
WL122.00
LBL27.50
WL110.00
A
3
NOTE
B
Examine the shaded
area.
WL140.00
LEGEND
WL74.00
1. Upper web.
C
2. Splice web.
3. Lower web.
Inspection Zone 1
RBL36.20
Inspection Zone 2
RBL27.50
Inspection Zone 3
RBL18.00
FASTENER RBL9.50
CENTERLINE BL0.00
A
(REF)
LBL18.00
VIEW LOOKING AFT
AT FS621.00
LBL36.20
FASTENER
LINTEL
CENTERLINE
(REF) ATTACHMENT
FITTING
(REF)
B TYPICAL C
Inspection of the Rear Pressure Bulkhead Web Forward Face
Figure 1
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Install the protective barrier on the rear pressure bulkhead (Refer to AMM Task
53−61−19−400−801).
C. Install the cargo compartment rear bulkhead linings (Refer to AMM Task
25−52−01−400−802).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the surround structure of the lavatory
drain mast cut−out for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is in Zone 172 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the external fuselage surface.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(2) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(3) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(4) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−21−00).
A. Inspection Procedure
Refer to Figure 1.
NOTE: If the surfaces of any component are painted, look at the paint condition (for
signs of cracks and corrosion) in the component material.
(1) Examine the external surface of the bottom skin panel (1) from FS605.00 to
FS621.00, between STGR25R and STGR26R in the shaded area. Make sure to
carefully examine the skin around the periphery of the drain mast for cracks or
corrosion.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or
other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Remove all tools, equipment and unwanted materials from the work area.
NOTES
1 Examine shaded area.
FS
621.00
LEGEND
1. Skin.
STRG
25
RBL
8.70
STRG
26
A
FS FS
1 1 621.00 PRE MODSUM TC601R12355 605.00
STRG
25
RBL
8.70
rnd5361155_001.iso, rb, 16dec2008
STRG
26
A
POST MODSUM TC601R12355
Inspection of the Lavatory Drain Mast Cut−Out at FS608.00, between STGR25R and STGR26R
Figure 1
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the rear pressure−bulkhead
web at FS621.00 below WL69.00 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 171 and 172 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is through the cargo compartment.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft pre MODSUM TC601R17063 or SB601R−53−078.
− Inspection mirror
− Borescope, if required.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the forward face visible area of the rear pressure−bulkhead web (1) 0.5 in.
(12.7 mm) inboard and outboard of the Z−member (2) flange heel below WL69.00 at
BL0.0, BL9.5, BL18.0, BL27.5, BL36.20 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the insulation (refer to AMM TASK 25−81−02−400−801).
D. Install the cargo compartment floor panels that follow (Refer to AMM TASK
53−01−01−400−804):
E. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
0.5 in.
(12.7 mm)
0.5 in. TYPICAL
A (12.7 mm) 1
TYPICAL
WL73.00
WL69.00
RBL36.20 LBL36.20
RBL27.50 B B LBL27.50
WL45.00
RBL18.00 LBL18.00
RBL9.50 LBL9.50
BL0.00 NOTES
1 Examine the shaded area.
A
0.50 in. (12.7 mm).
VIEW LOOKING AFT
LEGEND Z member installation
typical for BL0.00,
1. Pressure bulkhead web.
2. Z member. LBL9.50, LBL18.00.
Z member installation
typical for RBL9.50,
RBL18.00, RBL27.50,
BL0.00 RBL9.50 and RBL36.20.
2
HEEL OF Z
MEMBER FLANGE
rnd5361156_001.dg, gb, 19/01/10
FS621.00
1 1
B B
1. General
A. The nondestructive testing procedure that follows is for the inspection of the rear pressure
bulkhead forward face below floor surface/subsurface cracks.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft post MODSUM TC601R17063 / Post SB 601R−53−078.
REFERENCE DESIGNATION
Commercially Available Explosion Proof−Flashlight
Commercially Available Mirror−Telescopic
Commercially Available Magnifying Glass − 10 Power
Commercially Available Borescope
B. Parts
DRAWING MATERIAL
ITEM DESCRIPTION
NUMBER SPECIFICATION
1 Pressure bulkhead web reinforce doubler K601R36014 QQ−A250/12
C. Reference Information
4. Job Set−Up
A. Remove the cargo compartment floor panels that follow (AMM 53−01−01−000−804):
ACCESS DESIGNATION
281DLF Floor panel
281JLF Floor panel
281LLF Floor panel
282GRF Floor panel
282KRF Floor panel
B. Remove or lift the fiberglass and foam insulation as necessary to get to the inspection
area (AMM 25−81−02−000−801).
C. Make sure the inspection area is clean.
D. If necessary, remove the water−displacing corrosion−inhibiting compound (CIC) with a
lint−free cloth and solvent (SRM 51−26−00).
E. If necessary, remove the sealant.
F. If the finish in the inspection area is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish.
5. Procedure
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Do the detailed inspection of the rear pressure bulkhead FWD face below floor as follows:
(1) Examine the forward face visible area of the reinforcing doubler (1) of the rear
pressure−bulkhead web between LBL27.0 and RBL27.0 for cracks, corrosion and
other damage.
(2) Pay particular attention in line with the heels of the vertical z stiffeners.
(3) Examine the area for cracks, corrosion, and other damage. Make sure you carefully
examine
(4) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
B. If necessary, send a defect and damage report to MHI RJ Group (SRM 51−13−01).
6. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish.
B. Install the fiberglass and foam insulation (AMM 25−81−02−400−801).
C. Install the cargo compartment floor panels that follow (AMM 53−01−01−000−804):
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−61−157 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
ACCESS DESIGNATION
281DLF Floor panel
281JLF Floor panel
281LLF Floor panel
282GRF Floor panel
282KRF Floor panel
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
1
A
WL69.00
B B
RBL36.20
LBL36.20
RBL27.50
RBL18.00 LBL27.50
LBL18.00
RBL9.50 BL0.00 LBL9.50
RBL13.75 LBL13.75
A
VIEW LOOKING AFT
BL0.00
Z−MEMBER
(REF)
LEGEND
1. Pressure bulkhead web.
HEEL OF Z
MEMBER FLANGE
rnd5361157_001.dg, kp, June 13, 2014
NOTE
1 Examine the shaded area.
FS621.00
B B 1
Detailed Inspection of the rear pressure bulkhead FWD face below floor
Figure 1
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine from the top part of the
FS755.00 bulkhead to WL125.00 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: The frame is refered to as the bulkhead in this procedure.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 351 and 352 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is through the aft equipment compartment.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
− Light source
− Inspection mirror.
ACCESS DESIGNATION
311BB Aft−equipment compartment door
(2) Identify the locations to be examined (refer to Figure 1).
(3) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(4) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(5) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection for Damage From the Top Part of the FS755.00 Bulkhead to WL125.00
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the forward and aft side of the FS755.00 bulkhead from WL125.00 to
WL138.50 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage. Make sure you carefully
examine the areas that follow:
− Forward (1) and aft (2) angle from BL0.00 to 3.0 in. (76.2 mm) outboard of the
vertical stabilizer−to−frame attachment fittings
− Upper web (3) and doubler (4)
− Reinforcing plate (5).
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−71−101 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
D. Close the access door that follows:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
311BB Aft−equipment compartment door
WL FS
A 125.00 755.00
FWD
LEGEND NOTE
1. Forward angle. Inspect shaded area. A
2. Aft angle.
3. Upper web.
4. Doubler.
5. Reinforcing plate.
VERTICAL
STABILIZER−TO−FRAME 2
4
ATTACHMENT FITTING BL 0.00
(REF)
BL 6.93
5
WL
131.35
WL
128.30
WL
125.00
rnd5371101_001.dg, gw, may26/2009
UP
3 4
OUTBD
SKIN
(REF)
WL WL WL
135.57 131.35 125.00
2 3
FS 755.00
UP
5 4
1 FWD
WL WL
135.43 125.00
FS 755.00
5 UP
FWD
LEGEND
rnd5371101_002.dg, gw, may26/2009
1. Forward angle.
2. Aft angle.
3. Upper web.
4. Doubler.
5. Reinforcing plate.
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the stringer extensions where
they are attached to the VS31.875% and VS55.625% canted frames for cracks,
corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 351 and 352 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is through the aft equipment compartment.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 1
53−71−102 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
ACCESS DESIGNATION
311BB Aft−equipment compartment door
(2) Identify the locations to be examined (refer to Figure 1).
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(3) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(4) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(5) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Stringer Extensions Where they are Attached to the VS31.875%
and VS55.625% Canted Frames
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the stringer extensions (1) and (5) and 2.0 in. (25.2 mm) of the adjacent
structure that follow at VS31.875% and VS55.625% for cracks, corrosion, and other
damage:
− Webs (2) and (6)
− Reinforcing angles (3), (4), (7), and (8).
(2) Make sure you carefully examine where the stringer extensions are attached to the
reinforcing angles (4 & 8).
(3) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
D. Close the access door that follows:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
311BB Aft−equipment compartment door
67.5%
55.625%
43.75%
31.875%
NOTE
Examine the shaded area.
LEGEND
1. Stringer extension.
2. Web.
3. Reinforcing angle.
4. Reinforcing angle. FS755.00
4 3 1 2.0 in.
(25.2 mm)
2 2.0 in.
(25.2 mm)
rnd5371102_001.dg, kmw, aug10/2009
Inspection of the Stringer Extensions Where they are Attached to the VS31.875% Canted Frame
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
67.5%
55.625%
43.75% NOTES
31.875% Examine the shaded area.
LEGEND
5. Stringer extension.
6. Web.
7. Reinforcing angle.
8. Reinforcing angle.
2.0 in.
FS755.00 (25.2 mm)
2.0 in.
(25.2 mm)
UP
7
OUTBD
6
rnd5371102_002.dg, kmw, Jun19/2009
Inspection of the Stringer Extensions Where they are Attached to the VS55.625% Canted Frame
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the vertical stabilizer
rear−spar where it is attached to the VS67.5% canted frame for cracks, corrosion,
and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 361 and 362 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is through the tail cone compartment.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
− Light source
− Inspection mirror.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the vertical stabilizer rear−spar (1) where it is attached to the VS67.5%
canted frame and 3.0 in. (76.2 mm) of the adjacent structure for cracks, corrosion,
and other damage. Make sure you carefully examine where the vertical stabilizer
rear−spar is attached to the:
− Upper web (2)
− Upper skin angle (3)
− Reinforcing web (4).
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−71−103 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
LEGEND A
1. Vertical stabilizer
rear−spar.
2. Upper web.
3. Upper skin angle.
4. Reinforcing web. BL0.00
NOTE
Examine shaded area. 2
1
INSPECTION OF THE VERTICAL STABILIZER MID SPAR AND FUSELAGE FRAME AT VS43.75%
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the vertical stabilizer mid−spar
where it is attached to the VS43.75% canted frame for cracks, corrosion, and other
damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 351 and 352 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is through the aft equipment compartment.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
− Light source
− Inspection mirror.
ACCESS DESIGNATION
311BB Aft−equipment compartment door
(2) Identify the locations to be examined (refer to Figure 1).
(3) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(4) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(5) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the vertical stabilizer mid−spar (1) where it is attached to the VS43.75%
canted frame and 3.0 in. (76.2 mm) of the adjacent structure for cracks, corrosion,
and other damage. Make sure you carefully examine where the vertical stabilizer
mid−spar is attached to the:
− Upper web (2)
− Angle (3)
− Reinforcing plate (4).
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−71−104 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
D. Close the access door that follows:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
311BB Aft−equipment compartment door
67.5%
55.625%
LEGEND 43.75%
31.875%
1. Vertical stabilizer mid−spar.
2. Upper web.
3. Angle.
4. Reinforcing plate.
NOTE
Examine shaded areas.
BL0.00
3.0 in. 3.0 in.
(76.2 mm) (76.2 mm)
1
3 4
FS755.00
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the vertical stabilizer front
spar−to−frame fittings and the adjacent frame structure at FS755.00 for cracks,
corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 351 and 352 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is through the aft equipment compartment.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
ACCESS DESIGNATION
311BB Aft−equipment compartment door
5. Inspection for Damage to the Vertical Stabilizer Front Spar−to−Frame Fittings and the
Adjacent Frame Structure at FS755.00
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the vertical stabilizer front spar−to−frame fittings (1) where they are
attached to the FS755.00 frame for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
(2) Examine the forward and aft surfaces of the adjacent frame structure that follows at
FS755.00 from WL130.00 to WL138.50 and from LBL12.0 to RBL12.0:
− Forward (2) and aft (3) angle
− Upper web (4)
− C member (5)
− Reinforcing plate (6).
(3) Make sure you carefully examine where the vertical stabilizer front spar−to−frame
fittings (1) are attached to the C member (5) and the reinforcing plate (6) at the
Hi−Lok fasteners areas.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
53−71−105 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
(4) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
D. Close the access door that follows:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
311BB Aft−equipment compartment door
WL
A 125.00
FS
755.00
FWD
A
LEGEND
1. Vertical stabilizer front spar−to−frame
attachment fitting.
2. Forward angle.
3. Aft angle.
4. Upper web.
5. C member. 1
6. Reinforcing plate.
BL 0.00
NOTE BL 12.00
Inspect shaded area.
WL
130.00
WL
125.00
rnd5371105_001.dg, gv/kmw, dec07/2009
UP
4
OUTBD
Inspection of the Vertical Stabilizer Front Spar−to−Frame Fittings and the Adjacent Frame
Structure at FS755.00.
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 4
53−71−105 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
FWD
OUTBD
5
FS 755.00
3 1 4 6
HI−LOK
FASTENERS
(REF)
LEGEND
1. Vertical stabilizer front spar−to−frame
attachment fitting.
2. Forward angle.
rnd5371105_002.dg, gv, sep11/2009
3. Aft angle.
4. Upper web.
5. C member.
6. Reinforcing plate.
Inspection of the Vertical Stabilizer Front Spar−to−Frame Fittings and the Adjacent Frame
Structure at FS755.00.
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 5
53−71−105 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
AWL 54−10−104
1. General
A. This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the nose cowl attachment−ring for
cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
REFERENCE DESIGNATION
Commercially Available Explosion Proof−Flashlight
Commercially Available Mirror−Telescopic
Commercially Available Magnifying Glass − 10 Power
B. Parts
DRAWING MATERIAL
ITEM DESCRIPTION
NUMBER SPECIFICATION
7075−T73 ROLL
1 Nose Cowl Attachment−Ring 228−50056
RING FORG
C. Reference Information
4. Job Set−Up
A. Remove the lower nose access−cowl (AMM 71−14−01−000−802).
B. Remove the upper nose access−cowl (AMM 71−14−01−000−801).
C. Make sure the inspection area is clean.
D. If the finish in the inspection area is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish.
5. Procedure
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Do the detailed inspection of the part as follows:
(1) Examine the nose cowl attachment−ring (1) for cracks, corrosion, and other
damage. Make sure you carefully examine the fastener holes and the machined
radius.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
B. If necessary, send a defect and damage report to MHI RJ Group (SRM 51−13−01).
6. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish.
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
C. Install the upper nose access−cowl (AMM 71−14−01−400−801).
D. Install the lower nose access−cowl (AMM 71−14−01−400−802).
NOTES
1. Examine shaded areas.
XN135.84
INSPECTION OF THE TOP AND BOTTOM PYLON SKINS FROM FS672.00 TO FS682.00
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the top and bottom pylon
skins and their support structure for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection areas are found in Zones 412 and 422 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the exterior of the aircraft.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
5. Inspection for Damage to the Top and Bottom Pylon Skins and Support Structure from
FS668.00 to FS686.00
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the areas that follow for cracks, corrosion, and other damage:
(a) External and internal sides of the top (1) and bottom (2) pylon skins 4.0 inches
(101.6 mm) forward of FS672.00 to 4.0 inches (101.6 mm) aft of FS682.00.
(b) Support structure at FS672.00 and FS682.00:
− Skin−to−spar doubler (3)
− Cap angle (4)
− Aft engine−mount forward−spar (5)
− Aft engine−mount aft−spar (6)
− Aft engine−mount inboard−rib (7)
− Aft engine−mount outboard−rib (8).
(2) Each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, and other
unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the nacelle/pylon−services access panels (413BB and 423BB) (refer to AMM TASK
54−60−01−400−812).
D. Install the rear mount center−access−panels (412EB and 422EB) (refer to AMM TASK
54−60−01−400−809).
E. Install the lines disconnect outboard−access panels (412DB and 422DB) (refer to AMM
TASK 54−60−01−400−808).
F. Install the rear mount inboard−access−panels (412CB and 422CB) (refer to AMM TASK
54−60−01−400−806).
G. Install the lines disconnect inboard−access panels (412BB and 422BB) (refer to AMM
TASK 54−60−01−000−804).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 3
54−51−102 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
H. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
FS682.00
PBL−7.05
FS672.00
PBL5.20
B
C
A
A
4.0 in.
(101.6 mm) 1 4.0 in.
(101.6 mm)
LEGEND 3
4
1. Top pylon skin. 4 3
2. Bottom pylon skin. 5
3. Skin−to−spar doubler. 6
4. Cap angle.
5. Aft engine−mount forward−spar. 7
6. Aft engine−mount, aft−spar.
7. Aft engine−mount, inboard−rib. 4 4
3 3
8. Aft engine−mount, outboard−rib.
3
4
4 3
5
NOTES
6 1. Examine shaded area.
2. Left side shown,
4 4 right side almost the same.
rnd5451102_001.dg, lr, apr08/2009
3 3
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the pylon canted ribs, pylon
canted−rib splices, and front spar braces for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 412 and 422 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the exterior of the aircraft.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 1
54−51−103 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
5. Inspection for Damage to the Pylon Canted Ribs, Pylon Canted−Rib Splices, and Front Spar
Braces
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the areas that follow between FS625.30 and FS672.20 for cracks,
corrosion, and other damage:
− Pylon top (1) and bottom (2) canted−ribs
− Pylon canted−rib top and bottom splices (3)
− Front spar top and bottom braces (4).
(2) Make sure you carefully examine the areas that follow for cracks, corrosion, and
other damage:
− Pylon canted−rib top and bottom splices (3) that attaches the pylon canted ribs
(1 & 2) to the pylon spar of the forward engine−mount
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
54−51−103 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
− Forward end of the the pylon canted ribs (1 & 2) where they are attached to the
pylon canted−rip top and bottom splices (3)
− Aft end of the the pylon canted ribs (1 & 2) where they are attached to the cap
angle at FS672.00.
(3) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the lines disconnect outboard−access−panels (412DB and 422DB) (refer to AMM
TASK 54−60−01−400−808).
D. Install the lines disconnect inboard−access−panels (412BB and 422BB) (refer to AMM
TASK 54−60−01−400−804).
E. Install the forward mount upper−access−panels (412AT and 422AT) (refer to AMM TASK
54−60−01−400−803).
F. Install the forward mount lower−access−panels (412AB and 422AB) (refer to AMM TASK
54−60−01−400−802).
G. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
FS672.20
FS625.30
A
rnd5451103_001.dg, kmw, Jun09/2009
Inspection of the Pylon Canted Ribs, Pylon Canted−Rib Splices, and Front Spar Braces
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
4 FS640.00 FS654.50
FS625.30
SKIN
(REF) CAP SPAR DOUBLER SKIN
ANGLE (REF) (REF) (REF)
(REF)
DOUBLER
(REF)
1
1
3
PYLON SPAR OF THE 1
FORWARD ENGINE−MOUNT
NOTES
rnd5451103_002.dg, kmw, jul07/2009
FS654.50
FS672.20 2
4
2 PBL
−4.625
FS640.00
FS625.30
VIEW LOOKING UP
AT BOTTOM LEFT SIDE OF
PYLON
Inspection of the Pylon Canted Ribs, Pylon Canted−Rib Splices, and Front Spar Braces
Figure 1 (Sheet 3)
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the screw−jack attach fittings
and support structure for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zone 326 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the exterior of the aircraft.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 1
55−11−102 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
5. Inspection for Damage to the Screw−Jack Attach Fittings and Support Structure
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the screw jack fitting (1) for cracks, corrosion, and other damage. Make
sure you carefully examine the fitting local to the attachment to the horizontal
stabilizer upper spar cap.
(2) Examine the top bathtub fittings (2) and 1.0 in. (25.4 mm) of the adjacent top skin (3)
and doubler (4) for cracks, corrosion, and other damage. Make sure you carefully
examine the corners of the barrel−nut bore, the top edge of the side walls, and the
base at the four attachment fasteners of the bathtub−fittings (2).
(3) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the middle upper fairing 326BT (refer to AMM TASK 55−32−05−400−806).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
A LEGEND
1. Screw jack fitting.
2. Bathtub Fitting.
3. Top skin.
FRONT SPAR 4. Top doubler.
(REF)
NOTES
FWD
Examine the shaded area.
Examine the skin 1.0 in.
C (25.4 mm) around the
bathtub fittings (2).
A
VERTICAL STABILIZER SEPARATED
FROM AIRCRAFT FOR CLARITY
1 2
4
rnd5511102_001.dg, kmw, dec14/2009
3
B C
VIEW LOOKING AFT VIEW LOOKING FORWARD
LEGEND
1. Screw jack fitting.
2. Bathtub fitting.
3. Top skin.
4. Top doubler.
NOTE
Examine the shaded area.
BARREL
NUT
(REF) 2
4
3
1
UPPER
SPAR CAP
(REF)
F/SPAR
DATUM
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the front spar splice at BL6.00
and the front spar and skin assembly from BL6.00 to the tip for cracks, corrosion,
and other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 332 and 342 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the inspection area is from the exterior of the aircraft and through the
lightening holes in the 8% leading edge spar.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
5. Inspection for Damage to the Front Spar Splice at BL6.00 and the Front Spar from BL6.00 to
the Tip
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the forward−spar splice fittings (3) and the front spar web−splice (8) for
cracks, corrosion and other damage:
(2) Examine the components that follow for cracks, corrosion and other damage from
BL6.00 to the tip. Specially examine the areas around the first nine fastener holes
outboard of BL6.00:
− top center−section doubler (4)
− front spar web (5)
− upper (6) and lower (7) caps
− bottom center−section doubler (9).
(3) Examine the outer surface of the upper (1) and lower (2) skins, 2 in. (50.8 mm)
forward and aft of the front spar datum for cracks, corrosion, and other damage,
from BL6.00 to the tip. Specially examine the areas around the first nine fastener
holes outboard of BL6.00.
(4) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
NOTE: Use an applicable borescope probe to examine the internal components.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
FRONT SPAR
DATUM
(REF)
BL 6.00 8 3 5
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm)
DATUM
(REF)
BL 6.00
NOTE BL 0.00
Examine the shaded area.
FIRST
FASTENER
NINTH C
FASTENER
LEGEND
1. Top skin.
2. Bottom skin. 2.0 in. C
3. Forward−spar splice fitting. (50.8 mm)
4. Top center−section doubler. 2.0 in.
5. Front spar web. (50.8 mm)
6. Upper cap.
7. Lower cap.
rnd5511103_002.dg, gv, nov23/2009
B
VIEW LOOKING DOWN ON UPPER SKIN
Inspection of the Horizontal Stabilizer Front Spar Splice at BL6.00 and the Front Spar from
BL6.00 to the Tip
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
SPAR DATUM
(REF)
2 in. 2 in.
(50.8 mm) (50.8 mm)
1
4
6
8
3
7
9
LEGEND
C − C
1. Top skin. 2
2. Bottom skin.
3. Forward−spar splice fitting.
4. Top center−section doubler.
5. Front spar web.
6. Upper cap.
7. Lower cap.
8. Front spar web−splice. NOTE
rnd5511103_003.dg, gv, nov23/2009
Inspection of the Horizontal Stabilizer Front Spar Splice at BL6.00 and the Front Spar from
BL6.00 to the Tip
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 6
55−11−103 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the top skin from BL6.00 to
BL112.00 and the power−control−unit (PCU) fittings of the horizontal stabilizer for
cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 332 and 342 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the external surface of the horizontal stabilizer.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
5. Inspection for Damage to the Top skin from BL6.00 to the BL112.00 and the PCU Fittings of
the Horizontal Stabilizer
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the top surface of the top skin (1) at all fastener locations from BL6.0 to
BL112.0 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage. Make sure you carefully examine
the top skin−to−STGR3 fasteners and, number 1 PCU (outboard) fitting−to−skin
first inboard fastener hole.
(2) Examine all accessible areas of the PCU fittings (2) for cracks, corrosion, and other
damage.
(3) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the access panels that follow:
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
A
LEGEND
1. Top skin.
2. PCU fitting.
NOTES
Examine the shaded area.
Left side is shown, right BL6.00
side is almost the same.
BL0.00
RIB 1
BL112.00 RIB 2
RIB 3
RIB 4
RIB 3A
RIB 5
RIB 6
rnd5511105_001.dg, gw, dec10/2009
STGR1 RIB 7
STGR2
STGR3
STGR4
A
VIEW LOOKING DOWN AT UPPER SKIN
Inspection of the Top Skin from BL6.00 to BL112.00 and the PCU Fittings of the Horizontal
Stabilizer
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 4
55−11−105 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
STGR 3
(REF)
B.L. 6.00
ELEVATOR
(REF) 2
2
2
rnd5511105_002.dg, dec12/2009
Inspection of the Top Skin from BL6.00 to BL112.00 and the PCU Fittings of the Horizontal
Stabilizer
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 5
55−11−105 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
Inspection of the Top Skin from BL6.00 to BL112.00 and the PCU Fittings of the Horizontal
Stabilizer
Figure 1 (Sheet 3)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 6
55−11−105 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the rear spar splice and the
skin structure from the LBL11.00 to the RBL11.00 of the horizontal stabilizer (HS) for
cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zone 332, 326, and 342 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the external side of the horizontal stabilizer.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
5. Inspection for Damage to the HS Rear Spar Splice and the Skin Structure from the LBL11.00
to the RBL11.00
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine externally and internally, the items that follow, 6.0 in. (152.4 mm) forward of
the rear spar datum to the aft edge of the skin between LBL11.00 to RBL11.00 for
cracks, corrosion, and other damage:
− Top and bottom skins (1 & 2)
− Top outer and top inner doublers (3 & 5)
− Bottom outer and bottom inner doublers (4 & 6)
− Top and bottom caps (15 & 17)
− Angle (16).
(2) Examine externally and internally, the items that follow, 2.0 in. (50.8 mm) of the top
rear spar between LBL11.00 to RBL11.00 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage:
− Upper and Lower caps (7 & 8)
− Top forward and top aft fittings (9 & 10)
− Bottom forward and bottom aft fittings (11 & 12)
− Forward and aft webs (13 & 14).
(3) Examine the aft center rib−fitting (18) for cracks, corrosion, and other damage:
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 3
55−11−106 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
(4) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the access panels that follow:
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
A
LEGEND
1. Top skin, horizontal stabilizer.
3. Doubler, outer top center.
5. Doubler, inner top center.
7. Upper cap, rear spar.
9. Fitting, aft−spar, top−aft splice.
10. Fitting, aft−spar, top−forward splice.
11. Fitting, aft−spar, bottom−aft−splice.
15. Top cap, aft center rib.
16. Angle, aft center rib.
NOTE
1 Examine the shaded area.
Left side is shown. Right
side is almost the same.
16 15 FWD
6.00 in. 5
B 3
(152.4 mm)
10
BL 0.00
1 C 1
1
rnd5511106_006.dg, sd, 05/12/09
A
LBL 11.00 RBL 11.00
VIEW LOOKING DOWN
ON UPPER SKIN
Inspection of the HS Rear Spar Splice and the Skin Structure from the LBL11.00 to the RBL11.00
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
LEGEND
1. Top skin, horizontal stabilizer. 10. Fitting, aft−spar, top−forward splice.
2. Bottom skin, horizontal stabilizer. 11. Fitting, aft−spar, bottom−aft splice.
3. Doubler, outer top center. 12. Fitting, aft−spar, bottom−forward splice.
4. Doubler, outer bottom center. 13. Forward web, rear spar.
5. Doubler, inner top center. 14. Aft web, rear spar.
6. Doubler, Inner bottom center. 15. Top cap, aft center rib.
7. Upper cap, rear spar. 16. Angle, aft center rib.
8. Lower cap, rear spar. 17. Bottom cap, aft center rib.
9. Fitting, aft−spar, top−aft splice. 18. Fitting, aft center rib.
FWD
6.0 in. 2.0 in.
(152.4 mm) (50.8 mm)
15 16 3
10
1
5
9 7
13
14
11 6
2
18 R.S. 4
17
12 8 DATUM
rnd5511106_007.dg, sd, 05/12/09
PIVOT FITTING
(REF)
VIEW B B
Inspection of the HS Rear Spar Splice and the Skin Structure from the LBL11.00 to the RBL11.00
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
LEGEND
7. Upper cap, rear spar.
8. Lower cap, rear spar.
9. Fitting, aft−spar, top−aft splice.
11. Fitting, aft−spar, bottom−aft splice.
14. Aft web, rear spar.
2.00 in.
(50.8 mm)
14 9
7
C
rnd5511106_008.dg, sd, 05/12/09
Inspection of the HS Rear Spar Splice and the Skin Structure from the LBL11.00 to the RBL11.00
Figure 1 (Sheet 3)
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the horizontal stabilizer rib at
BL6.00 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zone 332, 342, and 326 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the inspection area is by removal of the vertical stabilizer middle−upper
fairing 326BT and the access panels 332AB and 342AB in the horizontal stabilizer.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the surfaces of the horizontal stabilizer rib (1) at BL6.00, that you can see,
for cracks, corrosion, and other damage. Make sure you carefully examine:
− The edge of the rib lightening hole between the rear spar and the pivot fitting,
specially the top−aft area of the lightening hole.
− The rib local to the radii of the upper STGR3 cut−out.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
55−11−110 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the elevator power−control−unit access−panel (332AB and 342AB) (refer to AMM
TASK 55−12−01−400−801).
D. Install the middle upper fairing 326BT (refer to AMM TASK 55−32−05−400−806).
E. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
LEGEND
1. Horizontal stabilizer BL6.00 rib.
NOTES A
Left side shown, right side is almost the same.
Examine the shaded area.
PIVOT FITTING
CENTERLINE
(REF)
STGR3 CUTOUT
(REF)
POTENTIAL
CRACK SITE
rnd5511110_001.dg, gv/kmw, dec16/2009
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the elevator hinge fittings at
STAB BL15.25, BL24.48, BL55.88, and BL95.49 for cracks, corrosion, and other
damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 332 and 342 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the exterior of the horizontal stabilizer.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
− Light source
− Inspection mirror.
5. Inspection for Damage to the Elevator Hinge Fittings at STAB BL15.25, BL24.48, BL55.88, and
BL95.49
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the hinge fittings (1, 2, 3, and 4) for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
Make sure you carefully examine the following:
(a) fillet radii
(b) stiffening web edges
(c) fastener locations
(d) clevis lugs
(e) hinge attachment lugs
(f) hydraulic line cut−out (on hinge fitting #1 (1) only).
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
55−11−115 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the elevators (refer to AMM TASK 27−34−01−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
NOTES
1. Examine the shaded areas.
2. Left side shown, right side
almost the same.
A
B
BL15.2539
C
1
2
BL24.4884
3
BL55.8865 BL95.493
4
rnd5511115_002.dg, lr, apr08/2009
Inspection of the Elevator Hinge Fittings at STAB BL15.25, BL24.48, BL55.88, and BL95.49
Figure 1
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the horizontal stabilizer
pivot−fitting (written as the pivot fitting), inner and outer pivot pins for cracks,
corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 326 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by removal of the horizontal stabilizer.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
− Inspection mirror.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the pivot fitting (1) inboard and outboard attachment lugs, inner and outer
pivot pins (2 & 3) for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the horizontal stabilizer (refer to AMM TASK 55−10−00−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
NOTE
Inspect shaded area.
HORIZONTAL
STABILIZER
(REF)
VERTICAL
STABILIZER
(REF)
1. General
A. Function
This inspection is used to visually examine the upper spar cap on the elevator front spar
assembly between ribs 4 and 4A for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
The inspection area is in Zone 334/344 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) It is necessary to remove the elevator to get access to the inspection area.
2. Effectivity
All aircraft.
A. Procedure
(1) Remove the elevator (Refer to AMM Task 27−34−01−000−801).
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(2) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00.
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless it shows
deterioration or local damage.
(3) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, Chapter 51).
A. Inspection Procedure
NOTE: If the surfaces of any component are painted, look at the paint condition (for
signs of cracks and corrosion) in the component material.
(1) Examine the areas that follow:
− Front spar
− Doubler
− Upper skin.
NOTE: Pay particular attention to the fastener holes on the upper cap of the front
spar.
(2) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
6. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Install the elevator (Refer to AMM Task 34−01−400−801).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
55−21−101 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
RIB 4
RIB 4A
B
LEGEND
1. Upper skin.
2. Doubler.
3. Front spar.
NOTE
1 Examine the shaded area
between rib 4 and rib 4A.
1
1
POTENTIAL
rnd5521101_001.dg, lr, 06/01/05
CRACK SITE
3
B B
AWL 55−21−107
1. General
A. This inspection is used to visually examine the center and outboard hinge fittings and their
back−up structures in the horizontal stabilizer and elevator. This procedure is applicable
to the left side and the right side. The procedure for the left side is given.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
REFERENCE DESIGNATION
Commercially Available Explosion Proof−Flashlight
Commercially Available Mirror−Telescopic
Commercially Available Magnifying Glass − 10 Power
Commercially Available Borescope
B. Parts
DRAWING MATERIAL
ITEM DESCRIPTION
NUMBER SPECIFICATION
1 Rear spar assembly 601R23058 −
2 Hinge fitting assembly, ES60.525 600−24026 7050−T73652
2024−T3511
3 Hinge fitting support, ES60.525 600−23067 Al alloy extruded
bar and shapes
4 Flutter damper fitting, ES60.525 600−23086 7050−T73651
5 Hinge fitting, ES103.419 600−23077 7050−T73652
2024−T3511
6 Hinge fitting support, ES103.419 600−23067 Al alloy extruded
bar and shapes
7 Inboard hinge fitting, ES60.525
601R24063 7050−T7452
8 Outboard hinge fitting, ES60.525
9 Front spar assembly 600−24026 2024 clad sheet
10 2024−T351
Fitting ES60.525
Fitting, ES60 525 600−24052
11 Al alloy rolled bar
12 Hinge fitting, ES103.419 600−24059 7050−T73652
DRAWING MATERIAL
ITEM DESCRIPTION
NUMBER SPECIFICATION
13 2024−T3511 Al
Rib fitting,
fitting ES103.419
ES103 419 600−24052 alloy extruded bar
14 and shapes
2024−T42 Al
15 Outboard rib No. 13, ES103.419 600−24049
alloy alcd sheet
C. Reference Information
4. Job Set−Up
A. If necessary, remove the elevator (AMM 27−34−01−001−801).
B. Remove the access panels that follow:
5. Procedure
Refer to Figure 1 and Figure 2.
A. Do the detailed inspection of the parts as follows:
(1) Externally, inspect the horizontal stabilizer and elevator center and outboard hinge
fittings. Inspect the local horizontal stabilizer rear spar assembly and the elevator
front spar assembly over an area up to 2.00 in. (50.8 mm) around both fittings for
cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
(2) Internally, inspect the back up structure of the horizontal stabilizer and elevator
center and outboard hinge fittings. Carefully examine the corner radius and the
fittings lugs.
(3) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
B. If necessary, send a defect and damage report to MHI RJ Group (SRM 51−13−01).
6. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish.
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
C. Install the access panels that follow:
NOTES
A
Left side of the aircraft shown. LEGEND
Right side is similar. 1. Rear spar assembly.
1 Examine the shaded area. 2. Hinge fitting assembly.
3. Hinge fitting support.
4. Flutter damper fitting.
A
2.00 in.
D (51.00 mm)
ES 60.525
2.00 in.
(51.00 mm)
ES 60.525
2
1
1
2
3
1
B
rnd5521107_001.dg, rm/mgr, apr.1/13
2.00 in. 3
(51.00 mm) D
2.00 in.
(51.00 mm) 6
ES 103.419 LEGEND
1. Rear spar assembly.
5. Hinge fitting.
6. Hinge fitting support.
1 1
NOTE
1 Examine the shaded
area.
5
2.00 in.
(51.00 mm)
2.00 in.
(51.00 mm)
ES 103.419
1
2.00 in.
(51.00 mm)
ES 60.525
ES 103.419
LEGEND
7. Inboard hinge fitting.
8. Outboard hinge fitting.
9. Front spar assembly.
10. Fitting.
11. Fitting.
2.00 in.
(51.00 mm) 2.00 in.
(51.00 mm)
ES 60.525
2.00 in.
(51.00 mm)
ES 60.525
2.00 in.
(51.00 mm)
10
8 9
rnd5521107_003.dg, rm/hg/mgr, apr.1/2013
NOTES
Left side of the aircraft shown.
Right side is similar. 11
1 Examine the shaded area.
Inspection of the Elevator Front−Spar Hinge−Fittings and Back−Up Structures
Figure 2 (Sheet 1)
2.00 in.
(51.00 mm)
ES 103.419
1
2.00 in.
(51.00 mm)
H 2.00 in.
(51.00 mm)
LEGEND
9. Front spar assembly.
12. Hinge fitting.
13. Rib fitting. ES 103.419
14. Rib fitting.
15. Outboard Rib No.13.
13
14 15
NOTE 2.00 in.
1 Examine the shaded (51.00 mm)
area.
Inspection of the Elevator Front−Spar Hinge−Fittings and Back−Up Structures
Figure 2 (Sheet 2)
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the vertical
stabilizer−to−fuselage attachment fittings (written as fittings) and the adjacent front
spar web for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 323 and 325 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the area is by the aft fuselage fairing.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
5. Inspection for Damage of the Fittings and the Adjacent Front Spar Web
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the fitting (1) at FS755.00 and 2.0 in. (50.8 mm) of the adjacent front−spar
web (2) that includes the forward and aft surfaces for cracks, corrosion, and other
damage. Make sure you carefully examine around the fasteners and the radii.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the ram air intake and dorsal fairing (323AT) (refer to AMM TASK
55−32−01−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
STRAP
(REF)
1
LEGEND
1. Fitting.
2. Front spar.
NOTES
Left side shown, right side
is almost the same.
Examine the shaded area.
2
CL
STRAP
(REF)
1
1
2.00 in.
(50.8 mm) UP 2.00 in.
(50.8 mm)
rnd5531101_001.dg, kmw, oct7/2009
FS 755.00
VIEW LOOKING AFT
Detailed Inspection of the Fittings and the Adjacent Front Spar Web
Figure 1
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the vertical−stabilizer splice
straps (written as straps) attached to the front spar and the fuselage attachment
fittings for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 323 324 and 325 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the area is by the aft fuselage fairing.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the strap (1) at FS755.00 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage. Make
sure you carefully examine around the fasteners and the radii.
(2) Examine 2.0 in. (50.8 mm) of the adjacent front−spar web (2) that includes the
forward and aft surfaces for cracks, corrosion, and other damage. Make sure you
carefully examine around the fasteners and the radii.
(3) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the ram air intake and dorsal fairing (323AT) (refer to AMM TASK
55−32−01−400−801).
D. If required, install vertical stabilizer leading−edge (324AT) (refer to AMM TASK
55−32−03−400−801)
E. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
LEGEND FITTING
(REF)
1. Strap.
2. Front spar.
NOTES
Left side shown, right side
is almost the same.
Examine the shaded area.
2
CL
2.00 in. 1
(50.8 mm)
UP
rnd5531102_001.dg, kmw, oct20/2009
FITTING
2.00 in. 2.00 in. (REF)
(50.8 mm) (50.8 mm)
FS 755.00
VIEW LOOKING AFT
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the front spar at the vertical
stabilizer rib#1 attachment for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 324 and 325 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the aft fuselage vertical stabilizer
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 1
55−31−104 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
5. Inspection for Damage to the Front Spar at the Vertical Stabilizer Rib#1 Attachment
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the front spar (1) 5.0 in. (127.0 mm) above and below the rib#1 (2) for
cracks, corrosion, and other damage. Make sure you carefully examine the top
fastener of the strap on the aft side of the spar (1) web.
(2) Examine the front spar adjacent structure that includes 2.0 in (50.8 mm) of the rib#1
(2) and skin (3 & 4) for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
(3) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the access panel that follows:
E. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
2
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm)
5.00 in.
(127.0 mm)
STRAP
(REF)
FITTING
(REF)
5.00 in.
(127.0 mm)
LEGEND
1. Front spar.
3
2. Rib 1.
3. Left skin. 1
4. Right skin.
NOTE
Examine shaded area.
Left side is shown,
4
right side is almost the same.
3
2.00 in.
(50.8 mm)
RIVETS
(REF) 2
1
1 STRAP
rnd5531104_001.dg, kmw/gw, aug13/2009
(REF)
Detailed Inspection of the Front Spar at the Vertical Stabilizer Rib#1 Attachment
Figure 1
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the vertical stabilizer (VS) skin
around the access door cutouts (written as access panel cutouts) that includes the
door landing areas for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 325 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the exterior right, and left side of the vertical stabilizer.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 1
55−31−108 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the access panels that follow:
PANEL NAME MANUAL NO REFERENCE
325AL Electrical−Wires Access Panel TASK 55−32−07−400−805
Autopilot Servo−Drive−Unit
325BL TASK 55−32−07−400−803
Access−Panel
Autopilot−Input−Cable−
325CL TASK 55−32−07−400−802
Turnbuckle Access Panel
Autopilot−Input and
325DL TASK 55−32−07−400−801
Elevator−Control Access Panel
Elevator Control−Gain−
325EL Change−Mechanism TASK 55−32−07−400−804
Access−Panel CSP−A−001
325AR Trim−Actuator Access Panel TASK 55−32−07−400−813
325BR Yaw−Dampers Access Panel TASK 55−32−07−400−812
Autopilot Servo−Drive−Unit
325CR TASK 55−32−07−400−807
Access−Panel
Rudder Power−Control−Unit
325DR TASK 55−32−07−400−815
(PCU) Access−Panel
325ER Elevator−Control Access Panel TASK 55−32−07−400−806
Elevator−Control−Bellcrank
325FR TASK 55−32−07−400−814
Access Panel
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
LEGEND
1. Left skin.
2. Right skin.
3. Left panel landing.
4. Right panel landing.
NOTES
Examine shaded area.
2 in.
(50.8 mm)
VS FRONT
SPAR
(REF)
3
rnd5531108_001.dg, gw, aug31/2009
Detailed Inspection of the Vertical Stabilizer Skins and Landings Around the Access Panel
Cutouts
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 5
55−31−108 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
LEGEND
1. Left skin.
2. Right skin.
3. Left panel landing.
4. Right panel landing.
NOTES
Examine shaded area.
2 in.
(50.8 mm)
Detailed Inspection of the Vertical Stabilizer Skins and Landings Around the Access Panel
Cutouts
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 6
55−31−108 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
3 3
NOTE LEGEND
Examine the shaded area. 1. Left skin.
2. Right skin.
Typical for all inspection 3. Left panel landing.
areas. 4. Right panel landing.
Detailed Inspection of the Vertical Stabilizer Skins and Landings Around the Access Panel
Cutouts
Figure 1 (Sheet 3)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 7
55−31−108 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the horizontal−stabilizer (HS)
pivot fittings on the vertical stabilizer (VS) and the adjacent structure for cracks,
corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 326 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the exterior of the vertical stabilizer.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the pivot fittings (1) and 2.0 in. (50.8 mm) of the adjacent left and right skins
(3 & 4), top canted rib (2), and accessible area of the rear spar (5) for cracks,
corrosion, and other damage. Make sure you carefully examine the pivot fittings
surfaces.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the horizontal stabilizer (refer to AMM TASK 55−10−00−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
A
rnd5531111_002.dg, gw, aug24/2009
LEGEND
1. Pivot fitting assembly.
NOTE
Examine the shaded area.
Inspection of the Horizontal−Stabilizer Pivot−Fittings on the Vertical Stabilizer and the Adjacent
Structure
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 4
55−31−111 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
NOTE
Examine shaded area.
LEGEND
1. Pivot fitting assembly.
2. Top canted rib.
3. Left skin.
4. Right skin.
FAIRING
BRACKET
(REF)
1
2.0 in. BONDED
(50.8 mm) PACKER
(REF)
4
BONDED
PACKER
(REF)
FAIRING
BRACKET
(REF)
rnd5531111_003.dg, gw, aug25/2009
Inspection of the Horizontal Stabilizer Pivot Fittings on the Vertical Stabilizer and Surrounding
Structure
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 5
55−31−111 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
LEGEND
1. Pivot fitting assembly.
2. Top canted rib.
3. Left skin.
5. Rear spar.
1
NOTE
Examine the shaded area.
REAR SPAR
DATUM
FAIRING
BRACKET
(REF)
CANTED RIB
2.0 in. DATUM
(50.8 mm) 2
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm)
UP
5
FWD
rnd5531111_004.dg, gw, aug24/2009
Inspection of the Horizontal−Stabilizer Pivot−Fittings on the Vertical Stabilizer and the Adjacent
Structure
Figure 1 (Sheet 3)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 6
55−31−111 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
FUS. STA.
887.041 CANTED
RIB
2 DATUM
WL 231.624
EDGE OF PART AT
RUDDER STA. 152.636
(REF)
5
UP
RUDDER
HINGE
(REF)
NOTE
Examine the shaded area.
LEGEND
rnd5531111_005.dg, gw, aug25/2009
Detailed Inspection of the Horizontal−Stabilizer Pivot−Fittings on the Vertical Stabilizer and the
Adjacent Structure
Figure 1 (Sheet 4)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 7
55−31−111 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
FAIRING
BRACKET
(REF)
1
BONDED
PACKER
(REF)
BONDED
5
PACKER
(REF)
1
NOTE
Inspect the shaded area.
LEGEND
Inspection of the Horizontal−Stabilizer Pivot−Fittings on the Vertical Stabilizer and the Adjacent
Structure
Figure 1 (Sheet 5)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 8
55−31−111 Oct 10/20
See Effective TR CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the components of the vertical
stabilizer (VS) pitch−trim−actuator pivot structure, that follow for cracks, corrosion,
and other damage:
− Skins, doublers
− Support plates
− Top canted rib
− Support structure.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 325 and 326 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is through the horizontal stabilizer fairings.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
D. If the finish in the inspection area is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish.
5. Procedure
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Do the steps that follow for the detailed inspection:
(1) Examine the VS pitch−trim−actuator pivot structure including, doubler (1), support
plate (2), left skin (3), right skin (4), and 2.0 in. (50.8 mm) each side of the adjacent
canted rib (6), for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
(2) Examine the support structure that follow for cracks, corrosion, and other damage:
− Doublers, vertical stabilizer skin (5)
− Mid spar cap, upper web, tee, and Stiffener (7, 8, 13, 16)
− Angles (9, 11, 12)
− Rib #8 web (10)
− upper and lower Channel (14 &15)
− Tee Fitting (17).
(3) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (SRM 51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
C. Install the horizontal stabilizer trim actuator (AMM 27−42−01−400−801).
LEGEND NOTES
1. Doubler. 10. Rib No. 8 web. Examine the shaded area.
2. Support plate. 11. Angle.
Left side shown, right side
rnd5531112_006.dg, gw, dec07/2009
NOTE
1 Area to be examined.
Left side is shown, right
side is almost the same.
FWD
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm)
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm)
3
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm)
B
rnd5531112_007.dc, gw, dec07/2009
NOTE
1 Area to be examined.
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm) 1 14 4
FWD
12 5
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm)
F F D
11
16
10
9 8
2.0 in. 16
(50.8 mm)
5
12
3
14
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm)
rnd5531112_008.dc, gw, dec08/2009
NOTE
1 Area to be examined.
Left side is shown, right
side is almost the same.
2 1 1 3 14
FWD
6
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm)
8 16 7 13 9 11 2.0 in. 10 12
rnd5531112_009.dc, gw, dec08/2009
(50.8 mm)
D
17
UP
FWD
15
10 11 10
FWD
rnd5531112_010.dg, gw, dec09/2009
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the skin panel of the rudder particularly
around the hinge fittings. The inspection also includes the rudder hinges and the
actuators that attach the PCU to the rudder hinges.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1 General
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The rudder is in Zone 327 (refer to NDTM Part 1 General, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) It is necessary to remove all of the rudder−hinge access panels to do the inspection
(Refer to the AMM, Chapter 55).
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft post Modsum TC601R15028.
A. Procedure
(1) Remove the left top rudder−hinge access panel (Refer to AMM Task
55−43−01−000−801).
(2) Remove the left center rudder−hinge access panel (Refer to AMM Task
55−43−01−000−802).
(3) Remove the right center rudder−hinge access panel (Refer to AMM Task
55−43−01−000−804).
(4) Remove the left bottom rudder−hinge access panel (Refer to AMM Task
55−43−01−000−803).
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(5) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless it shows
deterioration or local damage.
(6) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, chapter 51).
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Do the inspection that follows:
NOTE: If the surfaces of any component are painted, look at the paint condition
for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component material.
(a) Examine the outer skin of the rudder that surrounds the hinge fittings. Pay
particular to the areas that follow:
− The fasteners that join the skin to the middle hinge fitting on the starboard
side
− Fastener holes that are in line with the rib at RS85.070.
(b) Inspect all the hinges and PCU actuators at all three rudder attachments for
obvious failure.
(c) Inspect the PCU actuators at all three rudder attachments for obvious failure.
(d) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
5
rnd5541101_001.dg, ds, 07/04/04
ACTUATOR
(REF)
ACTUATOR
(REF)
ACTUATOR
(REF)
3
7
B
8
3
9
C
10
11
EDGE OF SKIN
AT HINGE FITTING,
MIDDLE RUDDER
ATTACHMENT
LOCATION OF PRIMARY
RIB AT RUDDER INSPECTION
STA85.070 SITE
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Install the access components that follow:
(1) Install the left bottom rudder−hinge access panel (Refer to AMM Task
55−43−01−400−803).
(2) Install the right center rudder−hinge access panel (Refer to AMM Task
55−43−01−400−804).
(3) Install the left center rudder−hinge access panel (Refer to AMM Task
55−43−01−400−802).
(4) Install the left top rudder−hinge access panel (Refer to AMM Task
55−43−01−400−801).
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the front spar and external skin of the
rudder. The rudder hinges and connections to the rudder power control unit (PCU)
are not included in this inspection.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1 General
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The rudder is in Zone 327 (refer to NDTM Part 1 General, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the exterior of the vertical stabilizer.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft post Modsum TC601R15028.
A. Procedure
(1) Remove the lower fairing assembly (326CL/326CR) (Refer to AMM TASK
55−32−05−000−807).
(2) Remove the left top rudder−hinge access panel (327CL) (Refer to AMM TASK
55−43−01−000−801).
(3) Remove the left center rudder−hinge access panel (327BL) (Refer to AMM TASK
55−43−01−000−802).
(4) Remove the left bottom rudder−hinge access panel (327AL) (Refer to AMM TASK
55−43−01−000−803).
(5) Remove the left and right rudder seals (Refer to SRM 55−31−27).
(6) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless it shows
deterioration or local damage.
(7) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, chapter 51−26−00).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 3
55−41−102 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Do the inspection that follows:
(a) Examine the external skin (1 & 2) of the rudder except for the areas around the
hinges.
(b) Examine the front spar of the rudder. Make sure you carefully examine the
components that follow:
− Leading edge skins (1)
− Capstrips (7)
− Webs (5)
− Angles (3)
− Ribs (4)
− Clips (6)
− Straps (9)
− Splice angle (8).
(c) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
C. Install the access components that follow:
(1) Install the left and right rudder seals (Refer to SRM 55−31−27).
(2) Install the left top rudder−hinge access panel (327CL) (Refer to AMM TASK
55−43−01−400−801).
(3) Install the left middle rudder−hinge access panel (327BL) (Refer to AMM TASK
55−43−01−400−802).
(4) Install the left bottom rudder−hinge access panel (327AL) (Refer to AMM TASK
55−43−01−400−803).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 4
55−41−102 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
(5) Install the lower fairing assembly (326CL/326CR) (Refer to AMM TASK
55−32−05−400−807).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
5 2
4
rnd5541102_001.dg, ds, 10/05/04
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the external surface of the
lower forward wing−plank and the front−spar lower flange at WS242.00 for cracks,
corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 530 and 630 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the external surface of the lower forward wing−plank.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 1
57−21−103 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
5. Inspection for Damage to the Lower Forward Wing−Plank and the Front−Spar Lower Flange
at WS242.00
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the external surface of the lower forward wing−plank (1) for a distance of
10.0 in. (254.0 mm) inboard and 2.0 in. (50.8 mm) outboard of the rib lower flange
(4) center−line, and 12.0 in. (304.8 mm) aft of the front−spar lower flange (3) for
cracks, corrosion or other damage. Make sure you carefully examine around the
fastener holes.
(2) Examine the lower surface of the front−spar lower flange (3) for a distance of 10.0 in.
(254 mm) inboard and 2.0 in. (50.8 mm) outboard of the rib lower flange (4)
center−line for cracks, corrosion or other damage. Make sure you carefully examine
around the fastener holes.
(3) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
STA148.019
BL 45.00
BL 0.00
LEGEND
1. Lower forward
skin plank.
2. Center skin plank.
3. Front spar.
A
4. Rib at WS242.00.
NOTES
1 Examine the shaded
area.
VIEW LOOKING UP
Left side is shown, right
side is almost the same.
CL
12.0 in.
(304.8 mm)
3
1
rnd5721103_001.dg, kmw, dec22/2009
A
VIEW LOOKING DOWN AT THE
LOWER FORWARD WING−PLANK
Inspection on the Lower Forward Wing−plank and the Front−Spar Lower Flange
Figure 1
INSPECTION OF THE WING LOWER SKIN WET AREA FROM BL0.00 TO WS314.00
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the wet area of the wing lower skin from
BL0.00 to WS314.00 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
(2) This data applies to both sides of the aircraft.
NOTE: This inspection procedure is for the components on the left side. The
procedure for the components on the right ride is similar.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1, General
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 540/640 and 550/650 (refer to NDTM Part 1 General,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the inspection area is by the external wing lower−plank surface.
(2) It is necessary to remove the flap fairing 586AB/686AB for access.
2. Effectivity
All aircraft.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 1
57−21−105 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
A. Procedure
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(1) Remove the applicable fairings that follow:
FAIRING NO. DESCRIPTION
583AB Inboard flap actuator of the inboard flap − left wing
586AB Outboard actuator of the inboard flap − left wing
683AB Inboard flap actuator of the inboard flap − right wing
686AB Outboard actuator of the inboard flap − right wing
592AB Inboard flap actuator of the outboard flap − left wing
692AB Inboard flap actuator of the outboard flap − right wing
595AB Left outboard flap, middle forward flap hinge
695AB Right outboard flap, middle forward flap hinge
597AB Left outboard flap, outboard forward flap hinge
697AB Right outboard flap, outboard forward flap hinge
(2) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless it shows
deterioration or local damage.
(3) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, chapter 51).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Wing Lower Skin From BL0.00 to WS314.00
Refer to the area shaded in Figure 1.
NOTE: If the surfaces of any component are painted, look at the paint condition (for signs of
cracks and corrosion) in the component material.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the lower skin of the wing. Pay particular attention to the areas that follow:
(a) Examine the fasteners over an area 6.00 in. (152.40 mm) forward and 6.00 in.
(152.40 mm) aft of the edges and splice joints that follow:
− Front spar between BL0.00 and WS314.00
− Rear spar between BL0.00 and WS314.00
− Splice stringer #8 between BL0.00 and WS314.00
− Splice stringer #16 between BL0.00 and WS314.00.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
57−21−105 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
BL0.00 WS29.421
BL45.00
WS65.75
WS80.50
NOTES
WS85.50
1. Left lower wing shown,
1
right lower wing opposite.
ACCESS
PANEL 540DB
(REF)
2
STGR8
ACCESS 3
PANEL 510AB REAR SPAR
(REF) ACCESS DATUM
PANEL 510BB
(REF) ACCESS
PANEL 540AB
3.00 in. (REF)
(76.20 mm)
ACCESS
PANEL 540BB
(REF)
rnd5721105_001.dg, jp/rm, 23/08/05
6.00 in.
(152.40 mm)
6.00 in.
3.00 in.
TYPICAL (152.40 mm) TYPICAL
(76.20 mm)
Inspection of the Wing Lower Skin Wet Area From BL0.00 to WS314.00
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
LEGEND
WS106.40
ACCESS 1. Forward lower wing plank.
PANEL 540EB 2. Center lower wing plank.
(REF) 3. Aft lower wing plank.
WS127.25
1
WS148.019
NOTES
WS163.00 1. Left lower wing shown,
right lower wing opposite.
FRONT SPAR
DATUM
STGR16
ACCESS
PANEL 550AB
(REF)
WS96.134 STGR8
(REF) AUXILIARY
SPAR DATUM REAR SPAR
3 DATUM
ACCESS
3.00 in.
PANEL 540FB
(76.20 mm) WS178.00 (REF)
rnd5721105_002.dg, rm, 23/08/05
6.00 in.
ACCESS (152.40 mm)
PANEL 540EB
(REF)
6.00 in.
3.00 in. (152.40 mm)
(76.20 mm)
TYPICAL TYPICAL
Inspection of the Wing Lower Skin Wet Area From BL0.00 to WS314.00
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
LEGEND
FRONT SPAR
DATUM 1. Forward lower wing plank.
2. Center lower wing plank.
1 3. Aft lower wing plank.
WS199.00
STGR16
WS220.00
ACCESS NOTES
PANEL 550DB 1. Left lower wing shown,
2 (REF) right lower wing opposite.
WS178.00
ACCESS
PANEL 550BB
(REF)
STGR8
3
3.00 in.
(76.20 mm) REAR SPAR
DATUM
WS242.00
ACCESS WS264.00
PANEL 550CB
(REF) ACCESS
PANEL 550EB
(REF)
3.00 in.
rnd5721105_003.dg, rm, 23/08/05
(76.20 mm)
6.00 in.
(152.40 mm)
6.00 in.
(152.40 mm)
TYPICAL TYPICAL
Inspection of the Wing Lower Skin Wet Area From BL0.00 to WS314.00
Figure 1 (Sheet 3)
NOTES
1. Left lower wing shown,
right lower wing opposite.
FRONT SPAR
Examine the shaded area.
DATUM
ACCESS
PANEL 550EB
(REF) LEGEND
WS274.00
2. Center lower wing plank.
3. Aft lower wing plank.
2
WS294.50 ACCESS
PANEL 550HB
(REF)
STGR8
WS314.50
3
REAR SPAR
DATUM
WS264.00
3.00 in.
(76.20 mm)
ACCESS
PANEL 550FB
(REF)
ACCESS
PANEL 550GB
(REF)
rnd5721105_004.dg, jp/rm, 23/08/05
6.00 in.
(152.40 mm)
6.00 in.
(152.40 mm)
3.00 in.
(76.20 mm) TYPICAL TYPICAL
Inspection of the Wing Lower Skin Wet Area From BL0.00 to WS314.00
Figure 1 (Sheet 4)
(b) Examine the fasteners over an area 3.00 in. (76.20 mm) outboard and 3.00 in.
(76.20 mm) inboard of the rib datum lines that follow:
− BL22.50
− WS29.421
− BL45.00
− WS65.75
− WS85.50
− WS106.40
− WS127.25
− WS148.019
− WS163.00
− WS178.00
− WS199.00
− WS220.00
− WS242.00
− WS264.00
− WS274.00
− WS294.50
− WS314.50.
(2) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the rear−spar splice fitting, the rear spar
and the wing lower−aft plank at WS45.00 (BL45.00) for cracks, corrosion and other
damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The areas of inspection are in Zones 541/641 and 510/610 (Refer to NDTM Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the area to be inspected is from the main landing gear (MLG) wheel well
and the wing lower−surface area.
NOTE: Is is necessary to remove the MLG wheel−well bins to access the
inspection area.
It may be necessary to remove the aerodynamic fairings163AB to access
the wing lower−aft plank at WS45.00 (BL45.00).
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
A. Procedure
(1) Identify the location to be inspected.
(2) Remove the MLG wheel−well bins (Refer to the AMM, Chapter 53).
(3) Remove the MLG−bay forward and aft fairings 163AB and 193AB (Refer to Part 1,
51−01−04 and to the AMM, Chapter 53).
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(4) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless it shows
deterioration or local damage.
(5) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, chapter 51).
5. Inspection for Damage of the Rear Spar, Splice Fitting and Wing Lower−Aft Plank at WS45.00
(BL45.00)
Refer to the area shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
NOTE: If the surfaces of any component are painted, look at the paint condition (for
signs of cracks and corrosion) in the component material.
(1) Examine the rear spar fitting, the rear spar assemblies, 6.00 in. (152.40 mm) inboard
and 6.00 in. (152.40 mm) outboard of WS45.00 (BL45.00) datum, and the wing
lower−aft plank, from the edge of the plank to 12.00 in. (304.80 mm) forward of the
rear spar datum.
(2) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
NOTE
FITTING
3
CENTER
REAR−SPAR
ASSEMBLY
1
INBOARD
REAR−SPAR
ASSEMBLY
2
12.00 in.
(304.80 mm)
WING
rnd5721107_001.dg, jc/rm, 15/06/01
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Install the MLG wheel−well bins (Refer to the AMM, Chapter 53).
C. Install the MLG−bay forward and aft fairings 163AB and 193AB (Refer to the AMM,
Chapter 53).
D. Remove all tools, equipment and unwanted materials from the work area.
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the wing lower skin−panel at
the area of the rear−spar lower cap and the lower aft wing−plank rebate at
WS168.00 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is on the wing lower surface in Zones 550/650 (refer to NDTM
TASK Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the inspection area is by the exterior of the aircraft.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the lower skin panel in the area that follows for cracks, corrosion, and other
damage:
− 2 in. (50.8 mm) inboard and 2 in. (50.8 mm) outboard of WS168.00 and 6 in.
forward of the rear spar datum.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
NOTES
Area to be examined.
Left side shown, right side
almost the same.
4.0 in.
(101.6 mm)
6.0 in.
(152.4 mm)
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm)
FS168.00
A
FWD
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the external surface of the
lower forward wing−plank and the front−spar lower flange at BL45.00.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same unless specified.
B. Reference Information
(1) For additional data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection areas are in zones 541 and 641 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the external surface of the lower forward wing−plank.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
− Light source
− Inspection mirror.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(4) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(5) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(6) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Lower Forward Wing−Plank and the Front−Spar Lower Flange
at BL45.00
Refer to the shaded area in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the external surface of the lower forward wing−plank (1) for a distance of
2.00 in. (50.80 mm) inboard and outboard of the rib lower flange (3) center−line, and
8.00 in. (203.20 mm) aft of the front−spar lower flange (2) for cracks, corrosion or
other damage. Make sure you carefully examine around the fastener holes.
(2) Examine the lower surface of the front−spar lower flange (2) for a distance of 3.00 in.
(76.20 mm) inboard and outboard of the rib lower flange (3) center−line, and the
3.00 in. (76.20 mm) tee extrusion width of the front−spar lower flange (2) for cracks,
corrosion or other damage. Make sure you carefully examine around the fastener
holes.
(3) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the right forward wing−to−fuselage fairing 192BB (refer to AMM TASK
53−82−01−400−802).
D. Install the left forward wing−to−fuselage fairing 191BB (refer to AMM TASK
53−82−01−400−803).
E. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
STA148.019
BL 45.00
BL 0.00
2
2.00 in.
(50.80 mm)
BL 45.00
VIEW LOOKING UP CL
STGR19
STGR20 LEGEND
1. Lower forward
STGR21 wing−plank.
2. Front spar.
1 3. Rib at BL45.00.
STGR22
3
NOTES
STGR23
1 Examine the shaded
area.
8.00 in. STGR24
(203.20 mm) 2 Center line of the rib
1 lower flange at BL45.00.
2 STGR25
3. Left side is shown, right
3.00 in. side is almost the same.
(76.20 mm) STGR26
rnd5721114_002.dg, rb/lr, feb18/2009
3.00 in.
(76.20 mm)
FRONT SPAR
A
VIEW LOOKING UP AT THE
LOWER FORWARD WING−PLANK
Inspection of the Lower Forward Wing−Plank and the Front−Spar Lower Flange at BL45.00.
Figure 1
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the lower splice of the wing
front spar and the adjacent structure at WS29.42 for cracks, corrosion, and other
damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 510 and 610 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the exterior and interior of the center−wing fuel−tank.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection for Damage at the Lower Splice of the Wing Front Spar and the Adjacent Structure
at WS29.42
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the internal and external surfaces of the areas that follow at WS29.42 for
cracks, corrosion, and other damage:
(a) 5.0 in. (127.0 mm) inboard and outboard of WS29.42, and 6.0 in. (152.4 mm)
above the bottom edge of the wing front spar.
− Splice plate (1)
− Spar cap (2 & 4)
− Web (3 & 5)
− Lower splice angle (6).
(b) Lower wing plank (7) 7.0 in. (177.8 mm) inboard and outboard of WS29.42, and
10.0 in. (254.0 mm) aft of the forward edge. Make sure you carefully examine
around the fasteners holes.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Apply a brush coat of fuel resistant sealant on the fasteners and the lower splice angle (6)
(refer to SRM TASK 51−23−00).
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
D. Install the access panels that follows:
Left Forward
191BB TASK 53−82−01−400−803
Wing−to−Fuselage Fairing
CSP A−001
Right Forward
192BB TASK 53−82−01−400−802
Wing−to−Fuselage Fairing
G. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
NOTES
Area to be examined.
Left side is shown. The right side
is almost the same.
A
LEGEND
1. Splice plate.
3. Web, inboard front−spar.
5. Web, center front−spar.
7. Forward lower wing−plank.
5.0 in.
(127.0 mm) 3
5
6.0 in.
(152.4 mm)
7.0 in.
7.0 in. (177.8 mm)
(177.8 mm) 10.0 in.
(254.0 mm)
10.0 in.
(254.0 mm)
rnd5721118_001.dc, gv, oct16/2009
1 7 A WS29.42
FWD OUTBD
Detailed inspection of the Lower Splice of the Wing Front Spar and the Adjacent Structure at
WS29.42
Figure 1 (SHEET 1)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 5
57−21−118 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
NOTES
Examine the shaded area.
C Left side is shown. The right side
is almost the same.
UP
6.0 in.
(152.4 mm)
3
FWD
1 LEGEND
6 1. Splice plate.
ANGLE 2. Lower cap, inboard front−spar.
(REF) 3. Web, inboard front−spar.
4. Lower cap, center front−spar.
5. Web, center front−spar.
2
6. Lower splice angle.
7. Forward lower wing−plank.
B B
WS29.42 BL22.50
5.0 in.
(127.0 mm)
1
5.0 in.
(127.0 mm)
4 5
rnd5721118_002.dg, gv, oct22/2009
6
FWD
3
2
C INBD
VIEW LOOKING DOWN
Detailed inspection of the Lower Splice of the Wing Front Spar and the Adjacent Structure at
WS29.42
Figure 1 (SHEET 2)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 6
57−21−118 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the wing−to−fuselage fitting lugs for
cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: This inspection procedure is for the components on the left side of the
aircraft. The inspection procedure for the components on the right side is
equivalent.
B. Reference Information
(1) For additional data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection areas are found in Zones 163 and 164 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is through the main−landing gear (MLG) bay and by the external side of the
fuselage.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
− Light source
− Inspection mirror
− Borescope, if required.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the wing−to−fuselage fitting for cracks, corrosion and other damage.
Make sure you carefully examine the lugs of the fitting.
(2) Examine all of the fasteners in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent,
corroded, and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
57−21−119 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the rear side fairings 161FL and 162FL (refer to AMM TASK 53−82−01−400−807).
D. Install the MLG wheel bins (refer to AMM TASK 53−83−01−400−801).
E. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
FS513.00
FS473.15
FS424.00
A
RBL45.00
B
BL00.00
LBL45.00 A
C NOTES
rnd5721119_003.dg. gb, 10/11/08
1. Fitting.
2 Examine the shaded area.
B The left side of the aircraft is shown,
the right side is similar.
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the wing−to−fuselage main landing gear
(MLG) attachment fitting (the MLG side brace fitting) and the related components at
BL13.10, FS513.00 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
(2) A check for proper torque is also done for the wing−to−fuselage attachment bolt.
NOTE: This inspection procedure is for the components on the left side of the
aircraft. The inspection procedure for the components on the right side is
similar.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zones 163, 164, 510 and 610 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the area is by removal of the MLG wheel bins.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
A. Procedure
(1) Remove the MLG wheel bins to get access to the MLG side−brace fittings and the
related components at BL13.10 and FS513.00 (Refer to AMM Chapter 53).
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(2) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless it shows
deterioration or local damage.
(3) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, chapter 51).
5. Inspection for Damage to the MLG Side−Brace Fittings at BL13.10 and FS513.00
Refer to the area shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Do the inspection that follows at FS513.00 below the pressure floor (WL69) between
LBL8.35 and LBL25.70:
(a) Carefully examine the MLG side brace fitting that is attached to the wing−box
rear spar at BL13.10 and FS513.00 for cracks and corrosion. Also examine the
components that attach the MLG retraction actuator to the MLG side brace
fitting.
(b) Examine all of the fasteners that attach the MLG side brace fitting to the
wing−box for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other unserviceable
condition.
(c) Examine the wing−box rear spar and the wing−box top skin surfaces for a
distance of 2.0 in. (50.80 mm) adjacent to each leg of the MLG side brace
fitting.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
57−21−120 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
FS 513.00
WING−TO−FUSELAGE
ATTACHMENT BOLT LBL 13.10
4
A
LBL 22.50
WING−BOX
REAR SPAR WL 57.25
1
LBL 8.35
MLG
SIDE−BRACE
FITTING
2
2.00 in.
NOTES
(50.80 mm)
Left side of the aircraft is shown. ALL AROUND
rnd5721120_004.dg, rm/gw, 08/06/01
NOTES
Left side of the aircraft is shown.
Right side of the aircraft is similar. MLG
Examine the shaded area. SIDE−BRACE
FITTING
Fuselage attachment 2
fitting omitted for clarity.
LBL 8.35
WING−BOX
LBL 22.50 TOP SKIN 2.00 in.
3 (50.80 mm)
ALL AROUND
FS 513.00
FS 515.00
rnd5721120_005.dg, rm/gw, 08/06/01
LBL 13.10
MLG EXTENSION/
RETRACTION ACTUATOR
(REF)
(d) Pay particular attention to the attachment lug and fastener holes.
NOTE: Use the applicable borescope probe to examine the components if
required.
If the surfaces of any component are painted, look at the paint
condition (for signs of cracks and corrosion) in the component
material.
(e) Remove the cotter pin (P/N MS24665−377) from the wing to fuselage
attachment bolt.
(f) Do a check for proper torque of the wing to fuselage attaching bolt at the lug
fitting that attaches the lateral beam lower−cap on FS513.00 to the MLG side
brace fitting as follows:
1 Torque the nut to 1200 lbf·in (135 N·m) and install a new cotter pin. If the
cotter pin cannot be installed, do the steps that follow:
a Continue to torque the nut to a maximum of 1500 lbf·in (170 N·m) until
the cotter pin can be installed.
2 If the cotter pin cannot be installed, do the steps that follow:
a Remove the nut from the bolt.
b Add or remove washers as necessary.
NOTE: It is permissible to use a combination of solid and laminated
washers as required. The maximum number of washers
allowed together is three. A laminated washer must be
installed between two solid washers.
c Install a new nut (P/N MS9363−19) on to the bolt.
(g) Do all of the torque check again as in the above steps until the cotter pin can
be installed.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Install the MLG wheel bins (Refer to the AMM, Chapter 53).
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the wing−to−fuselage fitting lugs and
local wing structure for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: This inspection procedure is for the components on the left side of the
aircraft. The inspection procedure for the components on the right side is
equivalent.
B. Reference Information
(1) For additional data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection areas are found in Zones 161 and 162 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the external side of the fuselage and through the wing.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
− Inspection mirror
− Borescope, if required.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(6) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(7) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(8) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Wing−to−Fuselage Fitting Lugs and the Local Wing Structure
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
NOTE: If the surfaces of any components are painted, look at the paint condition (for
signs of cracks and corrosion) in the component material.
(1) Examine the wing−to−fuselage fitting (1) and the local wing support structure for
cracks, corrosion and other damage.
(2) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, and other
unserviceable condition.
C. Record and report results in accordance with company guidelines and policies.
D. For indications that exceed the allowable limits, it is recommended that you contact
MHIRJ Customer Support (refer to SRM TASK 51−13−01).
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the honeycomb access panels 540BB and 640BB (refer to AMM TASK
28−11−01−400−801).
D. Install the forward side fairings 161DL and 162DL (refer to AMM TASK
53−82−01−400−805).
E. Install the right forward wing−to−fuselage fairing 192BB (refer to AMM TASK
53−82−01−400−802).
F. Install the left forward wing−to−fuselage fairing 191BB (refer to AMM TASK
53−82−01−400−803).
G. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
FS513.00
FS473.15
FS424.00
A RBL45.00
BL00.00
B
LBL45.00
2
1
2 NOTES
1. Fitting.
2 Examine the shaded area.
The left side of the aircraft is shown,
the right side is similar.
rnd5721122_001.dg. gb, 12/09/08
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the wing−to−fuselage fitting lugs and
local wing structure for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: This inspection procedure is for the components on the left side of the
aircraft. The inspection procedure for the components on the right side is
equivalent.
B. Reference Information
(1) For additional data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection areas are found in Zones 161 and 162 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the external side of the fuselage and through the wing.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
− Inspection mirror
− Borescope, if required.
5. Inspection for Damage to the Wing−to−Fuselage Fitting Lugs and the Local Wing Structure
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
NOTE: If the surfaces of any components are painted, look at the paint condition (for
signs of cracks and corrosion) in the component material.
(1) Examine the wing−to−fuselage fitting and the local wing support structure for
cracks, corrosion and other damage.
(2) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, and other
unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
57−21−123 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the fuel access panels 540AB and 640AB (refer to AMM TASK
28−11−01−400−802).
D. Install the center side fairings 161EL and 162EL (refer to AMM TASK
53−82−01−400−806).
E. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
FS513.00
FS473.15
FS424.00
A
RBL45.00
B
BL00.00
LBL45.00
A
NOTES
1. Fitting.
2
2 Examine the shaded area.
The left side of the aircraft is shown,
the right side is similar.
rnd5721123_001.dg. gb, 12/09/08
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the front−spar lower cap, butt strap and
wing−lower center plank, internally and externally, at WS314.50 for cracks,
corrosion, and other damage.
(2) This inspection applies to both the left and right side of the aircraft. The inspection
of the left side only is given. The inspection of the right side is similar.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zones 552/652 and 551/651 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) The access to the forward butt strap at WS314.50 is from the internal wing
lower−surface.
NOTE: It is necessary to remove the access panels 550/650HB, 550/650JB,
550/650KB to gain access to the internal wing lower−surface.
(2) The access to the front spar web and lower flange is by removing the outboard
leading edges 530/630KL.
2. Effectivity
A. All Aircraft.
A. Procedure
(1) Remove the outboard leading edges 530/630KL (Refer to the AMM, Chapter 57).
(2) Remove the access panels 550/650HB, 550/650JB and 550/650KB (Refer to Part 1,
51−01−04).
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(3) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless it shows
deterioration or local damage.
(4) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, chapter 51).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Front−Spar Lower Cap and Butt Strap at WS314.50
Refer to the area shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Use the inspection mirror and a light source to examine, internally and externally
(inner and outer structure), the front−spar lower cap including the lower flange, the
forward buttstrap, and the lower wing plank over an area of 6.00 in. (152.40 mm)
inboard and outboard of the rib at WS314.50 datum, and 12.00 in. (304.80 mm) aft
from the edge of the front−spar lower flange. Pay particular attention around the
fastener holes and to the access hole corners.
(2) Examine the fasteners for signs of loose, bent, corroded, or other unserviceable
conditions.
LOWER
OUTBOARD WEB FLANGE LOWER CAP
FRONT SPAR
1
FORWARD
BUTT STRAP
RIB 3
WS 314.50
(DATUM) 6.00 in.
(152.40 mm)
ACCESS
PANEL
6.00 in. 550JB
(152.40 mm)
FRONT
SPAR
(DATUM)
ACCESS
PANEL
550KB
12.00 in.
(304.80 mm)
rnd5721124_001.dg, ik/rm, 09/10/01
WING LOWER
CENTER−PLANK
2
ACCESS
PANEL
550HB
VIEW LOOKING UP
Inspection of the Front−Spar Lower Cap and Butt Strap at FS 314.50
Figure 1
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Install the outboard leading edges 530/630KL (Refer to the AMM, Chapter 57).
C. Install the access panels 550/650HB, 550/650JB and 550/650KB (Refer to NDTM Part 1,
51−01−04).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the outboard flap hinge−box
attachment−fittings (called the forward and aft fittings" in this procedure) which
attach the outboard flap hinge boxes to the the wings for cracks, corrosion and other
damage. The inspection is also used to do a torque check of the fittings lug bolts.
NOTE: This data applies to both sides of the aircraft. The inspection procedure for
the left side only is given
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 551/651 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the forward and aft fittings is from the external wing lower suface.
NOTE: It is necessary to remove the outboard flap hinge−box fairings at
WS178.00, WS222.00, and WS264.00 to get access to the inspection area.
2. Effectivity
A. All Aircraft.
3. Tools and Equipment
A. Use the equipment that follows:
− Light source
− Inspection mirror.
4. Preparation and Cleaning
A. Prepare the inspection area as follows:
(1) Remove the outboard flap hinge−box fairings 592AB/692AB, 595AB/695AB and
597AB/697AB (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−04 and to the AMM, Chapter 57).
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(2) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless it shows
deterioration or local damage.
(3) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, chapter 51).
5. Inspection for Damage of the Wing to Outboard Flap Hinge−Box Forward and Aft Fittings
Refer to the area shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
NOTE: If the surfaces of any component are painted, look at the paint condition (for
signs of cracks and corrosion) in the component material.
(1) Inspect the forward and aft fittings, and the local wing box structure for a distance of
2.00 inches (50.08 mm) in all directions around both hinge fittings.
(2) Pay particular attention to the lugs of the forward and aft fittings and close to the bolt
holes which attach both fittings to the wing.
(3) Inspect around the base of the fittings for indications of gapping between the fittings
and the wing box.
(4) At WS178.00, do a torque check of the lug bolts of the forward and aft fittings. Make
sure that the lug bolt of the forward fitting is torqued between 480−600 lbf·in
(54.20−67.80 N·m), and that the two lug bolts of the aft fitting are torqued between
380−450 lbf·in (42.90−50.80 N·m).
(5) At WS222.00, do a torque check of the lug bolts of the forward and aft fittings. Make
sure that the lug bolt of the forward fitting is torqued between 480−600 lbf·in
(54.20−67.80 N·m), and that the two lug bolts of the aft fittings are torqued between
250−300 lbf·in (28.20−33.90 N·m).
(6) At WS264.00, do a torque check of the lug bolts of the forward and aft fittings. Make
sure that the lug bolt of the forward fitting is torqued between 480−600 lbf·in
(54.20−67.80 N·m) and that the two lug bolts of the aft fittings are torqued between
250−300 lbf·in (28.20−33.90 N·m).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
57−21−127 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
(7) Examine all other fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
6. Acceptance or Rejection Criteria
A. All signs of corrosion or cracks are cause for rejection.
B. All signs of damaged fasteners are cause for rejection.
C. Record and report results in accordance with company guidelines and policies.
D. For indications that exceed the allowable limits, it is recommended that you contact
MHIRJ Customer Support (refer to SRM 51−13−01).
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Install the outboard flap hinge−box fairings 592AB/692AB, 595AB/695AB and
597AB/697AB (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−04 and to the AMM, Chapter 57).
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
NOTE
WS 178.00
WS 220.00
WS 264.00
VIEW LOOKING UP
ON LEFT SIDE WING
LUG BOLT
FORWARD
FITTING 2.00 in.
1 (50.80 mm)
ALL AROUND AFT
FITTING
4
2.00 in.
(50.80 mm)
ALL AROUND
LUG BOLT
(TWO PLACES)
LOWER−AFT PLANK
7 (REF)
Inspection of the Outboard Flap Hinge Box Forward and Aft Fittings at WS178.00, WS220.00,
and WS264.00
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 4
57−21−127 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
NOTE
LUG BOLT
Examine the shaded area.
FORWARD 2.00 in.
FITTING (50.80 mm) The left side of the aircraft is shown.
2 ALL AROUND The right side is similar.
AFT FITTING
5
2.00 in.
(50.80 mm)
ALL AROUND
LUG BOLT
(TWO PLACES)
WING
LOWER−AFT PLANK
7 OUTBOARD FLAP
HINGE−BOX
(REF)
FORWARD
FITTING
3
2.00 in.
(50.80 mm)
ALL AROUND
LUG BOLT
(TWO PLACES)
rnd5721127_002.dg, jc/gw, 11/07/01
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the lower wing skin at WS45.00 and
WS65.75 between the rear spar and auxiliary spar datum, and the forward splice
datum (STGR16) for cracks, corrosion, and other possible damage.
(2) This data applies to the left and right side of the aircraft. The inspection procedure
for the left side only is given.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1 General
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 540/640 (refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the lower wing skin is by the external wing surface.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft
A. Procedure
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(1) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless it shows
deterioration or local damage.
(2) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, chapter 51).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Lower Wing Skin at WS45.00 and WS65.75 and the MLG Lower
Trunnion Strap
Refer to the area shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Use the inspection mirror and a light source to examine the lower wing skin along
the rib at WS45.00 between the rear spar and forward splice datum (STGR16) for
cracks and corrosion.
(2) Examine the lower wing skin along the rib and MLG mounting fitting at WS65.75
between the auxiliary spar datum and the forward splice datum (STGR16) for cracks
and corrosion. Also examine the MLG lower trunnion strap for cracks and corrosion.
NOTE: If the surfaces of any component are painted, look at the paint condition
(for signs of cracks and corrosion) in the component material.
(3) Examine all of the fasteners for a loose, bent, corroded, or other unserviceable
condition.
ACCESS PANEL
(REF)
WS 45.00
4.00 in.
4.00 in.
WS 65.75 WS 45.00
4.00 in. WS 65.75
4.00 in.
FORWARD
SPLICE DATUM−
STR 16
(REF)
ACCESS
PANEL RIB ACCESS PANEL
(REF) (REF) (REF)
EXAMINE THE
SHADED AREAS
RIB
(REF)
MLG MOUNTING
FITTING
(REF)
MLG LOWER
LOWER WING
TRUNNION STRAP
SKIN
REAR
SPAR DATUM
FWD
OUTBD
AUXILIARY SPAR
DATUM
Location of the Inspection at WS45.00 and WS65.75
Figure 1
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the dry−bay lower access
hole cut−out from WS314.50 to WS330.25 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
The dry−bay lower access hole cut−out is written as the aileron Power Control Unit
(PCU) access hole in this task.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 552 and 652 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the wing lower access panels.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 1
57−21−134 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
ACCESS DESIGNATION
550KB Access Panel, Aileron Power−Control−Unit
650KB Access Panel, Aileron Power−Control−Unit
5. Inspection for Damage to the Aileron PCU Access Hole from WS314.50 to WS330.25
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the top surfaces of the forward and aft lower butt−straps (1 & 2) 1.25 in.
(31.75 mm) around the perimeter from WS314.50 to WS330.25 for cracks, corrosion,
and other damage. Make sure you carefully examine the corners, inboard edge, and
the center−to−aft skins strap (3).
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the access panels that follow:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
550KB Access Panel, Aileron Power Control−Unit
650KB Access Panel, Aileron Power Control−Unit
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
NOTES
WS314.50 Examine the shaded area.
Left side is shown. The right side
is almost the same.
CENTER SKIN
(REF)
WS330.25 WS314.50
1.25 in.
(31.75 mm)
(REF)
1. Lower aft butt−strap.
2. Lower forward butt−strap.
3. Strap.
UP
WS 314.50
1.25 in.
(31.75 mm) 3
2 SKIN
(REF)
NOTES
Examine the shaded area.
Left side is shown. The right side
is almost the same.
LEGEND
1. Lower aft butt−strap.
2. Lower forward butt−strap.
3. Strap.
UP
REAR SPAR
(REF)
OML
rnd5721134_002.dg, gv, oct13, 2009
INSPECTION OF THE LOWER BUTT−STRAP AND REAR−SPAR LOWER CAP AT AILERON PCU
CUT−OUTS, WS318.30 AND WS 324.40
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the aft lower butt−strap and
the wing outboard rear−spar, below the aileron PCU between WS315.30 and
WS327.40 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 552 and 652 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the exterior of the lower wing access−panels.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
ACCESS DESIGNATION
550KB Access Panel, Aileron Power Control Units
650KB Access Panel, Aileron Power Control Units
598BB Shroud, Flight Controls
698BB Shroud, Flight Controls
599BB Leading Edge, Aileron Control Mechanisms
699BB Leading Edge, Aileron Control Mechanisms
5. Inspection for Damage to the Aft Lower Butt−Strap and the Wing Outboard Rear−Spar below
the Aileron PCU between WS315.30 and WS327.40
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the aft lower butt−strap (1), the bottom flange, and the web of the outboard
rear−spar (2) 3.0 in. (76.2 mm) inboard of the inboard PCU cut−out and outboard of
the outboard PCU cut−out for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the access panels that follow:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
550KB Access Panel, Aileron Power Control Units
650KB Access Panel, Aileron Power Control Units
598BB Shroud, Flight Controls
698BB Shroud, Flight Controls
599BB Leading Edge, Aileron Control Mechanisms
699BB Leading Edge, Aileron Control Mechanisms
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
Inspection of the Aft Lower Butt−Strap and the Wing Outboard Rear−Spar below the Aileron
PCU between WS315.30 and WS327.40
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 4
57−21−135 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
LEGEND
1. Aft lower butt strap.
2. Outboard rear spar.
2
rnd5721135_002.dg, gv, sep03, 2009
1
SKIN
(REF)
Inspection of the Aft Lower Butt−Strap and the Wing Outboard Rear−Spar below the Aileron
PCU between WS315.30 and WS327.40
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 5
57−21−135 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the wing plug rear−spar, the
lower skin, and the doubler at WS353.0 splice joint for cracks, corrosion, and other
damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 552, 560, 652 and 660 (refer to NDTM TASK
Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the lower wing access panels and shrouds.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
ACCESS DESIGNATION
550LB Access Panel, Flight Controls and Structural Inspection
650LB Access Panel, Flight Controls and Structural Inspection
598BB Shroud, Flight Controls
698BB Shroud, Flight Controls
ACCESS DESIGNATION
599CB Leading Edge, Aileron Control Mechanisms
699CB Leading Edge, Aileron Control Mechanisms
5. Inspection of the Wing Plug Rear−Spar, the Lower Skin and the Doubler at WS353.0 Splice
Joint
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the forward and aft face of the items that follow to a distance of 3.0 in. (76.2
mm) inboard and outboard of WS353.0 datum, 2.0 in. (50.8 mm) forward and aft of
the rear spar datum, and from the lower skin (5 & 7) to the top of the web splice (4),
for cracks, corrosion, and other damage:
− Wing plug rear−spar (1)
− Outboard rear spar (2)
− Splice angle (3)
− Splice web (4)
− Lower skin (5)
− Doubler (6)
− Aft skin panel (7)
− Forward Rib, wing plug (8).
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the access that follows:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
550LB Access Panel, Flight Controls and Structural Inspection
650LB Access Panel, Flight Controls and Structural Inspection
ACCESS DESIGNATION
598BB Shroud, Flight Controls
698BB Shroud, Flight Controls
ACCESS DESIGNATION
599CB Leading Edge, Aileron Control Mechanisms
699CB Leading Edge, Aileron Control Mechanisms
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
NOTES
Examine the shaded area.
Left side is shown, right
side is almost the same.
A
Examine 3.0 in. (76.2 mm) on each
side of WS353.0
LEGEND
1. Wing plug rear−spar. 353.00
2. Outboard rear spar.
3. Splice angle.
4. Splice web.
3
5. Wing plug lower−skin.
6. Doubler.
7. Aft skin panel.
8. Forward rib,
UP
wing plug.
1 7 4 6 2
5 WS353.00
ANGLE (REF)
REAR SPAR
REAR SPAR
DATUM AFT RIB
DATUM 3
ANGLE (REF) 1 3 (REF)
(REF)
OML (REF)
UPPER SHIM OML
4 (REF) UPPER
4 PACKER
8 (REF)
PACKERS PACKER
3 3
(REF) (REF)
2 rnd5721136_001.dg, kmw, dec08/2009
OML OML
LOWER 6 7 LOWER
5 6
2.00 in. 2.00 in.
(50.8 mm) (50.8 mm)
INSPECTION OF THE LOWER WING PLANK AND RIBS AT WS80.50, WS85.50, WS127.25,
WS178.00, WS220.00, AND WS264.00
1. General
A. Function
(1) This procedure is used to find cracks in the lower wing plank and the ribs at the flaps
forward and aft hinge−fitting attachments−bolts area.
NOTE: This inspection procedure is for the components on the left side of the
aircraft. The inspection procedure for the components on the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For additional data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection areas are found in Zones 541/641, 542/642, and 551/651 (refer to
NDTM TASK Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the inspection area is by the external surface of the lower aft wing plank
and through the wing.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
B. NDTM Part 4, 57−21−141 and NDTM Part 6, 57−21−141 must be done to complete the
inspection of SSI 57−21−141.
A. Use the equipment that follows (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1, 51−20−09).
− Light source
− Inspection mirror
− Borescope, if required.
5. Inspection
A. Inspection Procedure
Refer to Figure 1 thru Figure 6.
(1) Examine the areas that follow for cracks and corrosion:
(a) Wing plank (1) external and internal surface for a distance of 2.0 inches (50.08
mm) all around the forward hinge−box fitting and the aft hinge−flap actuator
fitting attachment bolts at WS80.50, WS127.25, WS178.00, WS220.00, and
WS264.00
(b) Wing plank (1) external and internal surface for a distance of 2.0 inches (50.08
mm) all around the lower rib cap (3) at WS85.50
(c) Inboard and outboard lower surface of the rib web (2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7) for a
distance of half of the rib height at WS80.50, WS85.50, WS127.25, WS178.00,
WS220.00, and WS264.00
(d) Inboard and outboard lower caps of ribs (2, 4, 5, 6 and 7) for a distance of 2.0
inches (50.08 mm) forward and aft of the forward hinge−box fitting and the aft
hinge−flap actuator fitting attachment bolts
(e) Outboard lower cap of rib (3)
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 3
57−21−141 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
(f) Each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or
other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the access panels that follow (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1, 51−01−04):
D. Remove all tools, equipment and unwanted materials from the work area.
A NOTES
1. Examine the shaded area.
2. The left side of the aircraft is
shown, the right side is similar.
3 Inspect 2.0 in. (50.8 mm) forward
and aft of bolts.
4 Inspect lower half of rib web inboard
and outboard surface.
WS80.50 LEGEND
VIEW LOOKING UP 1. Aft lower wing plank.
ON LEFT SIDE WING 2. Rib battery WS80.50.
B
2.0 in. OUTBOARD
(50.8 mm) LOWER CAP
WS80.50
REAR SPAR 3
3
AUX
SPAR
2
4
rnd5721141_001.iso, rb/lr, may29/2009
1 B
VIEW LOOKING INBOARD
WS80.50 Lower Wing Plank and Battery Rib Inspection
Figure 1
NOTES
C
1. Examine the shaded area.
2. The left side of the aircraft is
shown, the right side is similar.
4 Inspect lower half of rib web inboard
and outboard surface.
LEGEND
WS85.50 1. Aft lower wing plank.
3. Rib, battery WS85.50.
VIEW LOOKING UP
ON LEFT SIDE WING
D
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm)
WS85.50
2.0 in.
REAR SPAR (50.8 mm)
C
AUX SPAR
VIEW LOOKING UP
REAR SPAR
AUX SPAR
4
rnd5721141_006.dg, lr, may12/2009
3
D
1
VIEW LOOKING INBOARD
NOTES
1. Examine the shaded area.
E 2. The left side of the aircraft is
shown, the right side is similar.
3 Inspect 2.0 in. (50.8 mm) forward
and aft of bolts.
4 Inspect lower half of rib web inboard
and outboard surface.
LEGEND
WS127.25 1. Aft lower wing plank.
VIEW LOOKING UP 4. Rib WS127.25.
ON LEFT SIDE WING
2.0 in. F
(50.8 mm)
WS127.25
AUX
2.0 in. REAR SPAR SPAR
(50.8 mm)
E
VIEW LOOKING UP
3
3
4
rnd5721141_002.dg, rb/lr, may07/2009
AUX
SPAR
REAR SPAR
1 F
VIEW LOOKING INBOARD
WS127.25 Lower Wing Plank and Rib Inspection
Figure 3
NOTES
1. Examine the shaded area.
G 2. The left side of the aircraft is
shown, the right side is similar.
3 Inspect 2.0 in. (50.8 mm) forward
and aft of bolts.
4 Inspect lower half of rib web inboard
and outboard surface.
WS178.00
LEGEND
VIEW LOOKING UP 1. Aft lower wing plank.
ON LEFT SIDE WING 5. Rib WS178.00.
H
REAR SPAR
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm)
WS178.00
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm)
G
VIEW LOOKING UP REAR
SPAR
3
3
1 H
VIEW LOOKING INBOARD
WS178.00 Lower Wing Plank and Rib Inspection
Figure 4
NOTES
1. Examine the shaded area.
2. The left side of the aircraft is
J shown, the right side is similar.
3 Inspect 2.0 in. (50.8 mm) forward
and aft of bolts.
4 Inspect lower half of rib web inboard
and outboard surface.
LEGEND
WS220.00 1. Aft lower wing plank.
VIEW LOOKING UP
6. Rib, WS220.00.
ON LEFT SIDE WING
STGR7 K
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm) REAR SPAR
WS220.00
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm)
J
VIEW LOOKING UP
3
3
4
rnd5721141_004.dg, rb/lr, may07/2009
REAR SPAR
1 K
VIEW LOOKING INBOARD
WS220.00 Lower Wing Plank and Rib Inspection
Figure 5
NOTES
1. Examine the shaded area.
L 2. The left side of the aircraft is shown.
The right side is similar.
3 inspect 2 inches forward and aft of bolts.
LEGEND
1. Aft lower wing plank.
VIEW LOOKING UP WS264.00
7. Rib, WS264.00.
ON LEFT SIDE WING
STGR 7 M
REAR
SPAR
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm)
WS264.00
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm)
L
VIEW LOOKING UP
3
3 REAR
SPAR
4 rnd5721141_005.iso, rb/lr, may29/2009
1
M
VIEW LOOKING INBOARD
WS264.00 Lower Wing Plank and Rib Inspection
Figure 6
INSPECTION OF THE UPPER SKIN ACCESS HOLES BETWEEN REAR AND AUXILIARY SPARS
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the aft upper wing−plank
(written as wing plank) around the access panel holes for cracks, corrosion, and
other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 542 and 642 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the top of the wing.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
ACCESS DESIGNATION
540AT
540BT
540CT
Access panel
640AT
640BT
640CT
5. Inspection for Damage to the Wing Plank Around the Access Panel Holes.
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the wing plank and landing, 2 in. (50.8 mm) around each of the access
panel holes for cracks, corrosion, and other damage. Make sure you carefully
examine around the edge of the fastener holes and of the access holes.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the access panel rings.
D. Install the access panel that follows:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
540AT
540BT
540CT
Access panel
640AT
640BT
640CT
E. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
NOTES
Examine the shaded area.
Left side is shown, right side is
almost the same.
LEGEND
1. Wing plank.
65.75 80.490
W/STA W/STA
1
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm)
OUTBD
FWD
rnd5721142_001.dg, gw, oct20/2009
W/STA W/STA
96.134 1 106.40
AUXILIARY SPAR
DATUM
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm)
OUTBD
FWD
REAR SPAR
DATUM
rnd5721142_002.dg, gw, oct20/20089
W/STA W/STA
106.40 127.25
OUTBD
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm)
FWD
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm)
OML UP
OUTBD
1
rnd5721142_003.dg, gw, oct20/2009
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the aileron hinge fittings and
the aft face of the wing outboard rear−spar (written as spar) for cracks, corrosion,
and other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones, 598 and 698 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the exterior of the wing trailing edge.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
5. Inspection for Damage to the Aileron Hinge Fittings and the Aft Face of the Spar
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the hinge fittings (1, 3, 4, & 5), hinge plates (2 & 6) and spar (7 & 8) 2.0 in.
(50.8 mm) around the perimeter of the adjacent hinge fittings for cracks, corrosion,
and other damage.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the ailerons (refer to AMM TASK 27−15−01−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
NOTES WS294.50
Examine the shaded area.
Examine 2.0 in. (50.8 mm) each side
of hinge fittings.
Left side is shown, right side
is almost the same.
WS319.604
WS323.058
7
WS343.50
5
LEGEND
1. No.1 hinge fitting, WS294.50.
2. No.1 hinge plate, WS294.50. 6
3. No.2 hinge fitting, WS319.604.
6
4. No.3 hinge fitting, WS323.058.
5. No.4 hinge fitting, WS343.50.
6. No.4 hinge plate, WS343.50.
7. Outboard rear spar WS148.019 to WS314.50.
8. Outboard rear spar WS314.50 to WS353.00.
3 1
2
rnd5721143_001.dg, gv, oct28/2009
2
4
Inspection of the Aileron Hinge Fittings and the Aft Face of the Spar
Figure 1
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the front and rear spar
bayonet−fittings at WL46.25 of FS409.00+128 and FS513.00 for cracks, corrosion,
and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 160 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1 General, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the external side of the fuselage and through the main landing gear
(MLG) bay.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
− Inspection mirror.
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(3) Clean the inspection surfaces (refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
(4) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(5) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Front and Rear Spar Bayonet−Fittings at WL46.25
FS409.00+128 and FS513.00
A. Inspection Procedure
Refer to Figure 1.
(1) Examine the front spar bayonet−fitting lugs (1) and the local support structure, for
cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
(2) Examine the rear spar bayonet−fitting lugs (2) and the local support structure, for
cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
57−21−160 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
B. Install the main landing gear wheel bins (refer to AMM TASK 53−83−01−400−801).
C. Install the forward−fairing access panel (refer to AMM TASK 53−82−01−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
B FS513.00
REAR SPAR
(REF)
2 A
NOTE
Examine the shaded area.
FS424.00
BL0.00
rnd5721160_011.dg rb, 9oct2008
1
LEGEND
1. Front spar bayonet−fitting lug. B
2. Rear spar bayonet−fitting lug. FRONT SPAR
(REF)
Inspection of the Front and Rear Spar Bayonet−Fittings at FS409.00+128 and FS513.00
Figure 1
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the main landing gear (MLG) mounting
trunnion−web (described as the trunnion web in this procedure) located at the
WS66.00 between the rear spar and the auxiliary spar, for cracks, corrosion, and
other damage.
NOTE: This inspection procedure is for the components on the left side of the
aircraft. The inspection procedure for the components on the right side is
similar.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The trunnions are in Zones 542 and 642 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the outboard surface of the trunnion web is from the upper external wing
surface through access panels 540AT and 640AT.
(2) Access to the inboard surface of the trunnion web is by the MLG bay.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft pre SB 601R−57−046 or pre SB 601R−57−048 (Cold working of fastener
holes in the MLG mounting trunnions).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 1
57−21−161 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
A. Procedure
(1) Identify the locations to be inspected (refer to Figure 1).
(2) Remove the access panel 540AT/640AT (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−04).
(3) Put the aircraft on jacks (Refer to AMM TASK 07−11−01−582−801).
(4) Remove the MLG doors hinge sectors (refer to AMM TASK 32−12−03−000−808).
(5) If stud fasteners HST145AG−8 are attaching the MLG door hinges to the trunnion,
do the following:
(a) Remove the six nuts (three aft and three forward) from the outboard side of the
trunnion web.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Do the inspection that follows:
(a) Examine the trunnion web. Pay particular attention to the components that
follow:
− Around the trunnion web/hinge sectors stud or bolt fasteners
− Two tooling holes.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. For the stud fastener configuration only: Install the six nuts (three aft and three forward)
from the outboard side of the trunnion web.
C. Install the MLG door hinge sectors (refer to AMM TASK 32−12−03−400−806).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
E. Install the access panel 540AT/640AT (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−04).
F. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
A
1
2
TOOLING
HOLE (REF)
A
TOOLING
HOLE (REF)
MLG DOOR
HINGE SECTOR
FASTENER (REF)
3
AFT LUG
(REF) B
MLG DOOR
HINGE SECTOR
NOTES FASTENER (REF)
rnd5721160_006.dg, lr, dec18/2008
1
2
TOOLING
HOLE (REF)
A
MLG DOOR
HINGE SECTOR 3
FASTENER (REF)
D
NOTES
1. Left side shown,
rnd5721160_007.dg, lr, mar28/2008
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the inboard−flap front spar,
rear spar, and rear spar doubler for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is inside the inboard flap, zones 584/684 (refer to NDTM TASK
Part 1 51−01−03):
D. Access
(1) Access to the inspection area is by the inboard flap front−spar lightening holes
2. Effectivity
A. All Aircraft.
− Light source
− Inspection mirror
− Borescope.
5. Inspection for Damage to the Inboard−Flap Front Spar and Rear Spar
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the front spar (1), the rear spar (2), and the rear spar doubler (3) for cracks,
corrosion, and other damage:
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the inboard−flap leading edge (refer to AMM TASK 57−52−01−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
1
3
LEGEND NOTES
1. Front spar. Examine the shaded
2. Rear spar. area.
3. Rear spar doubler. Left side is shown, right
rnd5752105_001.dg, gw, nov17/2009
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the machined ribs of the
inboard flap hinges at the canted flap stations (CFS): CFS79.062, CFS82.473,
CFS126.048, and CFS129.298.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 584/684 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the inboard flap front−spar lightening holes.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 1
57−52−106 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
5. Inspection for Damage to the Inboard Flap Hinge Ribs at: CFS79.062, CFS82.473,
CFS126.048, and CFS129.298
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the web and flanges of the areas that follow for cracks, corrosion, and other
damage:
− The machined ribs (1), (2), (3), and (4) at the hinge locations at CFS79.062,
CFS82.473, CFS126.048, and CFS129.298.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
57−52−106 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the inboard flap leading−edge (refer to AMM TASK 57−52−01−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
CFS79.062
CFS82.473
CFS126.048
CFS129.298
NOTES
Left side shown, right
side is almost the same.
1
3
LEGEND
1. Machined rib, CFS79.062.
2. Machined rib, CFS82.473.
3. Machined rib, CFS126.048.
2
4. Machined rib, CFS129.298.
4
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the eight lug plates at the
hinge arm−to−the flap body attachments.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 584 and 684 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the inspection area is by removal of the aft flap hinge−fairings.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
− Inspection mirror.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the lug plates (1) at the hinge arm−to−flap body attachments for cracks,
corrosion, and other damage.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the inboard flap−hinge aft fairings, 583BB/683BB (refer to AMM TASK
57−55−01−400−801).
D. Install the inboard flap−hinge aft fairings, 586BB/686BB (refer to AMM TASK
57−55−01−400−802).
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
57−52−107 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
E. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
NOTES
Examine shaded
area.
Left side shown, right side
is almost the same.
LEGEND
1. Lug plate.
FWD
1
rnd5752107_001.dg, kmw, oct30/2009
1. General
A. Function
This inspection is used to visually examine the inboard flap hinge−arm assemblies at
WS80.50 and WS127.25 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. This data applies to both sides of the aircraft.
NOTE: This inspection procedure is for the components on the left wing. The
procedure for the components on the right wing is similar.
C. Reference Information
For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1, General
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
D. Location
The area is in Zone 580/680 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
E. Access
(1) Access to the inspection area is by the external wing bottom surface.
(2) It is necessary to remove the inboard flap for access.
2. Effectivity
All aircraft.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 1
57−52−108 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
A. Procedure
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(1) Remove the inboard flap (Refer to AMM TASK 27−54−01−000−801).
(2) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: Is is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless it shows
deterioration or local damage.
(3) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, Chapter 51).
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the inboard flap hinge−arm assembly for signs of cracks, blemishes, or
other unserviceable condition.
NOTE: Pay particular attention to the lugs and lower portion of the assembly,
especially around the attachment hole where the inboard flap hinge−box is
connected.
(2) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
LEGEND
1. Inboard flap hinge−arm
assembly, WS80.50.
2. Inboard flap hinge−arm
assembly, WS127.25.
1
2
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Install the inboard flap (Refer to AMM TASK 27−54−01−400−801)
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the upper and lower skins of
the inboard flap.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 584/684 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by exterior of the aircraft.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
5. Inspection for Damage to the Upper and Lower Skins of the Inboard Flap
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the upper (1) and lower (2) skins of the inboard flap for cracks, corrosion,
and other damage.
− Make sure you carefully examine the skin adjacent to the hinge arm and the vane
support structure
− Make sure that you carefully examine the skin along the front spar and intercostal
spar fasteners.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
D. For indications that exceed the allowable limits, it is recommended that you contact
MHIRJ Customer Support (refer to SRM TASK 51−13−01).
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the flap leading edge (refer to AMM TASK 57−52−01−400−801).
D. Install the inboard flap−hinge aft fairings (583BB/683BB) (refer to AMM TASK
57−55−01−400−801).
E. Install the inboard flap−hinge aft fairings (586BB/686BB) (refer to AMM TASK
57−55−01−400−802).
F. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
INTERCOSTAL
SPAR DATUM
(REF)
FRONT SPAR
DATUM (REF)
NOTES
Left inboard flap shown, the
right flap is almost the same.
WS127.25
FLAP HINGE ARM
(REF)
rnd5752112_001.dg, gw, nov10/2009
WS80.50
FLAP HINGE ARM
2 (REF)
FWD
1. General
A. The maintenance procedure that follows is for the detailed inspection of the vane actuator
tube assembly. This inspection is used to examine the three vane actuator tube
assemblies of the inboard flaps for cracks, corrosion and other damage. This procedure is
applicable to the left side and the right side. The procedure for the left side is given.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
REFERENCE DESIGNATION
Commercially Available Explosion Proof−Flashlight
Commercially Available Mirror−Telescopic
Commercially Available Borescope
Commercially Available Magnifying Glass − 10 Power
B. Parts
DRAWING MATERIAL
ITEM DESCRIPTION
NUMBER SPECIFICATION
1 Outer Tube
2 Inner Tube SAE 4340
601R14250
3 End Fitting
4 Spigot 4130 STL BAR
C. Reference Information
4. Job Set−Up
C. If the finish in the inspection area is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish.
5. Procedure
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Do the detailed inspection of the vane actuator tube assembly as follows:
(1) Examine all the accessible areas of the outer tube (1), inner tube (2), end fitting (3),
and spigot (4) without removing or disassembling the actuator assembly.
(2) Make sure you carefully examine the lower surface at the roller location for the
extended vane position.
(3) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or
other unserviceable condition.
(4) Make sure that there are no cracks, scratches, dents, gouges, corrosion or
damaged, loose or missing fasteners.
B. If necessary, send a defect and damage report to MHI RJ Group (SRM 51−13−01).
6. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish.
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the inboard flap vane (AMM 27−54−10−400−801).
INBOARD FLAP
VANE
(REF)
FWD
NOTE
Examine all accessible shaded area
without removing or disassembling
the actuator assembly.
Left side shown, right side is
almost the same.
SPIGOT
CRADLE ASSEMBLY 4
(REF) INNER TUBE
2
OUTER TUBE
1
rnd5752114_001.dg, ab/ik, 09/05/01
END FITTING
3
INBOARD
FLAP VANE
VIEW LOOKING UP
(REF)
ON INBOARD FLAP
(TYPICAL THREE PLACES)
Inspection of the Inboard−Flap Vane−Actuator Tube−Assembly
Figure 1
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the outboard flap upper and
lower skins for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 594 and 694 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the exterior of the wing trailing edge.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft pre Modification Summary TC601R25500 (Introduction of resin transfer molded
(RTM) flap).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Outboard Flap Upper and Lower Skins
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the outboard flap upper and lower skins, specially the areas that follow for
cracks, corrosion, and other damage:
− The area along the front spar and the intercostal spar fasteners
− The lower skin local to the hinge arm stations.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Outs
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the leading edge of the outboard flap (refer to AMM TASK 57−53−01−400−801).
D. Install the flap fairings that follow:
E. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
NOTES
Examine the shaded
area.
Left side is shown,
right side is almost
the same.
LEGEND
1. Upper skin.
2. Lower skin.
FRONT
SPAR DATUM
INTERCOSTAL
SPAR DATUM
UPPER SKIN
INTERCOSTAL
SPAR DATUM
2
rnd5753102_001.dg, kmw, nov23/2009
FRONT
SPAR DATUM
LOWER SKIN
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the structural components that
follow for cracks, corrosion, and other damage:
− Vane mounting ribs and supporting structure of the outboard flap including the
front spar and lower skin doubler
− Internal lower support structure for the ribs at the outboard−flap hinge−arm
locations at WS178.00, WS220.00, and WS264.00.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 594 and 694 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the inspection area is by removal of the leading edges and upper access
panels on the outboard flap.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft pre Modification Summary TC601R25500 (Introduction of resin transfer molded
(RTM) flap).
ACCESS DESIGNATION
594AT/694AT Flap−Vane Actuating Mechanism Access Panel
594BT/694BT
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the areas of the outboard flap that follow for cracks, corrosion, and other
damage:
− Nose ribs (1), (3) thru (5) and (7),and vane attach fittings (2) and (6). Make sure
you carefully examine the vane−mounting tangs and the lower flange of each
nose rib (2), (4), and (6)
− Vane support structure local to the nose ribs at WS178.00, WS220.00, and
WS264.00 that includes: the front spar (24), upper and lower skin doublers (25)
and (26), and components (8) thru (23).
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the access panels that follow:
(1) Install the access panels that follow:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
594AT/694AT Flap−Vane Actuating Mechanism Access Panel
594BT/694BT
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
FLS
1
171.963
FLS 2
189.57
FLS
209.39 3
FLS
4
235.84
FLS
254.96 5
FLS 6
280.66
FLS
7
296.073
24
25
TANG
(REF)
TYPICAL VIEW OF
ITEMS 1, 3, 5, AND 7
rnd5753104_001.dg, gw, oct6/2009
NOTES
Left side is shown, right side is almost the same.
WS178.00
WS220.00
10
WS264.00
24
2 11
9 12
8
16
25
15
24
14
13
4 18
22 17
25
21
20
NOTES
Left side is shown, right side is
almost the same.
rnd5753104_002.dg, gw, oct6/2009
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the internal area of the
outboard−flap hinges support structure for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
(2) This procedure is used to find surface cracks at the items that follow:
− The canted ribs
− The inboard, outboard hinge−arm fittings
− The inboard and outboard machined spar intercostals
− The front spar hinge support structure
− All the adjacent skin and doublers.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 594 and 694 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the inspection area is by removal of the leading edges and upper access
panels on the outboard flap.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft pre Modification Summary TC601R25500 (Introduction of resin transfer molded
(RTM) flap).
ACCESS DESIGNATION
594AT/694AT Flap−Vane Actuating Mechanism Access−Panel
594BT/694BT
5. Inspection for Damage to the Internal Area of the Outboard−Flap Hinges Support Structure
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the areas that follow for cracks, corrosion, and other damage:
− The canted ribs (3), (5), (13), and (15)
− The inboard and outboard hinge−arm fittings (2) and (12)
− The inboard and outboard machined spar intercostals (4) and (14)
− The front spar hinge support structure (1) and (11)
− The nose rib fitting (6), fitting (7), intercostals (8), (9), and rib (10)
− All the adjacent skin (17) and (18) and doublers (16) and (19).
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the access panels that follow:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
594AT/694AT Flap−Vane Actuating Mechanism Access−Panel
594BT/694BT
E. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
WS178.00
WS220.00
19 WS264.00
18
3
4
2 5
17 1 16
8
16
7
17
14 10
13 9
12
NOTES
Left side is shown, right side is
rnd5753106_001.dg, kmw, dec01/2009
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the hinge arms at WS178.00, WS220.00
and WS264.00 and the machined fittings mounted on the lower flap surface, for
cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zones 594 and 694 (refer to NDTM Part 1 General, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the inspection area is under the wing.
(2) It is necessary to remove the outboard flap.
ITEM
DRAWING OR PART
No. DESCRIPTION MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
NUMBER [2]
[1]
Hinge Fitting Outboard
1 601R14553
Half, WS178.00
7475−T7351 CMS 516−02
Hinge Fitting Inboard
2 601R14553
Half, WS178.00
Note [1]: Item number corresponds to the item number shown in Figure 1.
Note [2]: Numbers that do not include a dashed suffix are drawing numbers.
ITEM
DRAWING OR PART
No. DESCRIPTION MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
NUMBER [2]
[1]
Hinge Fitting Arm
3 Outboard Half, 601R14508
WS178.00
Hinge Fitting Arm
4 Inboard Half, 601R14508
WS178.00
Forward Lug Fitting,
5 601R14610
WS178.0
Aft Lug Fitting,
6 601R14619
WS178.00
Hinge Arm Outboard
7 601R14550
Half, WS220.00
Hinge Arm Inboard
8 601R14550
Half, WS220.00
Nose Rib Fitting,
9 601R14603
WS220.00 7475−T7351
7475 T7351 CMS 516
516−02
02
10 Fitting, (Rib) WS220.00 601R14545
Hinge Arm Outboard
11 601R14611
Half, WS264.00
Hinge Arm Inboard
12 601R14611
Half, WS264.00
Hinge Fitting,
13 Outboard Half, 601R14557
WS264.00
Hinge Fitting, Inboard
14 601R14556
Half, WS264.00
15 Fork Fitting WS264.00 601R14615
Forward Lug Fitting,
16 601R14610
WS264.00
Aft Lug Fitting,
17 601R14619
WS264.00
Note [1]: Item number corresponds to the item number shown in Figure 1.
Note [2]: Numbers that do not include a dashed suffix are drawing numbers.
2. Effectivity
A. Aircraft pre Modsum TC601R25500 (pre RTM Flap).
− Inspection mirror.
A. Procedure
(1) Remove the outboard flap (Refer to the AMM TASK 27−54−05−000−801).
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(2) Clean the inspection area (Refer to the SRM, Chapter 51 26−00).
(3) Is is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless they show deterioration
or local damage.
NOTE: If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove
the finish (Refer to the SRM, Chapter 51).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Outboard Flap Hinge Arms at WS178.00, WS220.00, and
WS264.00
Refer to the areas shaded in Figure 1.
NOTE: If the surfaces of the skin are painted, look at the paint condition (for signs of cracks
and corrosion).
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the hinge arms for cracks, corrosion or other damage.
(2) Examine the machined fittings attached to the lower flap surface for cracks,
corrosion or other damage. Pay particular attention to the lugs.
(3) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, corroded, or other unserviceable
condition. Pay particular attention to the hinge arm attachment bolts.
A. Procedure
(1) All signs of corrosion or cracks are cause for rejection.
(2) All signs of damaged fasteners are cause for rejection.
(3) Record and report results in accordance with company guidelines and policies.
(4) For indications that exceed the allowable limits, it is recommended that you contact
MHIRJ Customer Support (refer to SRM 51−13−01).
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
C
B
A
2
6
9 10
4
1
3
A WS178.00
8
16
B WS220.00
13
17
14
NOTE
Examine the shaded areas.
rnd5753114_001.dg, lr, oct23/2007
12
11
15
C WS264.00
1. General
A. Function
(1) This procedure is used to find surface cracks on the upper and lower vane−skins
and the forward end of the vane−tangs and all the machined support fittings of the
outboard flap vane.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 594 and 694 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access to the inspection area is by the exterior of the aircraft.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft pre Modification Summary TC601R25500 (Introduction of resin transfer molded
(RTM) flap).
(4) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(5) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the areas that follow for cracks, corrosion, and other damage:
− Upper (1) and lower (2) vane skins
− Machined support fittings (4) thru (8) and inboard and outboard ribs (3) and (9),
and the forward end of the vane tangs. Make sure that you carefully examine the
base of each tang, specially the fitting (6).
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Retract the flaps (refer to AMM TASK 27−54−000−866−802).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
B
FLS171.963
A
NOTES
C Left side shown, right side
almost the same.
C Skin not shown for clarity.
3 FLS189.57
Examine the shaded area.
E
Examine the upper and lower skins.
4
E
FLS235.84
FLS209.39
E
D
E 5
6 FLS254.96 D
D
7
D
LEGEND
1. Upper skin.
2. Lower skin. FLS280.66
rnd5753122_001.dg, gv/kms, dec10/2009
TANG
(REF)
3
9
5
7 2
TANG
(REF)
4
6 2
rnd5753122_002.dg, gv, nov27/2009
8 NOTES
LEGEND Left side shown, right side
1. Upper skin. 6. Vane support fitting. almost the same.
2. Lower skin. 7. Vane support fitting. Cross sections are typical
3. Inboard vane−tip rib. 8. Vane support fitting. for each rib type.
4. Vane support fitting. 9. Outboard vane−tip rib.
5. Vane support fitting. Examine the shaded area.
1. General
A. This inspection procedure is used to visually examine all visible composite surfaces of the
composite outboard flap and vane for damage. This procedure is applicable to the left
side and the right side.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft Post−Modsum TC601R25500
4. Job Set−Up
WARNING: PUT THE SAFETY DEVICES, THE WARNING SIGNS, AND THE WARNING
PLACARDS IN POSITION BEFORE YOU START A PROCEDURE ON OR NEAR:
− FLIGHT CONTROLS
− FLIGHT CONTROL SURFACES
− COMPONENTS THAT MOVE.
MAKE SURE THAT THERE ARE NO PERSONS OR EQUIPMENT ON OR NEAR
THE FLIGHT CONTROL SURFACES. ACCIDENTAL MOVEMENT OF THE
FLIGHT CONTROLS CAN CAUSE INJURIES TO PERSONS AND/OR DAMAGE
TO EQUIPMENT.
A. Install the applicable external signs to give warning of the flap movement.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 1
57−53−125 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
B. Install a placard on the flap control lever to give warning against unwanted operation of
the flaps.
C. Fully extend the flaps to the 45−degree position (Ref. TASK 27−54−00−866−801).
D. Make sure the inspection area is clean.
E. If necessary, remove the water−displacing corrosion−inhibiting compound (CIC) with a
lint−free cloth and solvent (SRM 51−26−00).
F. If necessary, remove the sealant.
G. If the finish in the inspection area is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish.
5. Procedure
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Do the inspection of all visible composite surfaces of the outboard flap and vane.
(1) Make sure that there are no cracks, scratches, dents, gouges, holes, or corrosion.
(2) Make sure that there are no signs of damage to the external surfaces on the skins.
NOTE: Internal inspection of spar and rib is necessary only if external
skin damage is detected.
B. If necessary, send a defect and damage report to MHI RJ Group(SRM 51−13−01).
6. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish.
B. If necessary, apply water−displacing corrosion−inhibiting compound (CIC) to the
applicable surfaces (AMM 51−25−56−390−802).
C. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
D. Retract the flaps (Ref. TASK 27−54−00−866−802).
E. Remove the warning placards and signs.
ZONE 594
ZONE 594
NOTES B
1. Left side shown. Right side opposite.
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the aileron hinge−rib lugs, the
center hinge fitting, and the adjacent structure on the face of the ailerons for cracks,
corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 599 and 699 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the left and the right wing trailing edge.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft pre MODSUM TC601R15307 (Introduction of CRJ700 aileron and adjustable
link assembly) or TC601R16858 (Composite aileron using resin transfer molding (RTM)
technology).
(4) If the inspection area is bare or unpainted, continue with the procedure.
(5) If the inspection surfaces are painted:
(a) Look at the paint condition for signs of cracks and corrosion in the component
material.
(b) Remove the paint and/or primer only if there is deterioration or local damage
(refer to SRM TASK 51−26−00).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Aileron Hinge−Rib Lugs, the Center Hinge Fitting and the
Adjacent Structure
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the lugs of the aileron hinge rib (1,2,4 and 5) for cracks, corrosion, and
other damage.
(2) Examine the forward face of the center hinge fitting (3) and 2.0 in. (50.8 mm) of the
adjacent structure that follows for cracks, corrosion, and other damage. Make sure
you carefully examine the flanges, the web, and the lugs of the No 2/3 center hinge
fitting (3):
− Upper and lower inboard splice−Angle (6 & 7)
− Upper and lower inboard boom (8 & 9)
− Upper and lower outboard splice−Angle (10 & 11)
− Upper and lower outboard boom (12 & 13).
(3) Examine all the hinge and PCU attachment bolts (14, 15, 16 & 17) for signs of wear,
cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
(4) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
C. Install the ailerons (refer to AMM TASK 27−15−01−400−801).
D. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
A B
UPPER SKIN
(REF)
A
UPPER SKIN
LEADING EDGE
(REF)
NOTES
Left side is shown, right side
is allmost the same.
Bolt for inboard aileron hinge
shown, typical for all
inspection areas.
Examine the shaded area.
1
2.0 in.
2
8 (50.8 mm)
6
7 2.0 in.
(50.8 mm)
3 rnd5761101_001.dg, gw/kmw, dec09/2009
10
11
12
13
4
5
Inspection of the Aileron Hinge−Rib Lugs, the Center Hinge Fittings and the Adjacent Structure
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
F/SPAR
DATUM
TOP
O.S.L.
3
8
UP
FWD
9
BTM F/SPAR
O.S.L. DATUM
TOP
O.S.L.
NOTE UP
10
Examine the shaded area. FWD
12
3
13
rnd5761101_002.dg, gw/kmw, dec09/2009
11
BTM
O.S.L.
Inspection of the Aileron Hinge−Rib Lugs, the Center Hinge Fittings and the Adjacent Structure
Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
PCU
(REF)
3
16
NOTE
Examine the shaded area. WING
(REF)
HINGE No. 1
STA 311.539
rnd5761101_003.dg, gw/kmw, dec09/2009
14
Inspection of the Aileron Hinge−Rib Lugs, the Center Hinge Fittings and the Adjacent Structure
Figure 1 (Sheet 3)
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the aileron upper and lower
skin panels for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: The data in this task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is
almost the same.
B. Reference Information
(1) For more data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Testing Manual (NDTM), Part 1 General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The inspection area is found in Zones 599 and 699 (refer to NDTM TASK Part 1,
51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is by the exterior of the aircraft.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
− Inspection mirror.
5. Inspection for Damage to the Aileron Upper Skin and Lower Skin
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
(1) Examine the areas that follow between WS282.00 and WS353.00 for cracks,
corrosion, and other damage. Make sure you carefully examine the aileron upper
skin (1) and lower skin (2), and the non−removable panel.
(2) Examine each fastener in the inspection area for signs of a loose, bent, corroded,
and other unserviceable condition.
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (refer to SRM TASK
51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the inspection area.
WS282.00
WS353.00
NOTES
Left side shown, right side
almost the same
Examine the shaded area.
WS353.00 WS282.00
LEGEND
rnd5761102_001.dg, gv, dec16/2009
1. Top skin.
NOTES
Left side shown, right side
almost the same
Examine the shaded area.
NON−REMOVABLE
PANEL
WS353.00 (REF) WS282.00
2 B
LEGEND
2. Bottom skin.
rnd5761102_002.dg, gv, dec16/2009
AWL 53−61−104
1. General
A. This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the flanges and the web of the
aileron front spar for cracks, corrosion, and other damage. The data in this task is given
for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is almost the same.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft.
REFERENCE DESIGNATION
Commercially Available Light source
Commercially Available Inspection mirror
B. Parts
DRAWING MATERIAL
ITEM DESCRIPTION
NUMBER SPECIFICATION
1 Upper Outboard Boom
2 Upper Inboard Boom
3 Lower Outboard Boom
4 Lower Inboard Boom 2024−T42 AL
601R13031
5 Upper Outboard Splice−Angle ALY ALCD SH
6 Upper Inboard Splice−Angle
7 Lower Outboard Splice−Angle
8 Lower Inboard Splice−Angle
9 Machined Center Hinge−Bracket 601R13005 Ti6Al−V4
C. Reference Information
4. Job Set−Up
A. Obey all the hydraulic safety precautions (AMM 29−00−00−910−801).
B. Obey all the flight−control safety precautions (AMM 27−00−00−910−803).
C. Remove the access panels that follow:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
598AB/698AB Shroud
598BB/698BB Shroud
D. Remove the lower inboard leading−edge access panel of the aileron (599AB/699AB)
(AMM 57−60−32−000−801).
E. Remove the lower center leading−edge access panel of the aileron (599BB/699BB) (AMM
57−60−32−000−802).
F. Remove the lower outboard leading−edge access panel of the aileron (599CB/699CB)
(AMM 57−60−32−000−803).
G. Make sure the inspection area is clean.
H. If the finish in the inspection area is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 2
57−61−104 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
5. Procedure
Refer to Figure 1.
6. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (SRM 51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
C. Install the access panels that follow:
ACCESS DESIGNATION
599AB/699AB Leading Edge
599BB/699BB Leading Edge
D. Install the lower inboard leading−edge access panel of the aileron (599AB/699AB) (AMM
57−60−32−400−801).
E. Install the lower center leading−edge access panel of the aileron (599BB/699BB) (AMM
57−60−32−400−802).
F. Install the lower outboard leading−edge access panel of the aileron (599CB/699CB)
(AMM 57−60−32−400−803).
A
LEGEND
1. Top outboard boom.
2. Top inboard boom.
WS262.00 3. Bottom outboard boom.
WS353.00
4. Bottom inboard boom.
5. Top outboard splice angle.
6. Top inboard splice angle.
7. Bottom outboard splice angle.
1 8. Bottom inboard splice angle.
9. Machined center hinge−bracket.
2
4
6
8
9
A 7
5
3
6
1
2 NOTE
rnd5761104_001.dg, gv/kmw, dec18/2009
B B
1. General
A. This inspection procedure is used to visually examine the machined hinge back−up ribs
and the intercostal spar of the aileron at aileron stations (AS): AS311.539, AS337.034,
AS343.534, and AS364.016 for cracks, corrosion, and other damage. The data in this
task is given for the left side of the aircraft, the right side is almost the same.
2. Effectivity
A. All aircraft Pre−Modsum TC601R15307 (Introduction of CRJ700 aileron and adjustable
link) or TC601R16858 (Introduction of resin transfer molded (RTM) aileron).
REFERENCE DESIGNATION
Commercially Available Light source
Commercially Available Inspection mirror
Commercially Available Borescope
B. Parts
DRAWING MATERIAL
ITEM DESCRIPTION
NUMBER SPECIFICATION
2024−T3 Al Aly
1 Top Intercostal
Alcd Sheet
024−T42 Al Aly
2 Top Intercostal
Alcd Sheet
601R13000
2024−T3 Al Aly
3 Bottom Intercostal
Alcd Sheet
2024−T42 Al Aly
4 Bottom Intercostal
Alcd Sheet
5 Inboard Rib, AS311.539 601R13002
6 Outboard Rib, AS311.539 601R13003
7 Inboard Rib AS337.034 601R13053
8 Outboard Rib AS337.034 601R13054 7475−T7351 Al
9 Inboard Rib AS343.534 601R13057 Aly Plate
10 Outboard Rib AS343.534 601R13056
11 Inboard Rib AS364.016 601R13055
12 Outboard Rib AS364.016 601R13051
C. Reference Information
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 1
57−61−105 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
4. Job Set−Up
A. Obey all the hydraulic safety precautions (AMM 29−00−00−910−801).
B. Obey all the flight−control safety precautions (AMM 27−00−00−910−803).
C. Move the aileron to the up position.
D. Remove the access panels that follow:
NOTE: Refer to Structural Repair Manual (SRM) standard practices to remove panels
599DB/699DB.
ACCESS DESIGNATION
598AB/698AB Shroud
598BB/698BB Shroud
599DB/699DB Access Panel
E. Remove the lower inboard leading−edge access panel of the aileron (599AB/699AB)
(AMM 57−60−32−000−801).
F. Remove the lower center leading−edge access panel of the aileron (599BB/699BB) (AMM
57−60−32−000−802).
G. Remove the lower outboard leading−edge access panel of the aileron (599CB/699CB)
(AMM 57−60−32−000−803).
H. Make sure the inspection area is clean.
I. If the finish in the inspection area is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish.
5. Procedure
Refer to Figure 1.
6. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (SRM 51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
C. Install the access panels that follow:
NOTE: Refer to Structural Repair Manual (SRM) standard practices to install panels
599DB/699DB.
EFFECTIVITY: SEE PARAGRAPH 2 Part 9 Page 3
57−61−105 Oct 10/20
CRJ200
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL
Part 9 − Visual
ACCESS DESIGNATION
598AB/698AB Shroud
598BB/698BB Shroud
599DB/699DB Access Panel
D. Install the lower inboard leading−edge access panel of the aileron (599AB/699AB) (AMM
57−60−32−400−801).
E. Install the lower center leading−edge access panel of the aileron (599BB/699BB) (AMM
57−60−32−400−802).
F. Install the lower outboard leading−edge access panel of the aileron (599CB/699CB)
(AMM 57−60−32−400−803).
LEGEND
A
1. Top intercostal.
2. Top intercostal.
3. Bottom intercostal.
4. Bottom intercostal.
WS262.00 5. Inboard rib AS311.539.
WS353.00
6. Outboard rib AS311.539.
7. Inboard rib AS337.034.
8. Outboard rib AS337.034.
9. Inboard rib AS343.534.
10. Outboard rib AS343.534.
11. Inboard rib AS364.016.
12. Outboard rib AS364.016.
1 1 AS311.539
3 3
2
AS337.034
2 AS343.534
2
5
6 1
AS364.016
4
7 1
8
4
9
10
4
3
11
12
A rnd5761105_001.dg, gv/kmw, dec01/2009
NOTES 3
1 Examine the shaded areas.
Inspection of the Machined Hinge Back−Up Ribs and the Intercostal Spar of the Aileron
Figure 1
AWL 53−61−106
1. General
A. This inspection is used to visually examine the aileron interface for a failure of its
multi−load path fail safe structure including hinge fittings and back−up structure for
cracks, corrosion, and other damage. This inspection applies to the left and right side of
the aircraft. The inspection of the left side only is given.
2. Effectivity
A. On aircraft post−Modsum TC601R15307 (CRJ 700 aileron installed).
REFERENCE DESIGNATION
Commercially Available Light source
Commercially Available Inspection mirror
Commercially Available Borescope, if required
B. Parts
DRAWING MATERIAL
ITEM DESCRIPTION
NUMBER SPECIFICATION
1 Inboard Hinge Rib, AS311.539 CC670−13027
2 Outboard Hinge Rib, AS311.539 CC670−13028 7475−T7351 AL
3 Inboard Hinge Rib, AS364.016 CC670−13037 ALY PL
4 Outboard Hinge Rib, AS364.016 CC670−13038
5 Hinge Rib, AS343.534 CC670−13044 7475−T7351 AL
6 Hinge Rib, AS337.034 CC670−13045 ALY PL
7475−T7351 AL
7 Aileron center−hinge fitting CC670−13013
ALY PL
8 Hinge bolts
S7064−09DU31 A286 SST
9 PCU bolts
10 Outboard aileron hinge
2024 T42 AL
2024−T42
11 Inboard aileron hinge CC670−13000
ALY ALCD SH
12 Center aileron hinge
C. Reference Information
4. Job Set−Up
A. Obey all the flight−control safety precautions (AMM 27−00−00−910−803).
B. Remove the lower inboard leading−edge access panel of the aileron (599AB/699AB)
(AMM 57−60−32−000−801).
C. Remove the lower center leading−edge access panel of the aileron (599BB/699BB) (AMM
57−60−32−000−802).
D. Remove the lower outboard leading−edge access panel of the aileron (599CB/699CB)
(AMM 57−60−32−000−803).
E. Make sure the inspection area is clean.
F. If the finish in the inspection area is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish.
5. Procedure
Refer to Figure 1.
A. Do a detailed inspection of the aileron hinge fittings and back−up structure as follow:
NOTE: If the surfaces of any component are painted, look at the paint condition (for
signs of cracks and corrosion) in the component material.
(1) Visually examine the aileron interface for a failure of its multi−load path fail safe
structure for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
(2) Inspect the aileron center−hinge fitting (7). Pay particular attention to the center
hinge and PCU pickup lugs, and bolts. Also examine back−up ribs using the
borescope (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−20−09).
(3) Inspect the aileron side−hinge rib at aileron stations AS311.00, and AS364.00. Also
examine the back−up ribs using the borescope (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−20−09).
NOTE: The ribs behind the aileron spar can be inspected through the spar
inspection holes.
(4) Inspect the four wing trailing−edge aileron−hinges at aileron stations AS311.00,
AS338.00, AS342.00 and AS364.00.
(5) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
B. All signs of corrosion or cracks are cause for rejection.
C. All signs of damaged fasteners are cause for rejection.
D. Record and report results in accordance with company guidelines and policies.
E. For indications that exceed the allowable limits, it is recommended that you contact
MHIRJ Customer Support (refer to SRM 51−13−01).
6. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (SRM 51−21−16).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
C. Install the lower inboard leading−edge access panel of the aileron (599AB/699AB) (AMM
57−60−32−400−801).
D. Install the lower center leading−edge access panel of the aileron (599BB/699BB) (AMM
57−60−32−400−802).
E. Install the lower outboard leading−edge access panel of the aileron (599CB/699CB)
(AMM 57−60−32−400−803).
WS 262.00
WS 352.29
LEGEND
1. Inboard hinge rib, AS311.539.
2. Outboard hinge rib, AS311.539.
3. Inboard hinge rib, AS364.016.
4. Outboard hinge rib, AS364.016.
5. Hinge rib, AS343.534.
6. Hinge rib, AS337.034.
SPAR 7. Aileron center hinge fitting.
INSPECTION
HOLE
(12 TYPICAL)
CENTER
1 HINGE LUGS
2
REF
6
5
3
4
SIDE HINGE
LUG
REF AS 311.539
PCU LUGS
REF
AS 337.034
AS 343.534 7
rnd5761106_001.dg, rt, mg, june 09. 2010
SIDE HINGE
LUG AS 364.016
REF
WS 262.00
WS 352.29
NOTE
Examine the shaded areas.
Left hand side shown, AILERON
right hand side similar. (REF)
WING
(REF)
AILERON
(REF)
WS 262.00
WS 352.29
NOTE
Examine the shaded areas. AILERON
(REF)
Left hand side shown,
right hand side similar.
LEGEND
WING
8. Hinge bolts.
(REF)
9. PCU bolts.
AILERON 9
(REF)
WS 262.00
D
WS 352.29
AILERON
(REF)
NOTE
Examine the shaded areas.
Left hand side shown,
right hand side similar.
WING
(REF)
AILERON
D (REF)
WS 262.00
E
WS 352.29
NOTE WING
Examine the shaded areas. (REF)
Left hand side shown,
right hand side similar.
AILERON
rnd5761106_005.dg, rt, 23/10/02
(REF)
VIEW E
1. General
A. Function
(1) This inspection is used to visually examine the external surface of the aileron upper
and lower skin for cracks, corrosion, and other damage.
NOTE: This inspection applies to the left and right side of the aircraft. The
inspection of the left side only is given.
B. Reference Information
(1) For added data that is necessary to do this inspection, refer to the manuals that
follow:
− Nondestructive Test Manual (NDTM) Part 1−General Information
− Structural Repair Manual (SRM)
− Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM).
C. Location
(1) The area is in Zone 559 and 699 (Refer to NDTM Part 1, 51−01−03).
D. Access
(1) Access is from the right and left wing.
2. Effectivity
A. On aircraft post−Modsum TC601R15307 (CRJ 700 aileron installed).
A. Procedure
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF CLEAN AIR AND
SUFFICIENT FIRE PROTECTION. USE APPROVED BODY PROTECTION
WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS. ALL SOLVENTS ARE POISONOUS AND
SOME ARE FLAMMABLE.
(1) Clean the inspection surfaces (Refer to the SRM, 51−26−00).
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the finish from the parts unless it shows
deterioration or local damage.
(2) If the finish in the area to be inspected is damaged or deteriorated, remove the finish
(Refer to the SRM, chapter 51).
5. Inspection for Damage to the Aileron Upper and Lower Skin
Refer to the area shaded in Figure 1.
A. Inspection Procedure
NOTE: If the surfaces of any component are painted, look at the paint condition (for
signs of cracks and corrosion) in the component material.
(1) Examine the external surface of the upper skin and lower skin for cracks and other
damage. Pay particular attention to the fastener locations at the area of the inboard
and outboard spar splices at AS330.00 and AS350.00.
(2) Examine all of the fasteners for signs of a loose, bent, corroded, or other
unserviceable condition.
6. Acceptance or Rejection Criteria
A. All signs of corrosion or cracks are cause for rejection.
B. All signs of damaged fasteners are cause for rejection.
C. Record and report results in accordance with company guidelines and policies.
D. For indications that exceed the allowable limits, it is recommended that you contact
MHIRJ Customer Support (refer to SRM 51−13−01).
7. Close Out
A. If the finish in the inspection area was removed, replace the finish (Refer to the SRM,
Chapter 51).
B. Remove all tools, equipment, and unwanted materials from the work area.
WS 282.00
WS 353.00
NOTES
Examine the shaded area (upper skin).
Examine the lower skin.
AS 350.00
SPAR SPLICE AREA
(OUTBOARD)
AS 330.00
SPAR SPLICE AREA FRONT SPAR
LOWER SKIN (INBOARD) (REF)
2
AS 302.00
" %%
,' - './(0 '*(, )1,& 2 3 4
'1(5 -' ,1(/((, () - './(0 '*(, (, -' 0'(6
! " -'' -' )(, () -
*(.'4
2''/ - './(0 '*(, , '*(, 77 ,1(/(' -
,)(.(, ,( -' (,5'1*' ',& ,4
- './(0 '*(, '*' 2 3
! $
(
'*' -' 1(' ( /(1'5'4
!!
"# $ &'
()
%%
4 ','
4 !,1(,
89 - ,/'1(, /(1'5' '5 ( *0 ':.,' -' 1(./(,', () -' *'1
;<' 89 /1-.1( /*( 1'3 - )((6 )( 11=3 1(((,3
,5 (-' 5.&'#
=,3 5(;'
//( /'
(/ 1,'5 ;
//( 1'4
# -' 5 , - = &*', )( -' ') 5' () -' 1)3 -' &- 5'
.( -' .'4
4 (1(,
89 -' ,/'1(, ' )(,5 , ?(,' ,5 @ 8')' ( 2 3
%%94
4 11'
89 11' -(&- -' -(<(, ;<' ),&4
! %& %
!% % %
" #$
!' #($
%7 "
(;'
@%%%
$ AA%+7
//( /'
') =, @%%% %7 "
$ AA%+
7 &- =, @%%%7
BC# '. ,.;' 1('/(,5 ( '. ,.;' , !&'
4
BC# .;' - 5( ,( ,15' 5-'5 )): ' 56,& ,.;'4
!!
"# $
%%
&'
()
(* +
CRJ200
! %& %
!% % %
" #$
!' #($
(;'3
@%%%77 D%%D7
'1 ;<' =,
"
@ (/
,'5 ; @%%% > @%%
D%%D@
D 5 /
/ @%%%7
"
%77 "
E 5 / //' F';
$
@%%%%
%7 "
,&' AA%+
$
% ; GE F'; %77 "
$
@%%%
,&' %7 "
H
AA%%+
D%D@ "
5 / '' @%%%
H
7 //'
-,,' @%%%E%
(6'
-,,' @%%%E D%%D@ "
@ 5 / ))',' @%%%% > @%%
D%%D7 "
D '' !,& @%%%E
BC# '. ,.;' 1('/(,5 ( '. ,.;' , !&'
4
BC# .;' - 5( ,( ,15' 5-'5 )): ' 56,& ,.;'4
4 ))'1*0
4 1)4
74 '/(, ,5
',,&
4 '.(*' -' -(<(,;<' . 1( 8 D7%%%%E%94
>4 =' ' -' ,/'1(, ' 1',4
4 ) ,'1'03 '.(*' -' 6'5/1,& 1(((,,-;,& 1(./(,5 8
9 6-
,)'' 1(- ,5 (*',4
!!
"# $ &'
()
%%
4 ) -' ),- , -' ,/'1(, ' 5.&'5 ( 5''('53 '.(*' -' ),-4
4 (1'5'
')' ( !&'
4
4 ( -' '/ - )((6 )( -' 5''5 ,/'1(,#
89 :.,' -' /1-.1( /*( 1' ,15,&3 5(;' 893 //(
/' 893 ') =, 893 &- =, 8793 ,5 4% ,4 8%4E ..9 '1- 5' () -' 5J1',
1,'5 ; 8@93 )( 11=3 1(((,3 ,5 (-' 5.&'4
89 :.,' -' //( 1' - )((6 )( 11=3 1(((,3 ,5 (-' 5.&'#
(;'3 *'1 ;<' =, 89
5 / 1/3 //' 6';3 ''3 ,5 ))',' 8D3 E3 3 @9
,&' 83 3 9
; GE 6'; 8%9
//' ,5 (6'
-,,' 87 K9
'' !,& 8D94
89 :.,' '1- )',' , -' ,/'1(, ' )( &, () (('3 ;',3 1((5'53
,5 (-' ,'*1';' 1(,5(,4
D4
('
4 ) -' ),- , -' ,/'1(, ' 6 '.(*'53 '/1' -' ),- 8 @94
>4 ) ,'1'03 'M//0 -' 6'5/1,& 1(((,,-;,& 1(./(,5 8
9 8
94
4 '.(*' ((3 'I/.',3 ,5 ,6,'5 .' )(. -' 6(= '4
4 , -' -(<(, ;<' . 1( 8 D7%7%%E%94
!!
"# $
%%
&'
7
()
(* +
CRJ200
LEGEND NOTES
1. Doubler. 10. Rib No. 8 web. Examine the shaded area.
2. Support plate. 11. Angle.
rnd5531112_006.dg, gw, dec07/2009
!!
"# $ &'
()
%%
NOTE
1 Area to be examined.
Left side is shown, right
side is almost the same.
FWD
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm)
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm)
3
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm)
B
rnd5531112_007.dc, gw, dec07/2009
!!
"# $
%%
&'
@
()
(* +
CRJ200
NOTE
1 Area to be examined.
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm) 1 14 4
FWD
12 5
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm)
F F
D
11
16
10
9 8
2.0 in. 16
(50.8 mm)
5
12
3
2.0 in.
14
(50.8 mm)
rnd5531112_008.dc, gw, dec08/2009
!!
"# $ &'
D
()
%%
NOTE
1 Area to be examined.
Left side is shown, right
side is almost the same.
2 1 1 3 14
FWD
6
2.0 in.
(50.8 mm)
8 16 7 13 9 11 2.0 in. 10 12
(50.8 mm)
D
!!
"# $
%%
&'
E
()
(* +
CRJ200
17
UP
FWD
15
10 11 10
FWD
rnd5531112_010.dg, gw, dec09/2009
!!
"# $ &'
()
%%
# &
-( . (/0)1 (+)- *2-' 3 4 !5
(2)6 .( -2)0))- )* . (/0)1 (+)- )- .( 1()7
" # .(( .( *)- )* .
+)/(5
3((0 . (/0)1 (+)- - (+)- 88 -2)0)( .
-*)/)- -) .( )-6(2+( (-' -5
. (/0)1 (+)- (+( 3 4 !
" % 9 3% ":
"
9: " ) (+( .( 2)( ) 0)2(6(5
""
#$ % & '(
)*
&
: !
5 (-(
5 .( -)-6(2+( (-' 0)2(6( . *))7 *) .( -0(2)- )* .( ( 0((
;<.(6 *)76 *2( ;()7 *)) *2(,;*2( 22<5
&5 **(2+1
5 2* 0)
=!= , ) 9 ==!>5
)//(21 +;( A0))- ))*".'.
)//(21 +;( )((2)02
)//(21 +;( '-*1-' = )7(
)//(21 +;( 9)(2)0(
95
5 (*((-2( -*)/)-
== &>=&===>= (/)+ )* .( ";('
-6 ")/ -)-
== &>=&8==>= -)- )* .( ";('
-6 ")/ -)-
== =====>=8 (/)+ )* .(
')
)/0/(- ")) -(
== =====>=8 -)- )* .(
')
)/0/(- ")) -(
""
#$ % &
&
'(
&
)*
! )+ ,&
CRJ200
== &=>=& :(02-'
))C
)--.;-'
)/0)-6
==> = (*(2 -6 /'( (0
(@((0) )2(C
6(
==> &== ((4 -+)-/(-4
"( -< -6 "(7 (C
-'
==> &==
(--'
85 ?); ( 0
5 (/)+( .( 2') 2)/0/(- *)) 0-( . *))7 D =====>=8E$
&>" ")) 0-(
&>?" ")) 0-(
&>" ")) 0-(
&>&" ")) 0-(
&>&3" ")) 0-(
95 (/)+( ) * .( *;(' -6 *)/ -)- -(2(1 ) '( ) .( -0(2)-
( D &>=&===>=E5
5 <( ( .( -0(2)- ( 2(-5
5 * -(2(14 (/)+( .( 7(602-' 2)))--.;-' 2)/0)-6 D
E 7.
-*(( 2). -6 )+(- D &==E5
5 * -(2(14 (/)+( .( (-5
"5 * .( *-. - .( -0(2)- ( 6/'(6 ) 6(()(64 (/)+( .( *-.5
5 )2(6(
(*( ) "'( 5
5 ) .( 6((6 -0(2)- )* .( ( 0(( ;<.(6 ": *2( ;()7 *)) *))7$
DE A/-( .( *)76 *2( +;( ( )* .( (-*)2-' 6);( DE )* .( (
0((;<.(6 7(; ;(7((- 9&!5= -6 9&!5= *) 22<4 2)))- -6
).( 6/'(5
D&E 1 02 (-)- - -( 7. .( .(( )* .( +(2 F **(-(5
DE A/-( .( ( *) 22<4 2)))-4 -6 ).( 6/'(5 <( ( 1) 2(*1
(A/-(
D8E A/-( (2. *(-( - .( -0(2)- ( *) '- )* ))(4 ;(-4 2))6(64
-6 ).( -(+2(;( 2)-6)-5
""
#$ % & '(
)*
&
5
)(
5 * .( *-. - .( -0(2)- ( 7 (/)+(64 (02( .( *-.5
95 * -(2(14 (001 .( 7(602-' 2)))--.;-' 2)/0)-6 D
E D
&E5
5 - .( *;(' -6 *)/ -)- D &>=&8==>=E5
5 - .( 2') 2)/0/(- *)) 0-( . *))7 D =====>=8E$
&>" ")) 0-(
&>?" ")) 0-(
&>" ")) 0-(
&>&" ")) 0-(
&>&3" ")) 0-(
5 (/)+( ))4 (@0/(-4 -6 -7-(6 /( *)/ .( 7)< (5
""
#$ % &
&
'(
8
)*
! )+ ,&
CRJ200
1
A
WL69.00
B B
RBL36.20
LBL36.20
RBL27.50
RBL18.00 LBL27.50
LBL18.00
RBL9.50 BL0.00 LBL9.50
RBL13.75 LBL13.75
A
VIEW LOOKING AFT
BL0.00
Z−MEMBER
(REF)
LEGEND
1. Pressure bulkhead web.
HEEL OF Z
rnd5361157_001.dg, kp, June 13, 2014
FS621.00
B B 1
((6 -0(2)- )* .( ( 0(( ;<.(6 ": *2( ;()7 *))
"'(
""
#$ % & '(
)*
&